dect
/
linux-2.6
Archived
13
0
Fork 0
Code Releases Activity
This repository has been archived on 2022-02-17. You can view files and clone it, but cannot push or open issues or pull requests.
linux-2.6/net/wireless/nl80211.c

9252 lines
241 KiB
C
Raw Normal View History

[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/*
* This is the new netlink-based wireless configuration interface.
*
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
* Copyright 2006-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
*/
#include <linux/if.h>
#include <linux/module.h>
#include <linux/err.h>
include cleanup: Update gfp.h and slab.h includes to prepare for breaking implicit slab.h inclusion from percpu.h percpu.h is included by sched.h and module.h and thus ends up being included when building most .c files. percpu.h includes slab.h which in turn includes gfp.h making everything defined by the two files universally available and complicating inclusion dependencies. percpu.h -> slab.h dependency is about to be removed. Prepare for this change by updating users of gfp and slab facilities include those headers directly instead of assuming availability. As this conversion needs to touch large number of source files, the following script is used as the basis of conversion. http://userweb.kernel.org/~tj/misc/slabh-sweep.py The script does the followings. * Scan files for gfp and slab usages and update includes such that only the necessary includes are there. ie. if only gfp is used, gfp.h, if slab is used, slab.h. * When the script inserts a new include, it looks at the include blocks and try to put the new include such that its order conforms to its surrounding. It's put in the include block which contains core kernel includes, in the same order that the rest are ordered - alphabetical, Christmas tree, rev-Xmas-tree or at the end if there doesn't seem to be any matching order. * If the script can't find a place to put a new include (mostly because the file doesn't have fitting include block), it prints out an error message indicating which .h file needs to be added to the file. The conversion was done in the following steps. 1. The initial automatic conversion of all .c files updated slightly over 4000 files, deleting around 700 includes and adding ~480 gfp.h and ~3000 slab.h inclusions. The script emitted errors for ~400 files. 2. Each error was manually checked. Some didn't need the inclusion, some needed manual addition while adding it to implementation .h or embedding .c file was more appropriate for others. This step added inclusions to around 150 files. 3. The script was run again and the output was compared to the edits from #2 to make sure no file was left behind. 4. Several build tests were done and a couple of problems were fixed. e.g. lib/decompress_*.c used malloc/free() wrappers around slab APIs requiring slab.h to be added manually. 5. The script was run on all .h files but without automatically editing them as sprinkling gfp.h and slab.h inclusions around .h files could easily lead to inclusion dependency hell. Most gfp.h inclusion directives were ignored as stuff from gfp.h was usually wildly available and often used in preprocessor macros. Each slab.h inclusion directive was examined and added manually as necessary. 6. percpu.h was updated not to include slab.h. 7. Build test were done on the following configurations and failures were fixed. CONFIG_GCOV_KERNEL was turned off for all tests (as my distributed build env didn't work with gcov compiles) and a few more options had to be turned off depending on archs to make things build (like ipr on powerpc/64 which failed due to missing writeq). * x86 and x86_64 UP and SMP allmodconfig and a custom test config. * powerpc and powerpc64 SMP allmodconfig * sparc and sparc64 SMP allmodconfig * ia64 SMP allmodconfig * s390 SMP allmodconfig * alpha SMP allmodconfig * um on x86_64 SMP allmodconfig 8. percpu.h modifications were reverted so that it could be applied as a separate patch and serve as bisection point. Given the fact that I had only a couple of failures from tests on step 6, I'm fairly confident about the coverage of this conversion patch. If there is a breakage, it's likely to be something in one of the arch headers which should be easily discoverable easily on most builds of the specific arch. Signed-off-by: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> Guess-its-ok-by: Christoph Lameter <cl@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com> Cc: Lee Schermerhorn <Lee.Schermerhorn@hp.com>
2010-03-24 08:04:11 +00:00
#include <linux/slab.h>
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
#include <linux/list.h>
#include <linux/if_ether.h>
#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
#include <linux/nl80211.h>
#include <linux/rtnetlink.h>
#include <linux/netlink.h>
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
#include <linux/etherdevice.h>
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
#include <net/net_namespace.h>
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
#include <net/genetlink.h>
#include <net/cfg80211.h>
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
#include <net/sock.h>
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
#include "core.h"
#include "nl80211.h"
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
#include "reg.h"
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
#include "rdev-ops.h"
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: Add crypto settings into NEW_BEACON This removes need from drivers to parse the beacon tail/head data to figure out what crypto settings are to be used in AP mode in case the Beacon and Probe Response frames are fully constructed in the driver/firmware. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:54:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_crypto_settings(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct genl_info *info,
struct cfg80211_crypto_settings *settings,
int cipher_limit);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_pre_doit(struct genl_ops *ops, struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info);
static void nl80211_post_doit(struct genl_ops *ops, struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* the netlink family */
static struct genl_family nl80211_fam = {
.id = GENL_ID_GENERATE, /* don't bother with a hardcoded ID */
.name = "nl80211", /* have users key off the name instead */
.hdrsize = 0, /* no private header */
.version = 1, /* no particular meaning now */
.maxattr = NL80211_ATTR_MAX,
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
.netnsok = true,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.pre_doit = nl80211_pre_doit,
.post_doit = nl80211_post_doit,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
};
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
/* returns ERR_PTR values */
static struct wireless_dev *
__cfg80211_wdev_from_attrs(struct net *netns, struct nlattr **attrs)
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
{
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
struct wireless_dev *result = NULL;
bool have_ifidx = attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX];
bool have_wdev_id = attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WDEV];
u64 wdev_id;
int wiphy_idx = -1;
int ifidx = -1;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
assert_cfg80211_lock();
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
if (!have_ifidx && !have_wdev_id)
return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
if (have_ifidx)
ifidx = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX]);
if (have_wdev_id) {
wdev_id = nla_get_u64(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WDEV]);
wiphy_idx = wdev_id >> 32;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
list_for_each_entry(rdev, &cfg80211_rdev_list, list) {
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
if (wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy) != netns)
continue;
if (have_wdev_id && rdev->wiphy_idx != wiphy_idx)
continue;
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
list_for_each_entry(wdev, &rdev->wdev_list, list) {
if (have_ifidx && wdev->netdev &&
wdev->netdev->ifindex == ifidx) {
result = wdev;
break;
}
if (have_wdev_id && wdev->identifier == (u32)wdev_id) {
result = wdev;
break;
}
}
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
if (result)
break;
}
if (result)
return result;
return ERR_PTR(-ENODEV);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
static struct cfg80211_registered_device *
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
__cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs(struct net *netns, struct nlattr **attrs)
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
{
nl80211: refactor __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Refactor the function to make it easier to extend. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:09:58 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = NULL, *tmp;
struct net_device *netdev;
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
assert_cfg80211_lock();
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
if (!attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY] &&
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
!attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX] &&
!attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WDEV])
nl80211: refactor __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Refactor the function to make it easier to extend. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:09:58 +00:00
return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
if (attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY])
nl80211: refactor __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Refactor the function to make it easier to extend. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:09:58 +00:00
rdev = cfg80211_rdev_by_wiphy_idx(
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY]));
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
if (attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WDEV]) {
u64 wdev_id = nla_get_u64(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WDEV]);
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
bool found = false;
tmp = cfg80211_rdev_by_wiphy_idx(wdev_id >> 32);
if (tmp) {
/* make sure wdev exists */
mutex_lock(&tmp->devlist_mtx);
list_for_each_entry(wdev, &tmp->wdev_list, list) {
if (wdev->identifier != (u32)wdev_id)
continue;
found = true;
break;
}
mutex_unlock(&tmp->devlist_mtx);
if (!found)
tmp = NULL;
if (rdev && tmp != rdev)
return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);
rdev = tmp;
}
}
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
if (attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX]) {
int ifindex = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX]);
nl80211: fix netns separation There are currently a few ways to "escape" the network namespace and access a wiphy that belongs to another namespace. Add a netns argument to the relevant functions to fix this. One remaining issue with testmode will be fixed in a follow-up patch. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:14:22 +00:00
netdev = dev_get_by_index(netns, ifindex);
nl80211: refactor __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Refactor the function to make it easier to extend. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:09:58 +00:00
if (netdev) {
if (netdev->ieee80211_ptr)
tmp = wiphy_to_dev(
netdev->ieee80211_ptr->wiphy);
else
tmp = NULL;
dev_put(netdev);
/* not wireless device -- return error */
if (!tmp)
return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);
/* mismatch -- return error */
if (rdev && tmp != rdev)
return ERR_PTR(-EINVAL);
rdev = tmp;
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
}
}
nl80211: fix netns separation There are currently a few ways to "escape" the network namespace and access a wiphy that belongs to another namespace. Add a netns argument to the relevant functions to fix this. One remaining issue with testmode will be fixed in a follow-up patch. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:14:22 +00:00
if (!rdev)
return ERR_PTR(-ENODEV);
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
nl80211: fix netns separation There are currently a few ways to "escape" the network namespace and access a wiphy that belongs to another namespace. Add a netns argument to the relevant functions to fix this. One remaining issue with testmode will be fixed in a follow-up patch. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:14:22 +00:00
if (netns != wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy))
return ERR_PTR(-ENODEV);
return rdev;
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
}
/*
* This function returns a pointer to the driver
* that the genl_info item that is passed refers to.
* If successful, it returns non-NULL and also locks
* the driver's mutex!
*
* This means that you need to call cfg80211_unlock_rdev()
* before being allowed to acquire &cfg80211_mutex!
*
* This is necessary because we need to lock the global
* mutex to get an item off the list safely, and then
* we lock the rdev mutex so it doesn't go away under us.
*
* We don't want to keep cfg80211_mutex locked
* for all the time in order to allow requests on
* other interfaces to go through at the same time.
*
* The result of this can be a PTR_ERR and hence must
* be checked with IS_ERR() for errors.
*/
static struct cfg80211_registered_device *
nl80211: fix netns separation There are currently a few ways to "escape" the network namespace and access a wiphy that belongs to another namespace. Add a netns argument to the relevant functions to fix this. One remaining issue with testmode will be fixed in a follow-up patch. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:14:22 +00:00
cfg80211_get_dev_from_info(struct net *netns, struct genl_info *info)
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
rdev = __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs(netns, info->attrs);
cfg80211: make some functions static Some of the functions to retrieve a device can be static as they're used only in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 11:32:49 +00:00
/* if it is not an error we grab the lock on
* it to assure it won't be going away while
* we operate on it */
if (!IS_ERR(rdev))
mutex_lock(&rdev->mtx);
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
return rdev;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* policy for the attributes */
const: struct nla_policy Make remaining netlink policies as const. Fixup coding style where needed. Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan <adobriyan@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2010-02-18 08:14:31 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy nl80211_policy[NL80211_ATTR_MAX+1] = {
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_NAME] = { .type = NLA_NUL_STRING,
nl80211: Eliminate reference to BUS_ID_SIZE. It's going away. Just leave the constant "20" here so that behavior doesn't change. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-27 04:15:00 +00:00
.len = 20-1 },
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
nl80211: Add frequency configuration (including HT40) This patch adds new NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY attributes NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ and NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_SEC_CHAN_OFFSET to allow userspace to set the operating channel (e.g., hostapd for AP mode). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-11-26 14:15:24 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
mac80211: Fix HT channel selection HT management is done differently for AP and STA modes, unify to just the ->config() callback since HT is fundamentally a PHY property and cannot be per-BSS. Rename enum nl80211_sec_chan_offset as nl80211_channel_type to denote the channel type ( NO_HT, HT20, HT40+, HT40- ). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Sujith <Sujith.Manoharan@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-12-12 06:27:43 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_CHANNEL_TYPE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_CHANNEL_WIDTH] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ1] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ2] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_SHORT] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_LONG] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FRAG_THRESHOLD] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RTS_THRESHOLD] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_IFNAME] = { .type = NLA_NUL_STRING, .len = IFNAMSIZ-1 },
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: fix MAC address validation MAC addresses have a fixed length. The current policy allows passing < ETH_ALEN bytes, which might result in reading beyond the buffer. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-24 16:13:56 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MAC] = { .len = ETH_ALEN },
[NL80211_ATTR_PREV_BSSID] = { .len = ETH_ALEN },
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY] = { .type = NLA_NESTED, },
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DATA] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = WLAN_MAX_KEY_LEN },
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: Increase maximum NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ length to 16 WPI-SMS4 uses 16-octet PN field, so we need to allow longer key sequence values to be configured. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-02 21:36:31 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ] = { .type = NLA_BINARY, .len = 16 },
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_DTIM_PERIOD] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_HEAD] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_TAIL] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_AID] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_FLAGS] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_LISTEN_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = NL80211_MAX_SUPP_RATES },
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_ACTION] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_VLAN] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: fix monitor flags NLA_NESTED attributes cannot be empty, but we want to be able to specify "no flags" (empty attribute) vs. "no change" (no attribute). Therefore, remove the NLA_NESTED policy so it can work as an empty attribute. I guess I should have used a u32 for these flags instead, but we're stuck with it now. Haven't noticed earlier because of a bug in iw... Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-15 09:54:04 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MNTR_FLAGS] = { /* NLA_NESTED can't be empty */ },
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_MESH_ID_LEN },
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_NEXT_HOP] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2] = { .type = NLA_STRING, .len = 2 },
[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULES] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_CTS_PROT] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_SHORT_PREAMBLE] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_SHORT_SLOT_TIME] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
nl80211: Add basic rate configuration for AP mode Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set which rates are in the basic rate set. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:22 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = NL80211_MAX_SUPP_RATES },
cfg80211: Add new BSS attribute ht_opmode Add a new BSS attribute to allow hostapd to set the current HT opmode. Otherwise drivers won't be able to set up protection for HT rates in AP mode. Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-19 11:40:25 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_HT_OPMODE] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
mac80211/cfg80211: HT capabilities for NEW_STA Allow userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set HT capabilities for associated STAs. This is based on a patch from Zhu Yi <yi.zhu@intel.com> (only the NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY for NEW_STA part is included here). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-25 08:58:58 +00:00
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_CONFIG] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
cfg80211/nl80211: Add userspace authentication flag to mesh setup During mesh setup, use NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AUTH flag to create a secure mesh and route management frames to userspace. Also, NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY now returns a flag NL80211_SUPPORT_MESH_AUTH if the wiphy's mesh implementation supports routing of mesh auth frames to userspace. This is useful for forward compatibility between old kernels and new userspace tools. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:28 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SUPPORT_MESH_AUTH] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
nl80211: fix HT capability attribute validation Since the NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY attribute is used as a struct, it needs a minimum, not maximum length. Enforce that properly. Not doing so could potentially lead to reading after the buffer. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-03 08:27:01 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY] = { .len = NL80211_HT_CAPABILITY_LEN },
nl80211: New command for adding extra IE(s) into management frames A new nl80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_MGMT_EXTRA_IE, can be used to add arbitrary IE data into the end of management frames. The interface allows extra IEs to be configured for each management frame subtype, but only some of them (ProbeReq, ProbeResp, Auth, (Re)AssocReq, Deauth, Disassoc) are currently accepted in mac80211 implementation. This makes it easier to implement IEEE 802.11 extensions like WPS and FT that add IE(s) into some management frames. In addition, this can be useful for testing and experimentation purposes. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-13 14:03:29 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MGMT_SUBTYPE] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_IE] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SSID] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN },
[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_FIXED] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_TIMED_OUT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211 : Add support for configuring MFP NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE request must be able to indicate whether management frame protection (IEEE 802.11w) is being used. mac80211 was able to use MFP in client mode only with WEXT, but the new NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute will allow this to be done with nl80211, too. Since we are currently using nl80211 for MFP only with drivers that use user space SME, only MFP disabled and required values are used. However, the NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute is an enum that can be extended with MFP optional in the future, if that is needed with some drivers (e.g., if the RSN IE is generated by the driver). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-06 19:09:37 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_FLAGS2] = {
.len = sizeof(struct nl80211_sta_flag_update),
},
nl80211: Add IEEE 802.1X PAE control for station mode Add a new NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT flag for NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE to allow user space to indicate that it will control the IEEE 802.1X port in station mode. Previously, mac80211 was always marking the port authorized in station mode. This was enough when drop_unencrypted flag was set. However, drop_unencrypted can currently be controlled only with WEXT and the current nl80211 design does not allow fully secure configuration. Fix this by providing a mechanism for user space to control the IEEE 802.1X port in station mode (i.e., do the same that we are already doing in AP mode). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:57 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211: allow changing port control protocol Some vendor specified mechanisms for 802.1X-style functionality use a different protocol than EAP (even if EAP is vendor-extensible). Allow setting the ethertype for the protocol when a driver has support for this. The default if unspecified is EAP, of course. Note: This is suitable only for station mode, not for AP implementation. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-27 11:26:53 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_ETHERTYPE] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_NO_ENCRYPT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_PRIVACY] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITE_GROUP] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WPA_VERSIONS] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_PID] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: add a parameter for using 4-address frames on virtual interfaces Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-10 17:53:10 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_4ADDR] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_PMKID] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = WLAN_PMKID_LEN },
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_DURATION] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE] = { .type = NLA_U64 },
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_TX_RATES] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_MATCH] = { .type = NLA_BINARY, },
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_PS_STATE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM] = { .type = NLA_NESTED, },
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211: add ap isolation support This is used to configure APs to not bridge traffic between connected stations. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-26 23:23:35 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_AP_ISOLATE] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
nl80211: Add option to adjust transmit power This patch adds transmit power setting type and transmit power level attributes to NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY in order to facilitate adjusting of the transmit power level of the device. The added attributes allow selection of automatic, limited or fixed transmit power level, with the level definable in signed mBm format. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-23 09:12:38 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TX_POWER_SETTING] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TX_POWER_LEVEL] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_TYPE] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_RX] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211: add support for setting the ad-hoc multicast rate Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-11 14:07:22 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_OFFCHANNEL_TX_OK] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WOWLAN_TRIGGERS] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211: Let userspace drive the peer link management states. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-03 23:57:11 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_STATE] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
cfg80211/nl80211: add interval attribute for scheduled scans Introduce NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL as a required attribute for NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN. This value informs the driver at which intervals the scheduled scan cycles should be executed. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:37 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_REKEY_DATA] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SUPP_RATES] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211/cfg80211: Allow SSID to be specified in new beacon command This makes it easier for drivers that generate Beacon and Probe Response frames internally (in firmware most likely) in AP mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:53:31 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_HIDDEN_SSID] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_IE_PROBE_RESP] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
[NL80211_ATTR_IE_ASSOC_RESP] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
cfg80211/nl80211: Indicate roaming feature capability to userspace. When the rssi of the current AP drops, both wpa_supplicant and the firmware may do a background scan to find a better AP and try to associate. Since firmware based roaming is faster, inform wpa_supplicant to avoid roaming and let the firmware decide to roam if necessary. For fullmac drivers like ath6kl, it is just enough to provide the ESSID and the firmware will decide on the BSSID. Since it is not possible to do pre-auth during roaming for fullmac drivers, the wpa_supplicant needs to completely disconnect with the old AP and reconnect with the new AP. This consumes lot of time and it is better to leave the roaming decision to the firmware. Signed-off-by: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-29 08:53:03 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_ROAM_SUPPORT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211/cfg80211: Add support to disable CCK rate for management frame Add a new nl80211 attribute to specify whether to send the management frames in CCK rate or not. As of now the wpa_supplicant is disabling CCK rate at P2P init itself. So this patch helps to send P2P probe request/probe response/action frames being sent at non CCK rate in 2GHz without disabling 11b rates. This attribute is used with NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_FRAME commands to disable CCK rate for management frame transmission. Cc: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-25 09:23:30 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_TX_NO_CCK_RATE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: support sending TDLS commands/frames Add support for sending high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames via NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER and NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT, respectively. Add appropriate cfg80211 callbacks for lower level drivers. Add wiphy capability flags for TDLS support and advertise them via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-28 11:12:50 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_ACTION] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_DIALOG_TOKEN] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_OPERATION] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_SUPPORT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_EXTERNAL_SETUP] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_DONT_WAIT_FOR_ACK] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: Pass probe response data to drivers Pass probe-response data from usermode via beacon parameters. Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-10 09:28:56 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_PROBE_RESP] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
cfg80211: process regulatory DFS region for countries The wireless-regdb now has support for mapping a country to one DFS region. CRDA sends this to us now so process it so we can provide that hint to drivers. This will later be used by code for processing DFS in a way that meets the criteria for the DFS region the country belongs to. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-11 17:59:02 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_DFS_REGION] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_DISABLE_HT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK] = {
.len = NL80211_HT_CAPABILITY_LEN
},
wireless: Add NoAck per tid support This patch contains the configuration changes in nl80211/cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 13:20:43 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_NOACK_MAP] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
cfg80211: Add an attribute to set inactivity timeout in AP mode This patch adds an attribute, NL80211_ATTR_INACTIVITY_TIMEOUT, to set the inactivity timeout which can be used to remove the station in AP mode. This can be passed in NL80211_CMD_START_AP and used by the drivers which have AP MLME in firmware but don't support get_station() properly. To disable inactivity timer in userspace, wpa_s for example, there is a new flag, NL80211_FEATURE_INACTIVITY_TIMER, in nl80211_feature_flags through which drivers can register their capability to use the inactivity timeout to free the stations. Signed-off-by: Vasanthakumar Thiagarajan <vthiagar@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-02 10:20:02 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_INACTIVITY_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
cfg80211: Add background scan period attribute. Receive background scan period as part of connect command and pass the same to the driver. Signed-off-by: Bala Shanmugam <bkamatch@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-07 11:57:12 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_BG_SCAN_PERIOD] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_WDEV] = { .type = NLA_U64 },
cfg80211: add cellular base station regulatory hint support Cellular base stations can provide hints to cfg80211 about where they think we are. This can be done for example on a cell phone. To enable these hints we simply allow them through as user regulatory hints but we allow userspace to clasify the hint as either coming directly from the user or coming from a cellular base station. This option is only available when you enable CONFIG_CFG80211_CERTIFICATION_ONUS. The base station hints themselves will not be processed by the core unless at least one device on the system supports this feature. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 18:49:18 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_USER_REG_HINT_TYPE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SAE_DATA] = { .type = NLA_BINARY, },
{nl,cfg}80211: Peer STA VHT caps To save STAs VHT caps in AP mode Signed-off-by: Mahesh Palivela <maheshp@posedge.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-11 08:04:52 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_VHT_CAPABILITY] = { .len = NL80211_VHT_CAPABILITY_LEN },
{nl,cfg}80211: add a flags word to scan requests Add a flags word to direct and scheduled scan requests; it will be used for control of optional behaviours such as flushing the bss cache prior to doing a scan. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:31 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FLAGS] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: support P2P GO powersave configuration If a driver supports P2P GO powersave, allow it to set the new feature flags for it and allow userspace to configure the parameters for it. This can be done at GO startup and later changed with SET_BSS. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-14 14:17:28 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_CTWINDOW] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_OPPPS] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
};
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
/* policy for the key attributes */
const: struct nla_policy Make remaining netlink policies as const. Fixup coding style where needed. Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan <adobriyan@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2010-02-18 08:14:31 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy nl80211_key_policy[NL80211_KEY_MAX + 1] = {
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
[NL80211_KEY_DATA] = { .type = NLA_BINARY, .len = WLAN_MAX_KEY_LEN },
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
[NL80211_KEY_IDX] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_KEY_CIPHER] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211: Increase maximum NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ length to 16 WPI-SMS4 uses 16-octet PN field, so we need to allow longer key sequence values to be configured. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-02 21:36:31 +00:00
[NL80211_KEY_SEQ] = { .type = NLA_BINARY, .len = 16 },
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_MGMT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
[NL80211_KEY_TYPE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
};
/* policy for the key default flags */
static const struct nla_policy
nl80211_key_default_policy[NUM_NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES] = {
[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPE_UNICAST] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPE_MULTICAST] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
};
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
/* policy for WoWLAN attributes */
static const struct nla_policy
nl80211_wowlan_policy[NUM_NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG] = {
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_ANY] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_DISCONNECT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_MAGIC_PKT] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_PKT_PATTERN] = { .type = NLA_NESTED },
nl80211: advertise GTK rekey support, new triggers Since we now have the necessary API in place to support GTK rekeying, applications will need to know whether it is supported by a device. Add a pseudo-trigger that is used only to advertise that capability. Also, add some new triggers that match what iwlagn devices can do. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-13 08:48:55 +00:00
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_GTK_REKEY_FAILURE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_EAP_IDENT_REQUEST] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_4WAY_HANDSHAKE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_RFKILL_RELEASE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
};
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
/* policy for GTK rekey offload attributes */
static const struct nla_policy
nl80211_rekey_policy[NUM_NL80211_REKEY_DATA] = {
[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_KEK] = { .len = NL80211_KEK_LEN },
[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_KCK] = { .len = NL80211_KCK_LEN },
[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_REPLAY_CTR] = { .len = NL80211_REPLAY_CTR_LEN },
};
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy
nl80211_match_policy[NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_MAX + 1] = {
nl80211: fix sched scan match attribute name It should be NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_SSID as documented, not NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_SSID. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 09:17:11 +00:00
[NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_SSID] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN },
nl80211: specify RSSI threshold in scheduled scan Support configuring an RSSI threshold in dBm (s32) when requesting scheduled scan, below which a BSS won't be reported by the cfg80211 driver. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-21 18:09:54 +00:00
[NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_RSSI] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
};
cfg80211: introduce nl80211_get_ifidx() ... which get's rid of three indentical cut-n-paste sections. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 10:30:02 +00:00
/* ifidx get helper */
static int nl80211_get_ifidx(struct netlink_callback *cb)
{
int res;
res = nlmsg_parse(cb->nlh, GENL_HDRLEN + nl80211_fam.hdrsize,
nl80211_fam.attrbuf, nl80211_fam.maxattr,
nl80211_policy);
if (res)
return res;
if (!nl80211_fam.attrbuf[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX])
return -EINVAL;
res = nla_get_u32(nl80211_fam.attrbuf[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX]);
if (!res)
return -EINVAL;
return res;
}
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
static int nl80211_prepare_netdev_dump(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct netlink_callback *cb,
struct cfg80211_registered_device **rdev,
struct net_device **dev)
{
int ifidx = cb->args[0];
int err;
if (!ifidx)
ifidx = nl80211_get_ifidx(cb);
if (ifidx < 0)
return ifidx;
cb->args[0] = ifidx;
rtnl_lock();
*dev = __dev_get_by_index(sock_net(skb->sk), ifidx);
if (!*dev) {
err = -ENODEV;
goto out_rtnl;
}
*rdev = cfg80211_get_dev_from_ifindex(sock_net(skb->sk), ifidx);
cfg80211: fix a crash in dev lookup on dump commands IS_ERR and PTR_ERR were called with the wrong pointer, leading to a crash when cfg80211_get_dev_from_ifindex fails. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-31 14:31:54 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(*rdev)) {
err = PTR_ERR(*rdev);
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
goto out_rtnl;
}
return 0;
out_rtnl:
rtnl_unlock();
return err;
}
static void nl80211_finish_netdev_dump(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev)
{
cfg80211_unlock_rdev(rdev);
rtnl_unlock();
}
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
/* IE validation */
static bool is_valid_ie_attr(const struct nlattr *attr)
{
const u8 *pos;
int len;
if (!attr)
return true;
pos = nla_data(attr);
len = nla_len(attr);
while (len) {
u8 elemlen;
if (len < 2)
return false;
len -= 2;
elemlen = pos[1];
if (elemlen > len)
return false;
len -= elemlen;
pos += 2 + elemlen;
}
return true;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* message building helper */
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
static inline void *nl80211hdr_put(struct sk_buff *skb, u32 portid, u32 seq,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
int flags, u8 cmd)
{
/* since there is no private header just add the generic one */
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
return genlmsg_put(skb, portid, seq, &nl80211_fam, flags, cmd);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
cfg80211: add netlink channel put helper This adds a netlink channel put helper, nl80211_msg_put_channel(), which we will also make use of later for the beacon hints events. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:08 +00:00
static int nl80211_msg_put_channel(struct sk_buff *msg,
struct ieee80211_channel *chan)
{
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_FREQ,
chan->center_freq))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add netlink channel put helper This adds a netlink channel put helper, nl80211_msg_put_channel(), which we will also make use of later for the beacon hints events. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:08 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_DISABLED))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_PASSIVE_SCAN) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_PASSIVE_SCAN))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_NO_IBSS) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_NO_IBSS))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_RADAR) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_RADAR))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add netlink channel put helper This adds a netlink channel put helper, nl80211_msg_put_channel(), which we will also make use of later for the beacon hints events. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:08 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_FREQUENCY_ATTR_MAX_TX_POWER,
DBM_TO_MBM(chan->max_power)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add netlink channel put helper This adds a netlink channel put helper, nl80211_msg_put_channel(), which we will also make use of later for the beacon hints events. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:08 +00:00
return 0;
nla_put_failure:
return -ENOBUFS;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* netlink command implementations */
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
struct key_parse {
struct key_params p;
int idx;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
int type;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
bool def, defmgmt;
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
bool def_uni, def_multi;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
};
static int nl80211_parse_key_new(struct nlattr *key, struct key_parse *k)
{
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_KEY_MAX + 1];
int err = nla_parse_nested(tb, NL80211_KEY_MAX, key,
nl80211_key_policy);
if (err)
return err;
k->def = !!tb[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT];
k->defmgmt = !!tb[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_MGMT];
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (k->def) {
k->def_uni = true;
k->def_multi = true;
}
if (k->defmgmt)
k->def_multi = true;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_KEY_IDX])
k->idx = nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_KEY_IDX]);
if (tb[NL80211_KEY_DATA]) {
k->p.key = nla_data(tb[NL80211_KEY_DATA]);
k->p.key_len = nla_len(tb[NL80211_KEY_DATA]);
}
if (tb[NL80211_KEY_SEQ]) {
k->p.seq = nla_data(tb[NL80211_KEY_SEQ]);
k->p.seq_len = nla_len(tb[NL80211_KEY_SEQ]);
}
if (tb[NL80211_KEY_CIPHER])
k->p.cipher = nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_KEY_CIPHER]);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_KEY_TYPE]) {
k->type = nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_KEY_TYPE]);
if (k->type < 0 || k->type >= NUM_NL80211_KEYTYPES)
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES]) {
struct nlattr *kdt[NUM_NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES];
cfg80211: fix a few -Wshadow warnings It seems that -Wshadow is no longer default in sparse runs, but let's fix the warnings anyway. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-20 12:52:37 +00:00
err = nla_parse_nested(kdt, NUM_NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES - 1,
tb[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES],
nl80211_key_default_policy);
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (err)
return err;
k->def_uni = kdt[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPE_UNICAST];
k->def_multi = kdt[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPE_MULTICAST];
}
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
return 0;
}
static int nl80211_parse_key_old(struct genl_info *info, struct key_parse *k)
{
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DATA]) {
k->p.key = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DATA]);
k->p.key_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DATA]);
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ]) {
k->p.seq = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ]);
k->p.seq_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ]);
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX])
k->idx = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER])
k->p.cipher = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER]);
k->def = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT];
k->defmgmt = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_MGMT];
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (k->def) {
k->def_uni = true;
k->def_multi = true;
}
if (k->defmgmt)
k->def_multi = true;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE]) {
k->type = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE]);
if (k->type < 0 || k->type >= NUM_NL80211_KEYTYPES)
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES]) {
struct nlattr *kdt[NUM_NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES];
int err = nla_parse_nested(
kdt, NUM_NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES - 1,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES],
nl80211_key_default_policy);
if (err)
return err;
k->def_uni = kdt[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPE_UNICAST];
k->def_multi = kdt[NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPE_MULTICAST];
}
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
return 0;
}
static int nl80211_parse_key(struct genl_info *info, struct key_parse *k)
{
int err;
memset(k, 0, sizeof(*k));
k->idx = -1;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
k->type = -1;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY])
err = nl80211_parse_key_new(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY], k);
else
err = nl80211_parse_key_old(info, k);
if (err)
return err;
if (k->def && k->defmgmt)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (k->defmgmt) {
if (k->def_uni || !k->def_multi)
return -EINVAL;
}
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
if (k->idx != -1) {
if (k->defmgmt) {
if (k->idx < 4 || k->idx > 5)
return -EINVAL;
} else if (k->def) {
if (k->idx < 0 || k->idx > 3)
return -EINVAL;
} else {
if (k->idx < 0 || k->idx > 5)
return -EINVAL;
}
}
return 0;
}
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
static struct cfg80211_cached_keys *
nl80211_parse_connkeys(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
struct nlattr *keys, bool *no_ht)
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
{
struct key_parse parse;
struct nlattr *key;
struct cfg80211_cached_keys *result;
int rem, err, def = 0;
result = kzalloc(sizeof(*result), GFP_KERNEL);
if (!result)
return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
result->def = -1;
result->defmgmt = -1;
nla_for_each_nested(key, keys, rem) {
memset(&parse, 0, sizeof(parse));
parse.idx = -1;
err = nl80211_parse_key_new(key, &parse);
if (err)
goto error;
err = -EINVAL;
if (!parse.p.key)
goto error;
if (parse.idx < 0 || parse.idx > 4)
goto error;
if (parse.def) {
if (def)
goto error;
def = 1;
result->def = parse.idx;
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (!parse.def_uni || !parse.def_multi)
goto error;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
} else if (parse.defmgmt)
goto error;
err = cfg80211_validate_key_settings(rdev, &parse.p,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
parse.idx, false, NULL);
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
if (err)
goto error;
result->params[parse.idx].cipher = parse.p.cipher;
result->params[parse.idx].key_len = parse.p.key_len;
result->params[parse.idx].key = result->data[parse.idx];
memcpy(result->data[parse.idx], parse.p.key, parse.p.key_len);
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
if (parse.p.cipher == WLAN_CIPHER_SUITE_WEP40 ||
parse.p.cipher == WLAN_CIPHER_SUITE_WEP104) {
if (no_ht)
*no_ht = true;
}
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
}
return result;
error:
kfree(result);
return ERR_PTR(err);
}
static int nl80211_key_allowed(struct wireless_dev *wdev)
{
ASSERT_WDEV_LOCK(wdev);
switch (wdev->iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
nl80211: allow installing keys for a meshif Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-03 23:57:12 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC:
if (!wdev->current_bss)
return -ENOLINK;
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
if (wdev->sme_state != CFG80211_SME_CONNECTED)
return -ENOLINK;
break;
default:
return -EINVAL;
}
return 0;
}
cfg80211: advertise possible interface combinations Add the ability to advertise interface combinations in nl80211. This allows the driver to indicate what the combinations are that it supports. "Combinations" of just a single interface are implicit, as previously. Note that cfg80211 will enforce that the restrictions are met, but not for all drivers yet (once all drivers are updated, we can remove the flag and enforce for all). When no combinations are actually supported, an empty list will be exported so that userspace can know if the kernel exported this info or not (although it isn't clear to me what tools using the info should do if the kernel didn't export it). Since some interface types are purely virtual/software and don't fit the restrictions, those are exposed in a new list of pure SW types, not subject to restrictions. This mainly exists to handle AP-VLAN and monitor interfaces in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 08:58:57 +00:00
static int nl80211_put_iftypes(struct sk_buff *msg, u32 attr, u16 ifmodes)
{
struct nlattr *nl_modes = nla_nest_start(msg, attr);
int i;
if (!nl_modes)
goto nla_put_failure;
i = 0;
while (ifmodes) {
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((ifmodes & 1) && nla_put_flag(msg, i))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: advertise possible interface combinations Add the ability to advertise interface combinations in nl80211. This allows the driver to indicate what the combinations are that it supports. "Combinations" of just a single interface are implicit, as previously. Note that cfg80211 will enforce that the restrictions are met, but not for all drivers yet (once all drivers are updated, we can remove the flag and enforce for all). When no combinations are actually supported, an empty list will be exported so that userspace can know if the kernel exported this info or not (although it isn't clear to me what tools using the info should do if the kernel didn't export it). Since some interface types are purely virtual/software and don't fit the restrictions, those are exposed in a new list of pure SW types, not subject to restrictions. This mainly exists to handle AP-VLAN and monitor interfaces in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 08:58:57 +00:00
ifmodes >>= 1;
i++;
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_modes);
return 0;
nla_put_failure:
return -ENOBUFS;
}
static int nl80211_put_iface_combinations(struct wiphy *wiphy,
struct sk_buff *msg)
{
struct nlattr *nl_combis;
int i, j;
nl_combis = nla_nest_start(msg,
NL80211_ATTR_INTERFACE_COMBINATIONS);
if (!nl_combis)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (i = 0; i < wiphy->n_iface_combinations; i++) {
const struct ieee80211_iface_combination *c;
struct nlattr *nl_combi, *nl_limits;
c = &wiphy->iface_combinations[i];
nl_combi = nla_nest_start(msg, i + 1);
if (!nl_combi)
goto nla_put_failure;
nl_limits = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_IFACE_COMB_LIMITS);
if (!nl_limits)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (j = 0; j < c->n_limits; j++) {
struct nlattr *nl_limit;
nl_limit = nla_nest_start(msg, j + 1);
if (!nl_limit)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_IFACE_LIMIT_MAX,
c->limits[j].max))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: advertise possible interface combinations Add the ability to advertise interface combinations in nl80211. This allows the driver to indicate what the combinations are that it supports. "Combinations" of just a single interface are implicit, as previously. Note that cfg80211 will enforce that the restrictions are met, but not for all drivers yet (once all drivers are updated, we can remove the flag and enforce for all). When no combinations are actually supported, an empty list will be exported so that userspace can know if the kernel exported this info or not (although it isn't clear to me what tools using the info should do if the kernel didn't export it). Since some interface types are purely virtual/software and don't fit the restrictions, those are exposed in a new list of pure SW types, not subject to restrictions. This mainly exists to handle AP-VLAN and monitor interfaces in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 08:58:57 +00:00
if (nl80211_put_iftypes(msg, NL80211_IFACE_LIMIT_TYPES,
c->limits[j].types))
goto nla_put_failure;
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_limit);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_limits);
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (c->beacon_int_infra_match &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_IFACE_COMB_STA_AP_BI_MATCH))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_IFACE_COMB_NUM_CHANNELS,
c->num_different_channels) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_IFACE_COMB_MAXNUM,
c->max_interfaces))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: advertise possible interface combinations Add the ability to advertise interface combinations in nl80211. This allows the driver to indicate what the combinations are that it supports. "Combinations" of just a single interface are implicit, as previously. Note that cfg80211 will enforce that the restrictions are met, but not for all drivers yet (once all drivers are updated, we can remove the flag and enforce for all). When no combinations are actually supported, an empty list will be exported so that userspace can know if the kernel exported this info or not (although it isn't clear to me what tools using the info should do if the kernel didn't export it). Since some interface types are purely virtual/software and don't fit the restrictions, those are exposed in a new list of pure SW types, not subject to restrictions. This mainly exists to handle AP-VLAN and monitor interfaces in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 08:58:57 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_combi);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_combis);
return 0;
nla_put_failure:
return -ENOBUFS;
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_wiphy(struct sk_buff *msg, u32 portid, u32 seq, int flags,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev)
{
void *hdr;
nl80211: export hardware bitrate/channel capabilities This makes nl80211 export the hardware bitrate/channel capabilities as registered in a wiphy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-24 18:38:39 +00:00
struct nlattr *nl_bands, *nl_band;
struct nlattr *nl_freqs, *nl_freq;
struct nlattr *nl_rates, *nl_rate;
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
struct nlattr *nl_cmds;
nl80211: export hardware bitrate/channel capabilities This makes nl80211 export the hardware bitrate/channel capabilities as registered in a wiphy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-24 18:38:39 +00:00
enum ieee80211_band band;
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
struct ieee80211_rate *rate;
int i;
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
const struct ieee80211_txrx_stypes *mgmt_stypes =
dev->wiphy.mgmt_stypes;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags, NL80211_CMD_NEW_WIPHY);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (!hdr)
return -1;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, dev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_string(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_NAME, wiphy_name(&dev->wiphy)) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_GENERATION,
cfg80211_rdev_list_generation) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_SHORT,
dev->wiphy.retry_short) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_LONG,
dev->wiphy.retry_long) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FRAG_THRESHOLD,
dev->wiphy.frag_threshold) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RTS_THRESHOLD,
dev->wiphy.rts_threshold) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS,
dev->wiphy.coverage_class) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_NUM_SCAN_SSIDS,
dev->wiphy.max_scan_ssids) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_NUM_SCHED_SCAN_SSIDS,
dev->wiphy.max_sched_scan_ssids) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_SCAN_IE_LEN,
dev->wiphy.max_scan_ie_len) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_SCHED_SCAN_IE_LEN,
dev->wiphy.max_sched_scan_ie_len) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_MATCH_SETS,
dev->wiphy.max_match_sets))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_IBSS_RSN) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SUPPORT_IBSS_RSN))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_MESH_AUTH) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SUPPORT_MESH_AUTH))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_AP_UAPSD) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SUPPORT_AP_UAPSD))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_FW_ROAM) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_ROAM_SUPPORT))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_TDLS) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_SUPPORT))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_TDLS_EXTERNAL_SETUP) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_EXTERNAL_SETUP))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES,
sizeof(u32) * dev->wiphy.n_cipher_suites,
dev->wiphy.cipher_suites))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_NUM_PMKIDS,
dev->wiphy.max_num_pmkids))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_CONTROL_PORT_PROTOCOL) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_ETHERTYPE))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_AVAIL_TX,
dev->wiphy.available_antennas_tx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_AVAIL_RX,
dev->wiphy.available_antennas_rx))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_AP_PROBE_RESP_OFFLOAD) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_PROBE_RESP_OFFLOAD,
dev->wiphy.probe_resp_offload))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Add probe response offload attribute Notify user-space about probe-response offloading support in the driver. A wiphy flag is used to indicate support and a bitmap of protocols determines which protocols are supported. Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-10 09:28:55 +00:00
cfg80211: Separate available antennas for RX and TX As has been pointed out by Daniel Halperin some devices (e.g. Intel IWL5100) can only TX from a subset of RX antennas, so use separate availability masks for RX and TX. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-16 02:30:22 +00:00
if ((dev->wiphy.available_antennas_tx ||
dev->wiphy.available_antennas_rx) && dev->ops->get_antenna) {
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
u32 tx_ant = 0, rx_ant = 0;
int res;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
res = rdev_get_antenna(dev, &tx_ant, &rx_ant);
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
if (!res) {
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX,
tx_ant) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_RX,
rx_ant))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
}
}
cfg80211: advertise possible interface combinations Add the ability to advertise interface combinations in nl80211. This allows the driver to indicate what the combinations are that it supports. "Combinations" of just a single interface are implicit, as previously. Note that cfg80211 will enforce that the restrictions are met, but not for all drivers yet (once all drivers are updated, we can remove the flag and enforce for all). When no combinations are actually supported, an empty list will be exported so that userspace can know if the kernel exported this info or not (although it isn't clear to me what tools using the info should do if the kernel didn't export it). Since some interface types are purely virtual/software and don't fit the restrictions, those are exposed in a new list of pure SW types, not subject to restrictions. This mainly exists to handle AP-VLAN and monitor interfaces in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 08:58:57 +00:00
if (nl80211_put_iftypes(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SUPPORTED_IFTYPES,
dev->wiphy.interface_modes))
cfg80211: keep track of supported interface modes It is obviously good for userspace to know up front which interface modes a given piece of hardware might support (even if adding such an interface might fail later because of concurrency issues), so let's make cfg80211 aware of that. For good measure, disallow adding interfaces in all other modes so drivers don't forget to announce support for one mode when they add it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Stephen Blackheath <tramp.enshrine.stephen@blacksapphire.com> Signed-off-by: Ivo van Doorn <IvDoorn@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-29 23:26:43 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: export hardware bitrate/channel capabilities This makes nl80211 export the hardware bitrate/channel capabilities as registered in a wiphy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-24 18:38:39 +00:00
nl_bands = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_BANDS);
if (!nl_bands)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (band = 0; band < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; band++) {
if (!dev->wiphy.bands[band])
continue;
nl_band = nla_nest_start(msg, band);
if (!nl_band)
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: export HT capabilities This exports the local HT capabilities in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-09 10:20:13 +00:00
/* add HT info */
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.ht_supported &&
(nla_put(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_HT_MCS_SET,
sizeof(dev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.mcs),
&dev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.mcs) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_HT_CAPA,
dev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.cap) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_HT_AMPDU_FACTOR,
dev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.ampdu_factor) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_HT_AMPDU_DENSITY,
dev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.ampdu_density)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: export HT capabilities This exports the local HT capabilities in nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-09 10:20:13 +00:00
cfg80211: allow advertising VHT capabilities Allow drivers to advertise their VHT capabilities and export them to userspace via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Mahesh Palivela <maheshp@posedge.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-22 07:27:46 +00:00
/* add VHT info */
if (dev->wiphy.bands[band]->vht_cap.vht_supported &&
(nla_put(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_VHT_MCS_SET,
sizeof(dev->wiphy.bands[band]->vht_cap.vht_mcs),
&dev->wiphy.bands[band]->vht_cap.vht_mcs) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_VHT_CAPA,
dev->wiphy.bands[band]->vht_cap.cap)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: export hardware bitrate/channel capabilities This makes nl80211 export the hardware bitrate/channel capabilities as registered in a wiphy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-24 18:38:39 +00:00
/* add frequencies */
nl_freqs = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_FREQS);
if (!nl_freqs)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (i = 0; i < dev->wiphy.bands[band]->n_channels; i++) {
nl_freq = nla_nest_start(msg, i);
if (!nl_freq)
goto nla_put_failure;
chan = &dev->wiphy.bands[band]->channels[i];
cfg80211: add netlink channel put helper This adds a netlink channel put helper, nl80211_msg_put_channel(), which we will also make use of later for the beacon hints events. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:08 +00:00
if (nl80211_msg_put_channel(msg, chan))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Report max TX power in NL80211_BAND_ATTR_FREQS This is useful information to provide for userspace (e.g., hostapd needs this to generate Country IE). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-11-21 17:01:30 +00:00
nl80211: export hardware bitrate/channel capabilities This makes nl80211 export the hardware bitrate/channel capabilities as registered in a wiphy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-24 18:38:39 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_freq);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_freqs);
/* add bitrates */
nl_rates = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_BAND_ATTR_RATES);
if (!nl_rates)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (i = 0; i < dev->wiphy.bands[band]->n_bitrates; i++) {
nl_rate = nla_nest_start(msg, i);
if (!nl_rate)
goto nla_put_failure;
rate = &dev->wiphy.bands[band]->bitrates[i];
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BITRATE_ATTR_RATE,
rate->bitrate))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((rate->flags & IEEE80211_RATE_SHORT_PREAMBLE) &&
nla_put_flag(msg,
NL80211_BITRATE_ATTR_2GHZ_SHORTPREAMBLE))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: export hardware bitrate/channel capabilities This makes nl80211 export the hardware bitrate/channel capabilities as registered in a wiphy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-24 18:38:39 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_rate);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_rates);
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_band);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_bands);
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
nl_cmds = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SUPPORTED_COMMANDS);
if (!nl_cmds)
goto nla_put_failure;
i = 0;
#define CMD(op, n) \
do { \
if (dev->ops->op) { \
i++; \
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, NL80211_CMD_ ## n)) \
goto nla_put_failure; \
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
} \
} while (0)
CMD(add_virtual_intf, NEW_INTERFACE);
CMD(change_virtual_intf, SET_INTERFACE);
CMD(add_key, NEW_KEY);
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
CMD(start_ap, START_AP);
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
CMD(add_station, NEW_STATION);
CMD(add_mpath, NEW_MPATH);
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
CMD(update_mesh_config, SET_MESH_CONFIG);
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
CMD(change_bss, SET_BSS);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
CMD(auth, AUTHENTICATE);
CMD(assoc, ASSOCIATE);
CMD(deauth, DEAUTHENTICATE);
CMD(disassoc, DISASSOCIATE);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
CMD(join_ibss, JOIN_IBSS);
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
CMD(join_mesh, JOIN_MESH);
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
CMD(set_pmksa, SET_PMKSA);
CMD(del_pmksa, DEL_PMKSA);
CMD(flush_pmksa, FLUSH_PMKSA);
cfg80211: add flags for off-channel capabilities Currently mac80211 implements these for all devices, but given restrictions of some devices that isn't really true, so prepare for being able to remove the capability for some mac80211 devices. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Acked-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 14:33:48 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_HAS_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL)
CMD(remain_on_channel, REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL);
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
CMD(set_bitrate_mask, SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK);
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
CMD(mgmt_tx, FRAME);
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
CMD(mgmt_tx_cancel_wait, FRAME_WAIT_CANCEL);
cfg80211: convert bools into flags We've accumulated a number of options for wiphys which make more sense as flags as we keep adding more. Convert the existing ones. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:28 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_NETNS_OK) {
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
i++;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY_NETNS))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
}
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
if (dev->ops->set_monitor_channel || dev->ops->start_ap ||
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
dev->ops->join_mesh) {
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
i++;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, NL80211_CMD_SET_CHANNEL))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
CMD(set_wds_peer, SET_WDS_PEER);
nl80211: support sending TDLS commands/frames Add support for sending high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames via NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER and NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT, respectively. Add appropriate cfg80211 callbacks for lower level drivers. Add wiphy capability flags for TDLS support and advertise them via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-28 11:12:50 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_TDLS) {
CMD(tdls_mgmt, TDLS_MGMT);
CMD(tdls_oper, TDLS_OPER);
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_SCHED_SCAN)
CMD(sched_scan_start, START_SCHED_SCAN);
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
CMD(probe_client, PROBE_CLIENT);
wireless: Add NoAck per tid support This patch contains the configuration changes in nl80211/cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 13:20:43 +00:00
CMD(set_noack_map, SET_NOACK_MAP);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_REPORTS_OBSS) {
i++;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, NL80211_CMD_REGISTER_BEACONS))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
}
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
CMD(start_p2p_device, START_P2P_DEVICE);
nl/cfg80211: add the NL80211_CMD_SET_MCAST_RATE command This command triggers a new callback: set_mcast_rate(). It enables the user to change the rate used to send multicast frames for vif configured as IBSS or MESH_POINT Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-02 12:27:48 +00:00
CMD(set_mcast_rate, SET_MCAST_RATE);
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
nl80211: add testmode to the list of supported commands User space might want to test if driver supports testmode. Adding testmode to the list of supported commands makes this easier. I omitted testmode_dump() in purpose. I assume all drivers implementing testmode_dump() will also implement testmode_cmd(). Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-17 17:06:10 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
CMD(testmode_cmd, TESTMODE);
#endif
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
#undef CMD
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
cfg80211: emulate connect with auth/assoc This adds code to cfg80211 so that drivers (mac80211 right now) that don't implement connect but rather auth/assoc can still be used with the nl80211 connect command. This will also be necessary for the wext compat code. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 07:13:27 +00:00
if (dev->ops->connect || dev->ops->auth) {
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
i++;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, NL80211_CMD_CONNECT))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
}
cfg80211: emulate connect with auth/assoc This adds code to cfg80211 so that drivers (mac80211 right now) that don't implement connect but rather auth/assoc can still be used with the nl80211 connect command. This will also be necessary for the wext compat code. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 07:13:27 +00:00
if (dev->ops->disconnect || dev->ops->deauth) {
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
i++;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, NL80211_CMD_DISCONNECT))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
}
nl80211: export supported commands This makes nl80211 export the supported commands (command groups) per wiphy so userspace has an idea what it can do -- this will be required reading for userspace when we introduce auth/assoc /or/ connect for older hardware that cannot separate auth and assoc. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-14 08:34:01 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_cmds);
cfg80211: add flags for off-channel capabilities Currently mac80211 implements these for all devices, but given restrictions of some devices that isn't really true, so prepare for being able to remove the capability for some mac80211 devices. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Acked-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 14:33:48 +00:00
if (dev->ops->remain_on_channel &&
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
(dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_HAS_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAX_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL_DURATION,
dev->wiphy.max_remain_on_channel_duration))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: advertise maximum remain-on-channel duration With the upcoming hardware offload implementation, some devices will have a different maximum duration for the remain-on-channel command. Advertise the maximum duration in mac80211, and make mac80211 set it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-14 16:54:28 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_OFFCHAN_TX) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_OFFCHANNEL_TX_OK))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
if (mgmt_stypes) {
u16 stypes;
struct nlattr *nl_ftypes, *nl_ifs;
enum nl80211_iftype ift;
nl_ifs = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_TX_FRAME_TYPES);
if (!nl_ifs)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (ift = 0; ift < NUM_NL80211_IFTYPES; ift++) {
nl_ftypes = nla_nest_start(msg, ift);
if (!nl_ftypes)
goto nla_put_failure;
i = 0;
stypes = mgmt_stypes[ift].tx;
while (stypes) {
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((stypes & 1) &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_TYPE,
(i << 4) | IEEE80211_FTYPE_MGMT))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
stypes >>= 1;
i++;
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_ftypes);
}
nl80211: fix missing nesting commit 95a6ccbb46c70cff376684c752831c014c87029d Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Thu Aug 12 15:38:38 2010 +0200 cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing introduced a netlink bug that caused parsing errors in userspace because it forgot to close a nesting, which would advertise a nesting length of zero to userspace, which then completely threw off parsing and led to Illegal nla->nla_type == 0 being printed by libnl. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-24 10:15:53 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_ifs);
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
nl_ifs = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_RX_FRAME_TYPES);
if (!nl_ifs)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (ift = 0; ift < NUM_NL80211_IFTYPES; ift++) {
nl_ftypes = nla_nest_start(msg, ift);
if (!nl_ftypes)
goto nla_put_failure;
i = 0;
stypes = mgmt_stypes[ift].rx;
while (stypes) {
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((stypes & 1) &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_TYPE,
(i << 4) | IEEE80211_FTYPE_MGMT))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
stypes >>= 1;
i++;
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_ftypes);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_ifs);
}
cfg80211: don't allow WoWLAN support without CONFIG_PM When CONFIG_PM is disabled, no device can possibly support WoWLAN since it can't go to sleep to start with. Due to this, mac80211 had even rejected the hardware registration. By making all the code and data for WoWLAN depend on CONFIG_PM we can promote this runtime error to a compile-time error. Add #ifdef around all WoWLAN code to remove it in systems that don't need it as they never suspend. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 07:23:48 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_PM
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags || dev->wiphy.wowlan.n_patterns) {
struct nlattr *nl_wowlan;
nl_wowlan = nla_nest_start(msg,
NL80211_ATTR_WOWLAN_TRIGGERS_SUPPORTED);
if (!nl_wowlan)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_ANY) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_ANY)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_DISCONNECT) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_DISCONNECT)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_MAGIC_PKT) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_MAGIC_PKT)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_SUPPORTS_GTK_REKEY) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_GTK_REKEY_SUPPORTED)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_GTK_REKEY_FAILURE) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_GTK_REKEY_FAILURE)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_EAP_IDENTITY_REQ) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_EAP_IDENT_REQUEST)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_4WAY_HANDSHAKE) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_4WAY_HANDSHAKE)) ||
((dev->wiphy.wowlan.flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_RFKILL_RELEASE) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_RFKILL_RELEASE)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.wowlan.n_patterns) {
struct nl80211_wowlan_pattern_support pat = {
.max_patterns = dev->wiphy.wowlan.n_patterns,
.min_pattern_len =
dev->wiphy.wowlan.pattern_min_len,
.max_pattern_len =
dev->wiphy.wowlan.pattern_max_len,
};
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_PKT_PATTERN,
sizeof(pat), &pat))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_wowlan);
}
cfg80211: don't allow WoWLAN support without CONFIG_PM When CONFIG_PM is disabled, no device can possibly support WoWLAN since it can't go to sleep to start with. Due to this, mac80211 had even rejected the hardware registration. By making all the code and data for WoWLAN depend on CONFIG_PM we can promote this runtime error to a compile-time error. Add #ifdef around all WoWLAN code to remove it in systems that don't need it as they never suspend. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 07:23:48 +00:00
#endif
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
cfg80211: advertise possible interface combinations Add the ability to advertise interface combinations in nl80211. This allows the driver to indicate what the combinations are that it supports. "Combinations" of just a single interface are implicit, as previously. Note that cfg80211 will enforce that the restrictions are met, but not for all drivers yet (once all drivers are updated, we can remove the flag and enforce for all). When no combinations are actually supported, an empty list will be exported so that userspace can know if the kernel exported this info or not (although it isn't clear to me what tools using the info should do if the kernel didn't export it). Since some interface types are purely virtual/software and don't fit the restrictions, those are exposed in a new list of pure SW types, not subject to restrictions. This mainly exists to handle AP-VLAN and monitor interfaces in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 08:58:57 +00:00
if (nl80211_put_iftypes(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SOFTWARE_IFTYPES,
dev->wiphy.software_iftypes))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nl80211_put_iface_combinations(&dev->wiphy, msg))
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((dev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_HAVE_AP_SME) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_DEVICE_AP_SME,
dev->wiphy.ap_sme_capa))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: advertise device AP SME Add the ability to advertise that the device contains the AP SME and what features it can support. There are currently no features in the bitmap -- probe response offload will be advertised by a few patches Arik is working on now (who took over from Guy Eilam) and a device with AP SME will typically implement and require response offload. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-07 11:39:33 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FEATURE_FLAGS,
dev->wiphy.features))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: advertise socket TX status capability The new wifi socket TX capability should be supported by wifi drivers, let them advertise whether they do or not. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-06 13:13:33 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (dev->wiphy.ht_capa_mod_mask &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK,
sizeof(*dev->wiphy.ht_capa_mod_mask),
dev->wiphy.ht_capa_mod_mask))
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
netlink: Improve returned error codes Make nlmsg_trim(), nlmsg_cancel(), genlmsg_cancel(), and nla_nest_cancel() void functions. Return -EMSGSIZE instead of -1 if the provided message buffer is not big enough. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-06-03 23:36:54 +00:00
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_dump_wiphy(struct sk_buff *skb, struct netlink_callback *cb)
{
int idx = 0;
int start = cb->args[0];
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev;
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
list_for_each_entry(dev, &cfg80211_rdev_list, list) {
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
if (!net_eq(wiphy_net(&dev->wiphy), sock_net(skb->sk)))
continue;
net/wireless/nl80211.c: fix endless Netlink callback loop. Although I only tested similar code (I don't use any of this wireless code), the state maintainance between Netlink dump callback invocations seems wrong here and should lead to an endless loop. There are also other examples in the same file which might have the same problem. Perhaps someone can actually test this (or refute my logic). Take the simple example with only one element in the list (which should fit into the message): 1. invocation: Start: idx = 0, start = 0 Loop: condition (++idx < start) => (1 < 0) => false => no continue, fill one entry, exit loop, return skb->len > 0 2. invocation: Start: idx = 0, start = 1 Loop: condition (++idx < start) => (1 < 1) => false => no continue, fill the same entry again, exit loop, return skb->len > 0 3. invocation: Same as 2. invocation, endless invocation of callback. Also, iterations where the filling of an element fails should not be counted as completed, so idx should not be incremented in this case. Signed-off-by: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-08 12:02:19 +00:00
if (++idx <= start)
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
continue;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_wiphy(skb, NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
net/wireless/nl80211.c: fix endless Netlink callback loop. Although I only tested similar code (I don't use any of this wireless code), the state maintainance between Netlink dump callback invocations seems wrong here and should lead to an endless loop. There are also other examples in the same file which might have the same problem. Perhaps someone can actually test this (or refute my logic). Take the simple example with only one element in the list (which should fit into the message): 1. invocation: Start: idx = 0, start = 0 Loop: condition (++idx < start) => (1 < 0) => false => no continue, fill one entry, exit loop, return skb->len > 0 2. invocation: Start: idx = 0, start = 1 Loop: condition (++idx < start) => (1 < 1) => false => no continue, fill the same entry again, exit loop, return skb->len > 0 3. invocation: Same as 2. invocation, endless invocation of callback. Also, iterations where the filling of an element fails should not be counted as completed, so idx should not be incremented in this case. Signed-off-by: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-08 12:02:19 +00:00
dev) < 0) {
idx--;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
break;
net/wireless/nl80211.c: fix endless Netlink callback loop. Although I only tested similar code (I don't use any of this wireless code), the state maintainance between Netlink dump callback invocations seems wrong here and should lead to an endless loop. There are also other examples in the same file which might have the same problem. Perhaps someone can actually test this (or refute my logic). Take the simple example with only one element in the list (which should fit into the message): 1. invocation: Start: idx = 0, start = 0 Loop: condition (++idx < start) => (1 < 0) => false => no continue, fill one entry, exit loop, return skb->len > 0 2. invocation: Start: idx = 0, start = 1 Loop: condition (++idx < start) => (1 < 1) => false => no continue, fill the same entry again, exit loop, return skb->len > 0 3. invocation: Same as 2. invocation, endless invocation of callback. Also, iterations where the filling of an element fails should not be counted as completed, so idx should not be incremented in this case. Signed-off-by: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-08 12:02:19 +00:00
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cb->args[0] = idx;
return skb->len;
}
static int nl80211_get_wiphy(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev = info->user_ptr[0];
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -ENOMEM;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_wiphy(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0, dev) < 0) {
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
genetlink: make netns aware This makes generic netlink network namespace aware. No generic netlink families except for the controller family are made namespace aware, they need to be checked one by one and then set the family->netnsok member to true. A new function genlmsg_multicast_netns() is introduced to allow sending a multicast message in a given namespace, for example when it applies to an object that lives in that namespace, a new function genlmsg_multicast_allns() to send a message to all network namespaces (for objects that do not have an associated netns). The function genlmsg_multicast() is changed to multicast the message in just init_net, which is currently correct for all generic netlink families since they only work in init_net right now. Some will later want to work in all net namespaces because they do not care about the netns at all -- those will have to be converted to use one of the new functions genlmsg_multicast_allns() or genlmsg_multicast_netns() whenever they are made netns aware in some way. After this patch families can easily decide whether or not they should be available in all net namespaces. Many genl families us it for objects not related to networking and should therefore be available in all namespaces, but that will have to be done on a per family basis. Note that this doesn't touch on the checkpoint/restart problem where network namespaces could be used, genl families and multicast groups are numbered globally and I see no easy way of changing that, especially since it must be possible to multicast to all network namespaces for those families that do not care about netns. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-07-10 09:51:34 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy txq_params_policy[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_MAX + 1] = {
[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_QUEUE] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_TXOP] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_CWMIN] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_CWMAX] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_AIFS] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
};
static int parse_txq_params(struct nlattr *tb[],
struct ieee80211_txq_params *txq_params)
{
cfg80211/nl80211: clarify TX queue API With the plan to change mac80211's queue API to not map ACs to queues 1:1, it seems necessary to clarify some APIs that act on ACs rather than on queues to spell that out explicitly. Do this. Also verify that the AC number given is valid. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-28 09:04:24 +00:00
if (!tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_AC] || !tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_TXOP] ||
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
!tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_CWMIN] || !tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_CWMAX] ||
!tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_AIFS])
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: clarify TX queue API With the plan to change mac80211's queue API to not map ACs to queues 1:1, it seems necessary to clarify some APIs that act on ACs rather than on queues to spell that out explicitly. Do this. Also verify that the AC number given is valid. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-28 09:04:24 +00:00
txq_params->ac = nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_AC]);
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
txq_params->txop = nla_get_u16(tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_TXOP]);
txq_params->cwmin = nla_get_u16(tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_CWMIN]);
txq_params->cwmax = nla_get_u16(tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_CWMAX]);
txq_params->aifs = nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_AIFS]);
cfg80211/nl80211: clarify TX queue API With the plan to change mac80211's queue API to not map ACs to queues 1:1, it seems necessary to clarify some APIs that act on ACs rather than on queues to spell that out explicitly. Do this. Also verify that the AC number given is valid. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-28 09:04:24 +00:00
if (txq_params->ac >= NL80211_NUM_ACS)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
return 0;
}
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
static bool nl80211_can_set_dev_channel(struct wireless_dev *wdev)
{
/*
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
* You can only set the channel explicitly for WDS interfaces,
* all others have their channel managed via their respective
* "establish a connection" command (connect, join, ...)
*
* For AP/GO and mesh mode, the channel can be set with the
* channel userspace API, but is only stored and passed to the
* low-level driver when the AP starts or the mesh is joined.
* This is for backward compatibility, userspace can also give
* the channel in the start-ap or join-mesh commands instead.
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
*
* Monitors are special as they are normally slaved to
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
* whatever else is going on, so they have their own special
* operation to set the monitor channel if possible.
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
*/
return !wdev ||
wdev->iftype == NL80211_IFTYPE_AP ||
wdev->iftype == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT ||
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
wdev->iftype == NL80211_IFTYPE_MONITOR ||
wdev->iftype == NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
}
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_parse_chandef(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct genl_info *info,
struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef)
{
cfg80211: Remove unused VHT chan code Cleanup of unused VHT channel config related code. Signed-off-by: Mahesh Palivela <maheshp@posedge.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-29 08:41:07 +00:00
u32 control_freq;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ])
return -EINVAL;
control_freq = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]);
chandef->chan = ieee80211_get_channel(&rdev->wiphy, control_freq);
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
chandef->width = NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT;
chandef->center_freq1 = control_freq;
chandef->center_freq2 = 0;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
/* Primary channel not allowed */
if (!chandef->chan || chandef->chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_CHANNEL_TYPE]) {
enum nl80211_channel_type chantype;
chantype = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_CHANNEL_TYPE]);
switch (chantype) {
case NL80211_CHAN_NO_HT:
case NL80211_CHAN_HT20:
case NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS:
case NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS:
cfg80211_chandef_create(chandef, chandef->chan,
chantype);
break;
default:
return -EINVAL;
}
} else if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CHANNEL_WIDTH]) {
chandef->width =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CHANNEL_WIDTH]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ1])
chandef->center_freq1 =
nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ1]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ2])
chandef->center_freq2 =
nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ2]);
}
cfg80211: rework chandef checking and export it Some of the chandef checking that we do in cfg80211 to check if a channel is supported or not is also needed in mac80211, so rework that a bit and export the functions that are needed. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-22 15:59:45 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_chandef_valid(chandef))
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: rework chandef checking and export it Some of the chandef checking that we do in cfg80211 to check if a channel is supported or not is also needed in mac80211, so rework that a bit and export the functions that are needed. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-22 15:59:45 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_chandef_usable(&rdev->wiphy, chandef,
IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED))
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
return 0;
}
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
static int __nl80211_set_channel(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct wireless_dev *wdev,
struct genl_info *info)
{
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
int result;
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
enum nl80211_iftype iftype = NL80211_IFTYPE_MONITOR;
if (wdev)
iftype = wdev->iftype;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
if (!nl80211_can_set_dev_channel(wdev))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
result = nl80211_parse_chandef(rdev, info, &chandef);
if (result)
return result;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
switch (iftype) {
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
if (wdev->beacon_interval) {
result = -EBUSY;
break;
}
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_reg_can_beacon(&rdev->wiphy, &chandef)) {
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
result = -EINVAL;
break;
}
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
wdev->preset_chandef = chandef;
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
result = 0;
break;
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
result = cfg80211_set_mesh_channel(rdev, wdev, &chandef);
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
break;
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MONITOR:
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
result = cfg80211_set_monitor_channel(rdev, &chandef);
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
break;
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
default:
cfg80211: clarify set_channel APIs Now that we've removed all uses of the set_channel API except for the monitor channel and in libertas, clarify this. Split the libertas mesh use into a new libertas_set_mesh_channel() operation, just to keep backward compatibility, and rename the normal set_channel() to set_monitor_channel(). Also describe the desired set_monitor_channel() semantics more clearly. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-06 06:18:22 +00:00
result = -EINVAL;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
}
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
return result;
}
static int nl80211_set_channel(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *netdev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return __nl80211_set_channel(rdev, netdev->ieee80211_ptr, info);
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
}
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_wds_peer(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use new genl helpers for WDS Bill Jordan's patch to allow setting the WDS peer crossed with my patch removing all the boilerplate code in nl80211, and consequently he didn't make use of it yet. Fix that. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-07 11:10:30 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
cfg80211: constify WDS address There's no need for the WDS peer address to not be const, so make it const. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-07 11:11:09 +00:00
const u8 *bssid;
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use new genl helpers for WDS Bill Jordan's patch to allow setting the WDS peer crossed with my patch removing all the boilerplate code in nl80211, and consequently he didn't make use of it yet. Fix that. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-07 11:10:30 +00:00
if (netif_running(dev))
return -EBUSY;
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
nl80211: use new genl helpers for WDS Bill Jordan's patch to allow setting the WDS peer crossed with my patch removing all the boilerplate code in nl80211, and consequently he didn't make use of it yet. Fix that. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-07 11:10:30 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_wds_peer)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
nl80211: use new genl helpers for WDS Bill Jordan's patch to allow setting the WDS peer crossed with my patch removing all the boilerplate code in nl80211, and consequently he didn't make use of it yet. Fix that. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-07 11:10:30 +00:00
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_WDS)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_set_wds_peer(rdev, dev, bssid);
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_wiphy(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev = NULL;
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
nl80211: Uninitialized variable There is a path in nl80211_set_wiphy where result is tested but uninitialized. I am hitting this path when I attempt: sh# iw dev wlan0 set channel 10 command failed: Unknown error 1069727332 (-1069727332) Signed-off-by: William Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-10 15:22:32 +00:00
int result = 0, rem_txq_params = 0;
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
struct nlattr *nl_txq_params;
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
u32 changed;
u8 retry_short = 0, retry_long = 0;
u32 frag_threshold = 0, rts_threshold = 0;
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
u8 coverage_class = 0;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
/*
* Try to find the wiphy and netdev. Normally this
* function shouldn't need the netdev, but this is
* done for backward compatibility -- previously
* setting the channel was done per wiphy, but now
* it is per netdev. Previous userland like hostapd
* also passed a netdev to set_wiphy, so that it is
* possible to let that go to the right netdev!
*/
cfg80211: fix locking in nl80211_set_wiphy Luis reports that there's a circular locking dependency; this is because cfg80211_dev_rename() will acquire the cfg80211_mutex while the device mutex is held, while this normally is done the other way around. The solution is to open-code the device-getting in nl80211_set_wiphy and require holding the mutex around cfg80211_dev_rename rather than acquiring it within. Also fix a bug -- rtnl locking is expected by drivers so we need to provide it. Reported-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-24 08:35:46 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX]) {
int ifindex = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX]);
netdev = dev_get_by_index(genl_info_net(info), ifindex);
if (netdev && netdev->ieee80211_ptr) {
rdev = wiphy_to_dev(netdev->ieee80211_ptr->wiphy);
mutex_lock(&rdev->mtx);
} else
netdev = NULL;
cfg80211: fix locking in nl80211_set_wiphy Luis reports that there's a circular locking dependency; this is because cfg80211_dev_rename() will acquire the cfg80211_mutex while the device mutex is held, while this normally is done the other way around. The solution is to open-code the device-getting in nl80211_set_wiphy and require holding the mutex around cfg80211_dev_rename rather than acquiring it within. Also fix a bug -- rtnl locking is expected by drivers so we need to provide it. Reported-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-24 08:35:46 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
if (!netdev) {
nl80211: change __cfg80211_rdev_from_info Change the function to __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs to take attributes instead of the info struct to make it usable from dump callbacks for testmode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:18:32 +00:00
rdev = __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs(genl_info_net(info),
info->attrs);
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(rdev)) {
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return PTR_ERR(rdev);
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
}
wdev = NULL;
netdev = NULL;
result = 0;
mutex_lock(&rdev->mtx);
nl80211: move "can set channel" check Setting the wdev to NULL when the channel can't be set for that interface type (to treat the channel setting for the wiphy/monitor) currently works, but is confusing in the code if netdev/wdev aren't both set/unset in the same way. Move the check whether the channel can be set to where it's needed so that wdev and netdev are always both assigned or NULL. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-24 08:04:58 +00:00
} else
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
wdev = netdev->ieee80211_ptr;
/*
* end workaround code, by now the rdev is available
* and locked, and wdev may or may not be NULL.
*/
cfg80211: fix locking in nl80211_set_wiphy Luis reports that there's a circular locking dependency; this is because cfg80211_dev_rename() will acquire the cfg80211_mutex while the device mutex is held, while this normally is done the other way around. The solution is to open-code the device-getting in nl80211_set_wiphy and require holding the mutex around cfg80211_dev_rename rather than acquiring it within. Also fix a bug -- rtnl locking is expected by drivers so we need to provide it. Reported-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-24 08:35:46 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_NAME])
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
result = cfg80211_dev_rename(
rdev, nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_NAME]));
cfg80211: fix locking in nl80211_set_wiphy Luis reports that there's a circular locking dependency; this is because cfg80211_dev_rename() will acquire the cfg80211_mutex while the device mutex is held, while this normally is done the other way around. The solution is to open-code the device-getting in nl80211_set_wiphy and require holding the mutex around cfg80211_dev_rename rather than acquiring it within. Also fix a bug -- rtnl locking is expected by drivers so we need to provide it. Reported-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-24 08:35:46 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
if (result)
goto bad_res;
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS]) {
struct ieee80211_txq_params txq_params;
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_MAX + 1];
if (!rdev->ops->set_txq_params) {
result = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto bad_res;
}
cfg80211/mac80211: add netdev param to set_txq_params() tx params are currently configured per hw, although they should be configured per interface. Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-25 17:06:53 +00:00
if (!netdev) {
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
cfg80211: allow setting TXQ parameters only in AP mode In other modes the parameters should not be set. Right now, mac80211 will set them, even if the user asked for setting them on VLANs which the driver doesn't know about, causing all kinds of trouble. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-03 13:50:13 +00:00
if (netdev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
netdev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO) {
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
if (!netif_running(netdev)) {
result = -ENETDOWN;
goto bad_res;
}
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
nla_for_each_nested(nl_txq_params,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS],
rem_txq_params) {
nla_parse(tb, NL80211_TXQ_ATTR_MAX,
nla_data(nl_txq_params),
nla_len(nl_txq_params),
txq_params_policy);
result = parse_txq_params(tb, &txq_params);
if (result)
goto bad_res;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
result = rdev_set_txq_params(rdev, netdev,
&txq_params);
nl80211: Add TX queue parameter configuration Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TXQ_PARAMS, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set TX queue parameters (txop, cwmin, cwmax, aifs). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:24 +00:00
if (result)
goto bad_res;
}
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211: Add frequency configuration (including HT40) This patch adds new NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY attributes NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ and NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_SEC_CHAN_OFFSET to allow userspace to set the operating channel (e.g., hostapd for AP mode). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-11-26 14:15:24 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]) {
nl80211: move "can set channel" check Setting the wdev to NULL when the channel can't be set for that interface type (to treat the channel setting for the wiphy/monitor) currently works, but is confusing in the code if netdev/wdev aren't both set/unset in the same way. Move the check whether the channel can be set to where it's needed so that wdev and netdev are always both assigned or NULL. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-24 08:04:58 +00:00
result = __nl80211_set_channel(rdev,
nl80211_can_set_dev_channel(wdev) ? wdev : NULL,
info);
nl80211: Add frequency configuration (including HT40) This patch adds new NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY attributes NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ and NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_SEC_CHAN_OFFSET to allow userspace to set the operating channel (e.g., hostapd for AP mode). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-11-26 14:15:24 +00:00
if (result)
goto bad_res;
}
nl80211: Add option to adjust transmit power This patch adds transmit power setting type and transmit power level attributes to NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY in order to facilitate adjusting of the transmit power level of the device. The added attributes allow selection of automatic, limited or fixed transmit power level, with the level definable in signed mBm format. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-23 09:12:38 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TX_POWER_SETTING]) {
cfg80211: allow per interface TX power setting The TX power setting is currently per wiphy (hardware device) but with multi-channel capabilities that doesn't make much sense any more. Allow drivers (and mac80211) to advertise support for per-interface TX power configuration. When the TX power is configured for the wiphy, the wdev will be NULL and the driver can still handle that, but when a wdev is given the TX power can be set only for that wdev now. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-24 08:17:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *txp_wdev = wdev;
nl80211: Add option to adjust transmit power This patch adds transmit power setting type and transmit power level attributes to NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY in order to facilitate adjusting of the transmit power level of the device. The added attributes allow selection of automatic, limited or fixed transmit power level, with the level definable in signed mBm format. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-23 09:12:38 +00:00
enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
int idx, mbm = 0;
cfg80211: allow per interface TX power setting The TX power setting is currently per wiphy (hardware device) but with multi-channel capabilities that doesn't make much sense any more. Allow drivers (and mac80211) to advertise support for per-interface TX power configuration. When the TX power is configured for the wiphy, the wdev will be NULL and the driver can still handle that, but when a wdev is given the TX power can be set only for that wdev now. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-24 08:17:18 +00:00
if (!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_VIF_TXPOWER))
txp_wdev = NULL;
nl80211: Add option to adjust transmit power This patch adds transmit power setting type and transmit power level attributes to NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY in order to facilitate adjusting of the transmit power level of the device. The added attributes allow selection of automatic, limited or fixed transmit power level, with the level definable in signed mBm format. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-23 09:12:38 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_tx_power) {
NET: nl80211, fix lock imbalance and netdev referencing Stanse found that nl80211_set_wiphy imporperly handles a lock and netdev reference and contains unreachable code. It is because there return statement isntead of assignment to result variable. Fix that. Signed-off-by: Jiri Slaby <jirislaby@gmail.com> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: "John W. Linville" <linville@tuxdriver.com> Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net> Cc: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Cc: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org Cc: netdev@vger.kernel.org Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-07-07 13:02:46 +00:00
result = -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Add option to adjust transmit power This patch adds transmit power setting type and transmit power level attributes to NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY in order to facilitate adjusting of the transmit power level of the device. The added attributes allow selection of automatic, limited or fixed transmit power level, with the level definable in signed mBm format. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-23 09:12:38 +00:00
goto bad_res;
}
idx = NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TX_POWER_SETTING;
type = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[idx]);
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TX_POWER_LEVEL] &&
(type != NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC)) {
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
if (type != NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC) {
idx = NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_TX_POWER_LEVEL;
mbm = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[idx]);
}
cfg80211: allow per interface TX power setting The TX power setting is currently per wiphy (hardware device) but with multi-channel capabilities that doesn't make much sense any more. Allow drivers (and mac80211) to advertise support for per-interface TX power configuration. When the TX power is configured for the wiphy, the wdev will be NULL and the driver can still handle that, but when a wdev is given the TX power can be set only for that wdev now. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-24 08:17:18 +00:00
result = rdev_set_tx_power(rdev, txp_wdev, type, mbm);
nl80211: Add option to adjust transmit power This patch adds transmit power setting type and transmit power level attributes to NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY in order to facilitate adjusting of the transmit power level of the device. The added attributes allow selection of automatic, limited or fixed transmit power level, with the level definable in signed mBm format. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-23 09:12:38 +00:00
if (result)
goto bad_res;
}
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX] &&
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_RX]) {
u32 tx_ant, rx_ant;
cfg80211: Separate available antennas for RX and TX As has been pointed out by Daniel Halperin some devices (e.g. Intel IWL5100) can only TX from a subset of RX antennas, so use separate availability masks for RX and TX. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-16 02:30:22 +00:00
if ((!rdev->wiphy.available_antennas_tx &&
!rdev->wiphy.available_antennas_rx) ||
!rdev->ops->set_antenna) {
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
result = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto bad_res;
}
tx_ant = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX]);
rx_ant = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_RX]);
cfg80211: Add antenna availability information Add a field to wiphy for the hardware to report the availble antennas for configuration. Only if this is set to something bigger than zero, will the anntenna configuration ops be executed. Allthough this could be a simple number of antennas, I defined it as a bitmap of antennas which are available for configuration, since it's more consistent with the rest of the antenna API and there could be cases where the hardware allows only configuration of certain antennas. As it does not make much of a difference in size or normal usage, I think it's better to be able to support this, in case the need arises. The antenna configuration is now also checked against the availabe antennas and rejected if it does not match. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v3: always apply available antenna mask (for "all" antennas case). v2: reject antenna configurations which don't match the available antennas Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-08 04:59:24 +00:00
/* reject antenna configurations which don't match the
cfg80211: Separate available antennas for RX and TX As has been pointed out by Daniel Halperin some devices (e.g. Intel IWL5100) can only TX from a subset of RX antennas, so use separate availability masks for RX and TX. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-16 02:30:22 +00:00
* available antenna masks, except for the "all" mask */
if ((~tx_ant && (tx_ant & ~rdev->wiphy.available_antennas_tx)) ||
(~rx_ant && (rx_ant & ~rdev->wiphy.available_antennas_rx))) {
cfg80211: Add antenna availability information Add a field to wiphy for the hardware to report the availble antennas for configuration. Only if this is set to something bigger than zero, will the anntenna configuration ops be executed. Allthough this could be a simple number of antennas, I defined it as a bitmap of antennas which are available for configuration, since it's more consistent with the rest of the antenna API and there could be cases where the hardware allows only configuration of certain antennas. As it does not make much of a difference in size or normal usage, I think it's better to be able to support this, in case the need arises. The antenna configuration is now also checked against the availabe antennas and rejected if it does not match. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v3: always apply available antenna mask (for "all" antennas case). v2: reject antenna configurations which don't match the available antennas Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-08 04:59:24 +00:00
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
cfg80211: Separate available antennas for RX and TX As has been pointed out by Daniel Halperin some devices (e.g. Intel IWL5100) can only TX from a subset of RX antennas, so use separate availability masks for RX and TX. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-16 02:30:22 +00:00
tx_ant = tx_ant & rdev->wiphy.available_antennas_tx;
rx_ant = rx_ant & rdev->wiphy.available_antennas_rx;
cfg80211: Add antenna availability information Add a field to wiphy for the hardware to report the availble antennas for configuration. Only if this is set to something bigger than zero, will the anntenna configuration ops be executed. Allthough this could be a simple number of antennas, I defined it as a bitmap of antennas which are available for configuration, since it's more consistent with the rest of the antenna API and there could be cases where the hardware allows only configuration of certain antennas. As it does not make much of a difference in size or normal usage, I think it's better to be able to support this, in case the need arises. The antenna configuration is now also checked against the availabe antennas and rejected if it does not match. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v3: always apply available antenna mask (for "all" antennas case). v2: reject antenna configurations which don't match the available antennas Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-08 04:59:24 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
result = rdev_set_antenna(rdev, tx_ant, rx_ant);
cfg80211: Add nl80211 antenna configuration Allow setting of TX and RX antennas configuration via nl80211. The antenna configuration is defined as a bitmap of allowed antennas to use. This API can be used to mask out antennas which are not attached or should not be used for other reasons like regulatory concerns or special setups. Separate bitmaps are used for RX and TX to allow configuring different antennas for receiving and transmitting. Each bitmap is 32 bit long, each bit representing one antenna, starting with antenna 1 at the first bit. If an antenna bit is set, this means the driver is allowed to use this antenna for RX or TX respectively; if the bit is not set the hardware is not allowed to use this antenna. Using bitmaps has the benefit of allowing for a flexible configuration interface which can support many different configurations and which can be used for 802.11n as well as non-802.11n devices. Instead of relying on some hardware specific assumptions, drivers can use this information to know which antennas are actually attached to the system and derive their capabilities based on that. 802.11n devices should enable or disable chains, based on which antennas are present (If all antennas belonging to a particular chain are disabled, the entire chain should be disabled). HT capabilities (like STBC, TX Beamforming, Antenna selection) should be calculated based on the available chains after applying the antenna masks. Should a 802.11n device have diversity antennas attached to one of their chains, diversity can be enabled or disabled based on the antenna information. Non-802.11n drivers can use the antenna masks to select RX and TX antennas and to enable or disable antenna diversity. While covering chainmasks for 802.11n and the standard "legacy" modes "fixed antenna 1", "fixed antenna 2" and "diversity" this API also allows more rare, but useful configurations as follows: 1) Send on antenna 1, receive on antenna 2 (or vice versa). This can be used to have a low gain antenna for TX in order to keep within the regulatory constraints and a high gain antenna for RX in order to receive weaker signals ("speak softly, but listen harder"). This can be useful for building long-shot outdoor links. Another usage of this setup is having a low-noise pre-amplifier on antenna 1 and a power amplifier on the other antenna. This way transmit noise is mostly kept out of the low noise receive channel. (This would be bitmaps: tx 1 rx 2). 2) Another similar setup is: Use RX diversity on both antennas, but always send on antenna 1. Again that would allow us to benefit from a higher gain RX antenna, while staying within the legal limits. (This would be: tx 0 rx 3). 3) And finally there can be special experimental setups in research and development even with pre 802.11n hardware where more than 2 antennas are available. It's good to keep the API simple, yet flexible. Signed-off-by: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org> -- v7: Made bitmasks 32 bit wide and rebased to latest wireless-testing. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-10 03:50:50 +00:00
if (result)
goto bad_res;
}
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
changed = 0;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_SHORT]) {
retry_short = nla_get_u8(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_SHORT]);
if (retry_short == 0) {
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
changed |= WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_LONG]) {
retry_long = nla_get_u8(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RETRY_LONG]);
if (retry_long == 0) {
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
changed |= WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FRAG_THRESHOLD]) {
frag_threshold = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FRAG_THRESHOLD]);
if (frag_threshold < 256) {
result = -EINVAL;
goto bad_res;
}
if (frag_threshold != (u32) -1) {
/*
* Fragments (apart from the last one) are required to
* have even length. Make the fragmentation code
* simpler by stripping LSB should someone try to use
* odd threshold value.
*/
frag_threshold &= ~0x1;
}
changed |= WIPHY_PARAM_FRAG_THRESHOLD;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RTS_THRESHOLD]) {
rts_threshold = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_RTS_THRESHOLD]);
changed |= WIPHY_PARAM_RTS_THRESHOLD;
}
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS]) {
coverage_class = nla_get_u8(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS]);
changed |= WIPHY_PARAM_COVERAGE_CLASS;
}
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
if (changed) {
u8 old_retry_short, old_retry_long;
u32 old_frag_threshold, old_rts_threshold;
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
u8 old_coverage_class;
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_wiphy_params) {
result = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto bad_res;
}
old_retry_short = rdev->wiphy.retry_short;
old_retry_long = rdev->wiphy.retry_long;
old_frag_threshold = rdev->wiphy.frag_threshold;
old_rts_threshold = rdev->wiphy.rts_threshold;
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
old_coverage_class = rdev->wiphy.coverage_class;
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
if (changed & WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT)
rdev->wiphy.retry_short = retry_short;
if (changed & WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG)
rdev->wiphy.retry_long = retry_long;
if (changed & WIPHY_PARAM_FRAG_THRESHOLD)
rdev->wiphy.frag_threshold = frag_threshold;
if (changed & WIPHY_PARAM_RTS_THRESHOLD)
rdev->wiphy.rts_threshold = rts_threshold;
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
if (changed & WIPHY_PARAM_COVERAGE_CLASS)
rdev->wiphy.coverage_class = coverage_class;
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
result = rdev_set_wiphy_params(rdev, changed);
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
if (result) {
rdev->wiphy.retry_short = old_retry_short;
rdev->wiphy.retry_long = old_retry_long;
rdev->wiphy.frag_threshold = old_frag_threshold;
rdev->wiphy.rts_threshold = old_rts_threshold;
nl80211: Add new WIPHY attribute COVERAGE_CLASS The new attribute NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_COVERAGE_CLASS sets IEEE 802.11 Coverage Class, which depends on maximum distance of nodes in a wireless network. It's required for long distance links (more than a few hundred meters). The attribute is now ignored by two non-mac80211 drivers, rndis and iwmc3200wifi, together with WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_SHORT and WIPHY_PARAM_RETRY_LONG. If it turns out to be a problem, we could split set_wiphy_params callback or add new capability bits. Signed-off-by: Lukas Turek <8an@praha12.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-21 21:50:47 +00:00
rdev->wiphy.coverage_class = old_coverage_class;
nl80211: Add set/get for frag/rts threshold and retry limits Add new nl80211 attributes that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY and NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY to manage fragmentation/RTS threshold and retry limits. Since these values are stored in struct wiphy, remove the local copy from mac80211 where feasible (frag & rts threshold). The retry limits are currently needed in struct ieee80211_conf, but these could be eventually removed since the driver should have access to the values in struct wiphy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-20 16:39:05 +00:00
}
}
nl80211: Add frequency configuration (including HT40) This patch adds new NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY attributes NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ and NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_SEC_CHAN_OFFSET to allow userspace to set the operating channel (e.g., hostapd for AP mode). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-11-26 14:15:24 +00:00
cfg80211: fix nl80211 frequency handling Fix two small bugs with HT frequency setting: * HT is accepted even when the driver is incapable * HT40 is accepted when the driver cannot do 40 MHz (both on the selected band) Also simplify the code a little. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-12-08 11:39:04 +00:00
bad_res:
cfg80211: fix locking in nl80211_set_wiphy Luis reports that there's a circular locking dependency; this is because cfg80211_dev_rename() will acquire the cfg80211_mutex while the device mutex is held, while this normally is done the other way around. The solution is to open-code the device-getting in nl80211_set_wiphy and require holding the mutex around cfg80211_dev_rename rather than acquiring it within. Also fix a bug -- rtnl locking is expected by drivers so we need to provide it. Reported-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-24 08:35:46 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&rdev->mtx);
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
if (netdev)
dev_put(netdev);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
return result;
}
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
static inline u64 wdev_id(struct wireless_dev *wdev)
{
return (u64)wdev->identifier |
((u64)wiphy_to_dev(wdev->wiphy)->wiphy_idx << 32);
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_chandef(struct sk_buff *msg,
struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef)
{
cfg80211: rework chandef checking and export it Some of the chandef checking that we do in cfg80211 to check if a channel is supported or not is also needed in mac80211, so rework that a bit and export the functions that are needed. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-22 15:59:45 +00:00
WARN_ON(!cfg80211_chandef_valid(chandef));
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ,
chandef->chan->center_freq))
return -ENOBUFS;
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
switch (chandef->width) {
case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT:
case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20:
case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40:
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_CHANNEL_TYPE,
cfg80211_get_chandef_type(chandef)))
return -ENOBUFS;
break;
default:
break;
}
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CHANNEL_WIDTH, chandef->width))
return -ENOBUFS;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ1, chandef->center_freq1))
return -ENOBUFS;
if (chandef->center_freq2 &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ2, chandef->center_freq2))
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
return -ENOBUFS;
return 0;
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_iface(struct sk_buff *msg, u32 portid, u32 seq, int flags,
nl80211: send wiphy along with netdev When listing all wireless netdevs in the system this is useful to print which wiphy they belong to. Just add the attribute, any program that doesn't care will just ignore it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 14:23:20 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev)
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
{
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = wdev->netdev;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
void *hdr;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags, NL80211_CMD_NEW_INTERFACE);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (!hdr)
return -1;
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
if (dev &&
(nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
nla_put_string(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFNAME, dev->name)))
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE, wdev->iftype) ||
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WDEV, wdev_id(wdev)) ||
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, wdev_address(wdev)) ||
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_GENERATION,
rdev->devlist_generation ^
(cfg80211_rdev_list_generation << 2)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: re-add get_channel operation This essentially reverts commit 2e165b818456 but introduces the get_channel operation with a new wireless_dev argument so that you can retrieve the channel per interface. This is necessary as even though we can track all interface channels (except monitor) we can't track the channel type used. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 17:45:08 +00:00
if (rdev->ops->get_channel) {
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
int ret;
struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
ret = rdev_get_channel(rdev, wdev, &chandef);
if (ret == 0) {
if (nl80211_send_chandef(msg, &chandef))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
cfg80211: Add channel information to NL80211_CMD_GET_INTERFACE If the current channel is known, add frequency and channel type to NL80211_CMD_GET_INTERFACE. Signed-off-by: Pontus Fuchs <pontus.fuchs@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-03 14:39:58 +00:00
}
nl80211: send the NL80211_ATTR_SSID in nl80211_send_iface() The userspace may want to know what is the current ssid that a given interface is using. This patch enables nl80211 to send the NL80211_ATTR_SSID attribute in nl80211_send_iface(). Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-07 11:52:20 +00:00
if (wdev->ssid_len) {
if (nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SSID, wdev->ssid_len, wdev->ssid))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
netlink: Improve returned error codes Make nlmsg_trim(), nlmsg_cancel(), genlmsg_cancel(), and nla_nest_cancel() void functions. Return -EMSGSIZE instead of -1 if the provided message buffer is not big enough. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-06-03 23:36:54 +00:00
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_dump_interface(struct sk_buff *skb, struct netlink_callback *cb)
{
int wp_idx = 0;
int if_idx = 0;
int wp_start = cb->args[0];
int if_start = cb->args[1];
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
list_for_each_entry(rdev, &cfg80211_rdev_list, list) {
if (!net_eq(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), sock_net(skb->sk)))
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
continue;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (wp_idx < wp_start) {
wp_idx++;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
continue;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if_idx = 0;
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
list_for_each_entry(wdev, &rdev->wdev_list, list) {
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (if_idx < if_start) {
if_idx++;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
continue;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_iface(skb, NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
rdev, wdev) < 0) {
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
goto out;
}
if_idx++;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
wp_idx++;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
out:
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cb->args[0] = wp_idx;
cb->args[1] = if_idx;
return skb->len;
}
static int nl80211_get_interface(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -ENOMEM;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_iface(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
dev, wdev) < 0) {
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
genetlink: make netns aware This makes generic netlink network namespace aware. No generic netlink families except for the controller family are made namespace aware, they need to be checked one by one and then set the family->netnsok member to true. A new function genlmsg_multicast_netns() is introduced to allow sending a multicast message in a given namespace, for example when it applies to an object that lives in that namespace, a new function genlmsg_multicast_allns() to send a message to all network namespaces (for objects that do not have an associated netns). The function genlmsg_multicast() is changed to multicast the message in just init_net, which is currently correct for all generic netlink families since they only work in init_net right now. Some will later want to work in all net namespaces because they do not care about the netns at all -- those will have to be converted to use one of the new functions genlmsg_multicast_allns() or genlmsg_multicast_netns() whenever they are made netns aware in some way. After this patch families can easily decide whether or not they should be available in all net namespaces. Many genl families us it for objects not related to networking and should therefore be available in all namespaces, but that will have to be done on a per family basis. Note that this doesn't touch on the checkpoint/restart problem where network namespaces could be used, genl families and multicast groups are numbered globally and I see no easy way of changing that, especially since it must be possible to multicast to all network namespaces for those families that do not care about netns. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-07-10 09:51:34 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: Add monitor interface configuration flags This allows precise control over what a monitor interface shows. Signed-off-by: Michael Wu <flamingice@sourmilk.net> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-31 18:48:22 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy mntr_flags_policy[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_MAX + 1] = {
[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_FCSFAIL] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_PLCPFAIL] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_CONTROL] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_OTHER_BSS] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_COOK_FRAMES] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
};
static int parse_monitor_flags(struct nlattr *nla, u32 *mntrflags)
{
struct nlattr *flags[NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_MAX + 1];
int flag;
*mntrflags = 0;
if (!nla)
return -EINVAL;
if (nla_parse_nested(flags, NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_MAX,
nla, mntr_flags_policy))
return -EINVAL;
for (flag = 1; flag <= NL80211_MNTR_FLAG_MAX; flag++)
if (flags[flag])
*mntrflags |= (1<<flag);
return 0;
}
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
static int nl80211_valid_4addr(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: disallow bridging managed/adhoc interfaces A number of people have tried to add a wireless interface (in managed mode) to a bridge and then complained that it doesn't work. It cannot work, however, because in 802.11 networks all packets need to be acknowledged and as such need to be sent to the right address. Promiscuous doesn't help here. The wireless address format used for these links has only space for three addresses, the * transmitter, which must be equal to the sender (origin) * receiver (on the wireless medium), which is the AP in the case of managed mode * the recipient (destination), which is on the APs local network segment In an IBSS, it is similar, but the receiver and recipient must match and the third address is used as the BSSID. To avoid such mistakes in the future, disallow adding a wireless interface to a bridge. Felix has recently added a four-address mode to the AP and client side that can be used (after negotiating that it is possible, which must happen out-of-band by setting up both sides) for bridging, so allow that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:30 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev, u8 use_4addr,
enum nl80211_iftype iftype)
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
{
cfg80211: disallow bridging managed/adhoc interfaces A number of people have tried to add a wireless interface (in managed mode) to a bridge and then complained that it doesn't work. It cannot work, however, because in 802.11 networks all packets need to be acknowledged and as such need to be sent to the right address. Promiscuous doesn't help here. The wireless address format used for these links has only space for three addresses, the * transmitter, which must be equal to the sender (origin) * receiver (on the wireless medium), which is the AP in the case of managed mode * the recipient (destination), which is on the APs local network segment In an IBSS, it is similar, but the receiver and recipient must match and the third address is used as the BSSID. To avoid such mistakes in the future, disallow adding a wireless interface to a bridge. Felix has recently added a four-address mode to the AP and client side that can be used (after negotiating that it is possible, which must happen out-of-band by setting up both sides) for bridging, so allow that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:30 +00:00
if (!use_4addr) {
bridge: use rx_handler_data pointer to store net_bridge_port pointer Register net_bridge_port pointer as rx_handler data pointer. As br_port is removed from struct net_device, another netdev priv_flag is added to indicate the device serves as a bridge port. Also rcuized pointers are now correctly dereferenced in br_fdb.c and in netfilter parts. Signed-off-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2010-06-15 06:50:45 +00:00
if (netdev && (netdev->priv_flags & IFF_BRIDGE_PORT))
cfg80211: disallow bridging managed/adhoc interfaces A number of people have tried to add a wireless interface (in managed mode) to a bridge and then complained that it doesn't work. It cannot work, however, because in 802.11 networks all packets need to be acknowledged and as such need to be sent to the right address. Promiscuous doesn't help here. The wireless address format used for these links has only space for three addresses, the * transmitter, which must be equal to the sender (origin) * receiver (on the wireless medium), which is the AP in the case of managed mode * the recipient (destination), which is on the APs local network segment In an IBSS, it is similar, but the receiver and recipient must match and the third address is used as the BSSID. To avoid such mistakes in the future, disallow adding a wireless interface to a bridge. Felix has recently added a four-address mode to the AP and client side that can be used (after negotiating that it is possible, which must happen out-of-band by setting up both sides) for bridging, so allow that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:30 +00:00
return -EBUSY;
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
return 0;
cfg80211: disallow bridging managed/adhoc interfaces A number of people have tried to add a wireless interface (in managed mode) to a bridge and then complained that it doesn't work. It cannot work, however, because in 802.11 networks all packets need to be acknowledged and as such need to be sent to the right address. Promiscuous doesn't help here. The wireless address format used for these links has only space for three addresses, the * transmitter, which must be equal to the sender (origin) * receiver (on the wireless medium), which is the AP in the case of managed mode * the recipient (destination), which is on the APs local network segment In an IBSS, it is similar, but the receiver and recipient must match and the third address is used as the BSSID. To avoid such mistakes in the future, disallow adding a wireless interface to a bridge. Felix has recently added a four-address mode to the AP and client side that can be used (after negotiating that it is possible, which must happen out-of-band by setting up both sides) for bridging, so allow that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:30 +00:00
}
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
switch (iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
if (rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_4ADDR_AP)
return 0;
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
if (rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_4ADDR_STATION)
return 0;
break;
default:
break;
}
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_interface(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
struct vif_params params;
cfg80211: pass netdev to change_virtual_intf If there was a reason I'm passing the ifidx I cannot remember it any more and don't see one now, so let's just pass the pointer itself. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-09 19:04:43 +00:00
int err;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
enum nl80211_iftype otype, ntype;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: reject invalid configuration items Reject configuring mesh-id for non-mesh, monitor flags for non-monitor. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:39:36 +00:00
u32 _flags, *flags = NULL;
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
bool change = false;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
memset(&params, 0, sizeof(params));
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
otype = ntype = dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cfg80211: allow set_interface without type Which then causes no type change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:22:09 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE]) {
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
ntype = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE]);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
if (otype != ntype)
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
change = true;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ntype > NL80211_IFTYPE_MAX)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: allow set_interface without type Which then causes no type change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:22:09 +00:00
}
cfg80211: reject invalid configuration items Reject configuring mesh-id for non-mesh, monitor flags for non-monitor. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:39:36 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]) {
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ntype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
if (netif_running(dev))
return -EBUSY;
wdev_lock(wdev);
BUILD_BUG_ON(IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN !=
IEEE80211_MAX_MESH_ID_LEN);
wdev->mesh_id_up_len =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]);
memcpy(wdev->ssid, nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]),
wdev->mesh_id_up_len);
wdev_unlock(wdev);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
nl80211: add a parameter for using 4-address frames on virtual interfaces Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-10 17:53:10 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_4ADDR]) {
params.use_4addr = !!nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_4ADDR]);
change = true;
cfg80211: disallow bridging managed/adhoc interfaces A number of people have tried to add a wireless interface (in managed mode) to a bridge and then complained that it doesn't work. It cannot work, however, because in 802.11 networks all packets need to be acknowledged and as such need to be sent to the right address. Promiscuous doesn't help here. The wireless address format used for these links has only space for three addresses, the * transmitter, which must be equal to the sender (origin) * receiver (on the wireless medium), which is the AP in the case of managed mode * the recipient (destination), which is on the APs local network segment In an IBSS, it is similar, but the receiver and recipient must match and the third address is used as the BSSID. To avoid such mistakes in the future, disallow adding a wireless interface to a bridge. Felix has recently added a four-address mode to the AP and client side that can be used (after negotiating that it is possible, which must happen out-of-band by setting up both sides) for bridging, so allow that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:30 +00:00
err = nl80211_valid_4addr(rdev, dev, params.use_4addr, ntype);
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return err;
nl80211: add a parameter for using 4-address frames on virtual interfaces Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-10 17:53:10 +00:00
} else {
params.use_4addr = -1;
}
cfg80211: reject invalid configuration items Reject configuring mesh-id for non-mesh, monitor flags for non-monitor. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:39:36 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MNTR_FLAGS]) {
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ntype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MONITOR)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: reject invalid configuration items Reject configuring mesh-id for non-mesh, monitor flags for non-monitor. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:39:36 +00:00
err = parse_monitor_flags(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MNTR_FLAGS],
&_flags);
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return err;
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
flags = &_flags;
change = true;
cfg80211: reject invalid configuration items Reject configuring mesh-id for non-mesh, monitor flags for non-monitor. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 18:39:36 +00:00
}
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
if (change)
cfg80211: clean up properly on interface type change When the interface type changes while connected, and the driver does not require the interface to be down for a type change, it is currently possible to get very strange results unless the driver takes special care, which it shouldn't have to. To fix this, take care to disconnect/leave IBSS when changing the interface type -- even if the driver may fail the call. Also process all events that may be pending to avoid running into a situation where an event is reported but only processed after the type has already changed, which would lead to missing events and warnings. A side effect of this is that you will have disconnected or left the IBSS even if the mode change ultimately fails, but since the intention was to change it and thus leave or disconnect, this is not a problem. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-21 12:51:05 +00:00
err = cfg80211_change_iface(rdev, dev, ntype, flags, &params);
cfg80211: accept no-op interface mode changes When somebody tries to set the interface mode to the existing mode, don't ask the driver but silently accept the setting. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-21 16:07:59 +00:00
else
err = 0;
cfg80211: show interface type This patch makes cfg80211 show the interface in the nl80211 information about a specific interface. API users are required to keep the type updated (everything else is fairly complicated) but you will get a warning if you fail to keep it updated. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-16 12:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
if (!err && params.use_4addr != -1)
dev->ieee80211_ptr->use_4addr = params.use_4addr;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_new_interface(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
struct vif_params params;
cfg80211: use wireless_dev for interface management In order to be able to create P2P Device wdevs, move the virtual interface management over to wireless_dev structures. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:00:26 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
nl80211: send interface after creation After a new virtual interface is created, reply to userspace with a message detailing it so it knows the new wdev identifier. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:05:37 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
int err;
enum nl80211_iftype type = NL80211_IFTYPE_UNSPECIFIED;
nl80211: Add monitor interface configuration flags This allows precise control over what a monitor interface shows. Signed-off-by: Michael Wu <flamingice@sourmilk.net> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-31 18:48:22 +00:00
u32 flags;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
memset(&params, 0, sizeof(params));
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFNAME])
return -EINVAL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE]) {
type = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE]);
if (type > NL80211_IFTYPE_MAX)
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->add_virtual_intf ||
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
!(rdev->wiphy.interface_modes & (1 << type)))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_4ADDR]) {
nl80211: add a parameter for using 4-address frames on virtual interfaces Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-10 17:53:10 +00:00
params.use_4addr = !!nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_4ADDR]);
cfg80211: disallow bridging managed/adhoc interfaces A number of people have tried to add a wireless interface (in managed mode) to a bridge and then complained that it doesn't work. It cannot work, however, because in 802.11 networks all packets need to be acknowledged and as such need to be sent to the right address. Promiscuous doesn't help here. The wireless address format used for these links has only space for three addresses, the * transmitter, which must be equal to the sender (origin) * receiver (on the wireless medium), which is the AP in the case of managed mode * the recipient (destination), which is on the APs local network segment In an IBSS, it is similar, but the receiver and recipient must match and the third address is used as the BSSID. To avoid such mistakes in the future, disallow adding a wireless interface to a bridge. Felix has recently added a four-address mode to the AP and client side that can be used (after negotiating that it is possible, which must happen out-of-band by setting up both sides) for bridging, so allow that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-18 23:56:30 +00:00
err = nl80211_valid_4addr(rdev, NULL, params.use_4addr, type);
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return err;
cfg80211: introduce capability for 4addr mode It's very likely that not many devices will support four-address mode in station or AP mode so introduce capability bits for both modes, set them in mac80211 and check them when userspace tries to use the mode. Also, keep track of 4addr in cfg80211 (wireless_dev) and not in mac80211 any more. mac80211 can also be improved for the VLAN case by not looking at the 4addr flag but maintaining the station pointer for it correctly. However, keep track of use_4addr for station mode in mac80211 to avoid all the derefs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-19 10:55:19 +00:00
}
nl80211: add a parameter for using 4-address frames on virtual interfaces Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-10 17:53:10 +00:00
nl80211: send interface after creation After a new virtual interface is created, reply to userspace with a message detailing it so it knows the new wdev identifier. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:05:37 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
nl80211: Add monitor interface configuration flags This allows precise control over what a monitor interface shows. Signed-off-by: Michael Wu <flamingice@sourmilk.net> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-01-31 18:48:22 +00:00
err = parse_monitor_flags(type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MONITOR ?
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MNTR_FLAGS] : NULL,
&flags);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
wdev = rdev_add_virtual_intf(rdev,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IFNAME]),
type, err ? NULL : &flags, &params);
nl80211: send interface after creation After a new virtual interface is created, reply to userspace with a message detailing it so it knows the new wdev identifier. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:05:37 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(wdev)) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
cfg80211: use wireless_dev for interface management In order to be able to create P2P Device wdevs, move the virtual interface management over to wireless_dev structures. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:00:26 +00:00
return PTR_ERR(wdev);
nl80211: send interface after creation After a new virtual interface is created, reply to userspace with a message detailing it so it knows the new wdev identifier. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:05:37 +00:00
}
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
switch (type) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID])
break;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
wdev_lock(wdev);
BUILD_BUG_ON(IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN !=
IEEE80211_MAX_MESH_ID_LEN);
wdev->mesh_id_up_len =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]);
memcpy(wdev->ssid, nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]),
wdev->mesh_id_up_len);
wdev_unlock(wdev);
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_DEVICE:
/*
* P2P Device doesn't have a netdev, so doesn't go
* through the netdev notifier and must be added here
*/
mutex_init(&wdev->mtx);
INIT_LIST_HEAD(&wdev->event_list);
spin_lock_init(&wdev->event_lock);
INIT_LIST_HEAD(&wdev->mgmt_registrations);
spin_lock_init(&wdev->mgmt_registrations_lock);
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
wdev->identifier = ++rdev->wdev_id;
list_add_rcu(&wdev->list, &rdev->wdev_list);
rdev->devlist_generation++;
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
break;
default:
break;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_iface(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
nl80211: send interface after creation After a new virtual interface is created, reply to userspace with a message detailing it so it knows the new wdev identifier. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:05:37 +00:00
rdev, wdev) < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_del_interface(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: use wireless_dev for interface management In order to be able to create P2P Device wdevs, move the virtual interface management over to wireless_dev structures. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:00:26 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->del_virtual_intf)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
cfg80211: use wireless_dev for interface management In order to be able to create P2P Device wdevs, move the virtual interface management over to wireless_dev structures. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:00:26 +00:00
/*
* If we remove a wireless device without a netdev then clear
* user_ptr[1] so that nl80211_post_doit won't dereference it
* to check if it needs to do dev_put(). Otherwise it crashes
* since the wdev has been freed, unlike with a netdev where
* we need the dev_put() for the netdev to really be freed.
*/
if (!wdev->netdev)
info->user_ptr[1] = NULL;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_del_virtual_intf(rdev, wdev);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
wireless: Add NoAck per tid support This patch contains the configuration changes in nl80211/cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 13:20:43 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_noack_map(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
u16 noack_map;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_NOACK_MAP])
return -EINVAL;
if (!rdev->ops->set_noack_map)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
noack_map = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_NOACK_MAP]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_set_noack_map(rdev, dev, noack_map);
wireless: Add NoAck per tid support This patch contains the configuration changes in nl80211/cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 13:20:43 +00:00
}
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
struct get_key_cookie {
struct sk_buff *msg;
int error;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
int idx;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
};
static void get_key_callback(void *c, struct key_params *params)
{
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
struct nlattr *key;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
struct get_key_cookie *cookie = c;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((params->key &&
nla_put(cookie->msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_DATA,
params->key_len, params->key)) ||
(params->seq &&
nla_put(cookie->msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ,
params->seq_len, params->seq)) ||
(params->cipher &&
nla_put_u32(cookie->msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_CIPHER,
params->cipher)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
key = nla_nest_start(cookie->msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY);
if (!key)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((params->key &&
nla_put(cookie->msg, NL80211_KEY_DATA,
params->key_len, params->key)) ||
(params->seq &&
nla_put(cookie->msg, NL80211_KEY_SEQ,
params->seq_len, params->seq)) ||
(params->cipher &&
nla_put_u32(cookie->msg, NL80211_KEY_CIPHER,
params->cipher)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u8(cookie->msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX, cookie->idx))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
nla_nest_end(cookie->msg, key);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
cookie->error = 1;
}
static int nl80211_get_key(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
u8 key_idx = 0;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
const u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
bool pairwise;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
struct get_key_cookie cookie = {
.error = 0,
};
void *hdr;
struct sk_buff *msg;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX])
key_idx = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX]);
mac80211: 802.11w - Use BIP (AES-128-CMAC) Add mechanism for managing BIP keys (IGTK) and integrate BIP into the TX/RX paths. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-08 11:32:02 +00:00
if (key_idx > 5)
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
pairwise = !!mac_addr;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE]) {
u32 kt = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE]);
if (kt >= NUM_NL80211_KEYTYPES)
return -EINVAL;
if (kt != NL80211_KEYTYPE_GROUP &&
kt != NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE)
return -EINVAL;
pairwise = kt == NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE;
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->get_key)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_NEW_KEY);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(hdr))
return PTR_ERR(hdr);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
cookie.msg = msg;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
cookie.idx = key_idx;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX, key_idx))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (mac_addr &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, mac_addr))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (pairwise && mac_addr &&
!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_IBSS_RSN))
return -ENOENT;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_get_key(rdev, dev, key_idx, pairwise, mac_addr, &cookie,
get_key_callback);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: Memory leak fixed Potential memory leak via msg pointer in nl80211_get_key() function. Signed-off-by: Niko Jokinen <ext-niko.k.jokinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <luciano.coelho@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-15 08:00:53 +00:00
goto free_msg;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
if (cookie.error)
goto nla_put_failure;
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nla_put_failure:
err = -ENOBUFS;
nl80211: Memory leak fixed Potential memory leak via msg pointer in nl80211_get_key() function. Signed-off-by: Niko Jokinen <ext-niko.k.jokinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <luciano.coelho@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-15 08:00:53 +00:00
free_msg:
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return err;
}
static int nl80211_set_key(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
struct key_parse key;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_key(info, &key);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
if (key.idx < 0)
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
/* only support setting default key */
if (!key.def && !key.defmgmt)
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
wdev_lock(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
mac80211: 802.11w - Use BIP (AES-128-CMAC) Add mechanism for managing BIP keys (IGTK) and integrate BIP into the TX/RX paths. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-08 11:32:02 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (key.def) {
if (!rdev->ops->set_default_key) {
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
err = nl80211_key_allowed(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
if (err)
goto out;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_set_default_key(rdev, dev, key.idx,
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
key.def_uni, key.def_multi);
if (err)
goto out;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
wext: refactor Refactor wext to * split out iwpriv handling * split out iwspy handling * split out procfs support * allow cfg80211 to have wireless extensions compat code w/o CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT After this, drivers need to - select WIRELESS_EXT - for wext support - select WEXT_PRIV - for iwpriv support - select WEXT_SPY - for iwspy support except cfg80211 -- which gets new hooks in wext-core.c and can then get wext handlers without CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT. Wireless extensions procfs support is auto-selected based on PROC_FS and anything that requires the wext core (i.e. WIRELESS_EXT or CFG80211_WEXT). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-09-29 21:27:28 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_CFG80211_WEXT
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->wext.default_key = key.idx;
#endif
} else {
if (key.def_uni || !key.def_multi) {
err = -EINVAL;
goto out;
}
if (!rdev->ops->set_default_mgmt_key) {
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out;
}
err = nl80211_key_allowed(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
if (err)
goto out;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_set_default_mgmt_key(rdev, dev, key.idx);
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
if (err)
goto out;
#ifdef CONFIG_CFG80211_WEXT
dev->ieee80211_ptr->wext.default_mgmt_key = key.idx;
cfg80211: implement wext key handling Move key handling wireless extension ioctls from mac80211 to cfg80211 so that all drivers that implement the cfg80211 operations get wext compatibility. Note that this drops the SIOCGIWENCODE ioctl support for getting IW_ENCODE_RESTRICTED/IW_ENCODE_OPEN. This means that iwconfig will no longer report "Security mode:open" or "Security mode:restricted" for mac80211. However, what we displayed there (the authentication algo used) was actually wrong -- linux/wireless.h states that this setting is meant to differentiate between "Refuse non-encoded packets" and "Accept non-encoded packets". (Combined with "cfg80211: fix a couple of bugs with key ioctls". -- JWL) Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 11:54:58 +00:00
#endif
cfg80211/nl80211: separate unicast/multicast default TX keys Allow userspace to specify that a given key is default only for unicast and/or multicast transmissions. Only WEP keys are for both, WPA/RSN keys set here are GTKs for multicast only. For more future flexibility, allow to specify all combiations. Wireless extensions can only set both so use nl80211; WEP keys (connect keys) must be set as default for both (but 802.1X WEP is still possible). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-09 18:58:59 +00:00
}
out:
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
wdev_unlock(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_new_key(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
struct key_parse key;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
const u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_key(info, &key);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
if (!key.p.key)
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (key.type == -1) {
if (mac_addr)
key.type = NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE;
else
key.type = NL80211_KEYTYPE_GROUP;
}
/* for now */
if (key.type != NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE &&
key.type != NL80211_KEYTYPE_GROUP)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->add_key)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: add cipher capabilities This adds the necessary code and fields to let drivers specify their cipher capabilities and exports them to userspace. Also update mac80211 to export the ciphers it has. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:14:06 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (cfg80211_validate_key_settings(rdev, &key.p, key.idx,
key.type == NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE,
mac_addr))
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
wdev_lock(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
err = nl80211_key_allowed(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
if (!err)
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_add_key(rdev, dev, key.idx,
key.type == NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE,
mac_addr, &key.p);
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
wdev_unlock(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_del_key(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
struct key_parse key;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_key(info, &key);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (key.type == -1) {
if (mac_addr)
key.type = NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE;
else
key.type = NL80211_KEYTYPE_GROUP;
}
/* for now */
if (key.type != NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE &&
key.type != NL80211_KEYTYPE_GROUP)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->del_key)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
wdev_lock(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
err = nl80211_key_allowed(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (key.type == NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE && mac_addr &&
!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_IBSS_RSN))
err = -ENOENT;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
if (!err)
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_del_key(rdev, dev, key.idx,
key.type == NL80211_KEYTYPE_PAIRWISE,
mac_addr);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
wext: refactor Refactor wext to * split out iwpriv handling * split out iwspy handling * split out procfs support * allow cfg80211 to have wireless extensions compat code w/o CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT After this, drivers need to - select WIRELESS_EXT - for wext support - select WEXT_PRIV - for iwpriv support - select WEXT_SPY - for iwspy support except cfg80211 -- which gets new hooks in wext-core.c and can then get wext handlers without CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT. Wireless extensions procfs support is auto-selected based on PROC_FS and anything that requires the wext core (i.e. WIRELESS_EXT or CFG80211_WEXT). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-09-29 21:27:28 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_CFG80211_WEXT
cfg80211: implement wext key handling Move key handling wireless extension ioctls from mac80211 to cfg80211 so that all drivers that implement the cfg80211 operations get wext compatibility. Note that this drops the SIOCGIWENCODE ioctl support for getting IW_ENCODE_RESTRICTED/IW_ENCODE_OPEN. This means that iwconfig will no longer report "Security mode:open" or "Security mode:restricted" for mac80211. However, what we displayed there (the authentication algo used) was actually wrong -- linux/wireless.h states that this setting is meant to differentiate between "Refuse non-encoded packets" and "Accept non-encoded packets". (Combined with "cfg80211: fix a couple of bugs with key ioctls". -- JWL) Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 11:54:58 +00:00
if (!err) {
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
if (key.idx == dev->ieee80211_ptr->wext.default_key)
cfg80211: implement wext key handling Move key handling wireless extension ioctls from mac80211 to cfg80211 so that all drivers that implement the cfg80211 operations get wext compatibility. Note that this drops the SIOCGIWENCODE ioctl support for getting IW_ENCODE_RESTRICTED/IW_ENCODE_OPEN. This means that iwconfig will no longer report "Security mode:open" or "Security mode:restricted" for mac80211. However, what we displayed there (the authentication algo used) was actually wrong -- linux/wireless.h states that this setting is meant to differentiate between "Refuse non-encoded packets" and "Accept non-encoded packets". (Combined with "cfg80211: fix a couple of bugs with key ioctls". -- JWL) Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 11:54:58 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->wext.default_key = -1;
nl80211: introduce new key attributes We will soon want to nest key attributes into some new attribute for configuring static WEP keys at connect() and ibss_join() time, so we need nested attributes for that. However, key attributes right now are 'global'. This patch thus introduces new nested attributes for the key settings and functions for parsing them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 11:29:08 +00:00
else if (key.idx == dev->ieee80211_ptr->wext.default_mgmt_key)
cfg80211: implement wext key handling Move key handling wireless extension ioctls from mac80211 to cfg80211 so that all drivers that implement the cfg80211 operations get wext compatibility. Note that this drops the SIOCGIWENCODE ioctl support for getting IW_ENCODE_RESTRICTED/IW_ENCODE_OPEN. This means that iwconfig will no longer report "Security mode:open" or "Security mode:restricted" for mac80211. However, what we displayed there (the authentication algo used) was actually wrong -- linux/wireless.h states that this setting is meant to differentiate between "Refuse non-encoded packets" and "Accept non-encoded packets". (Combined with "cfg80211: fix a couple of bugs with key ioctls". -- JWL) Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 11:54:58 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->wext.default_mgmt_key = -1;
}
#endif
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
wdev_unlock(dev->ieee80211_ptr);
cfg80211: implement wext key handling Move key handling wireless extension ioctls from mac80211 to cfg80211 so that all drivers that implement the cfg80211 operations get wext compatibility. Note that this drops the SIOCGIWENCODE ioctl support for getting IW_ENCODE_RESTRICTED/IW_ENCODE_OPEN. This means that iwconfig will no longer report "Security mode:open" or "Security mode:restricted" for mac80211. However, what we displayed there (the authentication algo used) was actually wrong -- linux/wireless.h states that this setting is meant to differentiate between "Refuse non-encoded packets" and "Accept non-encoded packets". (Combined with "cfg80211: fix a couple of bugs with key ioctls". -- JWL) Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 11:54:58 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
return err;
}
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
static int nl80211_parse_beacon(struct genl_info *info,
struct cfg80211_beacon_data *bcn)
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
{
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bool haveinfo = false;
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_TAIL]) ||
!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) ||
!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_PROBE_RESP]) ||
!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_ASSOC_RESP]))
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
memset(bcn, 0, sizeof(*bcn));
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_HEAD]) {
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->head = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_HEAD]);
bcn->head_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_HEAD]);
if (!bcn->head_len)
return -EINVAL;
haveinfo = true;
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_TAIL]) {
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->tail = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_TAIL]);
bcn->tail_len =
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_TAIL]);
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
haveinfo = true;
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!haveinfo)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->beacon_ies = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
bcn->beacon_ies_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_PROBE_RESP]) {
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->proberesp_ies =
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_PROBE_RESP]);
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->proberesp_ies_len =
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_PROBE_RESP]);
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_ASSOC_RESP]) {
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->assocresp_ies =
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_ASSOC_RESP]);
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->assocresp_ies_len =
nl80211/cfg80211: Add extra IE configuration to AP mode setup The NL80211_CMD_NEW_BEACON command is, in practice, requesting AP mode operations to be started. Add new attributes to provide extra IEs (e.g., WPS IE, P2P IE) for drivers that build Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames internally (likely in firmware). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-10 20:55:56 +00:00
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE_ASSOC_RESP]);
}
nl80211: Pass probe response data to drivers Pass probe-response data from usermode via beacon parameters. Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-10 09:28:56 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PROBE_RESP]) {
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->probe_resp =
nl80211: Pass probe response data to drivers Pass probe-response data from usermode via beacon parameters. Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-10 09:28:56 +00:00
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PROBE_RESP]);
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
bcn->probe_resp_len =
nl80211: Pass probe response data to drivers Pass probe-response data from usermode via beacon parameters. Signed-off-by: Guy Eilam <guy@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-10 09:28:56 +00:00
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PROBE_RESP]);
}
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
return 0;
}
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
static bool nl80211_get_ap_channel(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct cfg80211_ap_settings *params)
{
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
bool ret = false;
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
list_for_each_entry(wdev, &rdev->wdev_list, list) {
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
continue;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!wdev->preset_chandef.chan)
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
continue;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
params->chandef = wdev->preset_chandef;
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
ret = true;
break;
}
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
return ret;
}
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
static bool nl80211_valid_auth_type(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
enum nl80211_auth_type auth_type,
enum nl80211_commands cmd)
{
if (auth_type > NL80211_AUTHTYPE_MAX)
return false;
switch (cmd) {
case NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE:
if (!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_SAE) &&
auth_type == NL80211_AUTHTYPE_SAE)
return false;
return true;
case NL80211_CMD_CONNECT:
case NL80211_CMD_START_AP:
/* SAE not supported yet */
if (auth_type == NL80211_AUTHTYPE_SAE)
return false;
return true;
default:
return false;
}
}
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
static int nl80211_start_ap(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct cfg80211_ap_settings params;
int err;
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!rdev->ops->start_ap)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (wdev->beacon_interval)
return -EALREADY;
memset(&params, 0, sizeof(params));
/* these are required for START_AP */
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_INTERVAL] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DTIM_PERIOD] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_HEAD])
return -EINVAL;
err = nl80211_parse_beacon(info, &params.beacon);
if (err)
return err;
params.beacon_interval =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_INTERVAL]);
params.dtim_period =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DTIM_PERIOD]);
err = cfg80211_validate_beacon_int(rdev, params.beacon_interval);
if (err)
return err;
/*
* In theory, some of these attributes should be required here
* but since they were not used when the command was originally
* added, keep them optional for old user space programs to let
* them continue to work with drivers that do not need the
* additional information -- drivers must check!
*/
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]) {
params.ssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
params.ssid_len =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
if (params.ssid_len == 0 ||
params.ssid_len > IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN)
return -EINVAL;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HIDDEN_SSID]) {
params.hidden_ssid = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HIDDEN_SSID]);
if (params.hidden_ssid != NL80211_HIDDEN_SSID_NOT_IN_USE &&
params.hidden_ssid != NL80211_HIDDEN_SSID_ZERO_LEN &&
params.hidden_ssid != NL80211_HIDDEN_SSID_ZERO_CONTENTS)
return -EINVAL;
}
params.privacy = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PRIVACY];
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE]) {
params.auth_type = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE]);
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
if (!nl80211_valid_auth_type(rdev, params.auth_type,
NL80211_CMD_START_AP))
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
} else
params.auth_type = NL80211_AUTHTYPE_AUTOMATIC;
err = nl80211_crypto_settings(rdev, info, &params.crypto,
NL80211_MAX_NR_CIPHER_SUITES);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211: Add an attribute to set inactivity timeout in AP mode This patch adds an attribute, NL80211_ATTR_INACTIVITY_TIMEOUT, to set the inactivity timeout which can be used to remove the station in AP mode. This can be passed in NL80211_CMD_START_AP and used by the drivers which have AP MLME in firmware but don't support get_station() properly. To disable inactivity timer in userspace, wpa_s for example, there is a new flag, NL80211_FEATURE_INACTIVITY_TIMER, in nl80211_feature_flags through which drivers can register their capability to use the inactivity timeout to free the stations. Signed-off-by: Vasanthakumar Thiagarajan <vthiagar@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-02 10:20:02 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_INACTIVITY_TIMEOUT]) {
if (!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_INACTIVITY_TIMER))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
params.inactivity_timeout = nla_get_u16(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_INACTIVITY_TIMEOUT]);
}
nl80211: support P2P GO powersave configuration If a driver supports P2P GO powersave, allow it to set the new feature flags for it and allow userspace to configure the parameters for it. This can be done at GO startup and later changed with SET_BSS. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-14 14:17:28 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_CTWINDOW]) {
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EINVAL;
params.p2p_ctwindow =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_CTWINDOW]);
if (params.p2p_ctwindow > 127)
return -EINVAL;
if (params.p2p_ctwindow != 0 &&
!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_P2P_GO_CTWIN))
return -EINVAL;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_OPPPS]) {
u8 tmp;
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EINVAL;
tmp = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_OPPPS]);
if (tmp > 1)
return -EINVAL;
params.p2p_opp_ps = tmp;
if (params.p2p_opp_ps != 0 &&
!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_P2P_GO_OPPPS))
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]) {
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_chandef(rdev, info, &params.chandef);
if (err)
return err;
} else if (wdev->preset_chandef.chan) {
params.chandef = wdev->preset_chandef;
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
} else if (!nl80211_get_ap_channel(rdev, &params))
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_reg_can_beacon(&rdev->wiphy, &params.chandef))
cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function Instead of setting the channel first and then starting the AP, let cfg80211 store the channel and provide it as one of the AP settings. This means that now you have to set the channel before you can start an AP interface, but since hostapd/wpa_supplicant always do that we're OK with this change. Alternatively, it's now possible to give the channel as an attribute to the start-ap nl80211 command, overriding any preset channel. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:18 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: respect iface combinations when starting operation devlist_mtx locking is changed to accomodate changes. Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-29 10:47:08 +00:00
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = cfg80211_can_use_chan(rdev, wdev, params.chandef.chan,
cfg80211: respect iface combinations when starting operation devlist_mtx locking is changed to accomodate changes. Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-29 10:47:08 +00:00
CHAN_MODE_SHARED);
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_start_ap(rdev, dev, &params);
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
if (!err) {
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
wdev->preset_chandef = params.chandef;
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
wdev->beacon_interval = params.beacon_interval;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
wdev->channel = params.chandef.chan;
cfg80211: store the ssid into wirless_dev in AP mode Store the configured ssid in wdev->ssid when starting an AP Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-07 11:52:19 +00:00
wdev->ssid_len = params.ssid_len;
memcpy(wdev->ssid, params.ssid, wdev->ssid_len);
cfg80211: fix regression in multi-vif AP start Commit "cfg80211: provide channel to start_ap function" assumes that the channel is always passed to the NL80211_CMD_START_AP command, however in case of multi-BSSID, hostapd only passes the channel for the first vif. This makes starting beaconing on secondary vifs fail with -EINVAL. Fix this by storing the channel provided to .start_ap in wdev->preset_chan and picking the first AP vif's channel for secondary vifs if not provided. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-19 00:50:57 +00:00
}
cfg80211: restrict AP beacon intervals Multiple virtual AP interfaces can currently try to use different beacon intervals, but that just leads to problems since it won't actually be done that way by drivers. Return an error in this case to make sure it won't be done wrong. Also, ignore attempts to change the DTIM period or beacon interval during the lifetime of the BSS. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-09 16:41:15 +00:00
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
}
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_beacon(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct cfg80211_beacon_data params;
int err;
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!rdev->ops->change_beacon)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!wdev->beacon_interval)
return -EINVAL;
err = nl80211_parse_beacon(info, &params);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_change_beacon(rdev, dev, &params);
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_stop_ap(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
cfg80211: introduce cfg80211_stop_ap This functionality will be reused when interface is going down. Avoids code duplication. Also adds missing wdev locking. Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-29 10:46:56 +00:00
return cfg80211_stop_ap(rdev, dev);
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
}
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy sta_flags_policy[NL80211_STA_FLAG_MAX + 1] = {
[NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_STA_FLAG_SHORT_PREAMBLE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
[NL80211_STA_FLAG_WME] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: Validate MFP flag type when parsing STA flags NL80211_STA_FLAG_MFP was forgotten from sta_flags_policy. The previous version added the flag due to the loop used in parse_station_flags, but the proper behavior would be to allow nla_parse_nested() to go through the policy for all flags. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:55 +00:00
[NL80211_STA_FLAG_MFP] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211/mac80211: let userspace authenticate stations Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:30 +00:00
[NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHENTICATED] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: add TDLS peer flag to policy This was evidently missed in the TDLS patch (07ba55d7). Cc: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 08:29:15 +00:00
[NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
};
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
static int parse_station_flags(struct genl_info *info,
nl80211: fix old station flags compatibility My patch to validate station flags broke compatibility with the old station flags setting where all flags are always set at once since it always set the mask as all possible flags which ended up being rejected later in the station add/modify code. Fix by parsing only the current flags in the old flags attribute -- new applications and new flags should use (and will now require) the new flags attribute where the mask is given by the application. Reported-and-tested-by: Thomas Hilber <ath9k-dev@toh.cx> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-02 12:30:03 +00:00
enum nl80211_iftype iftype,
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
struct station_parameters *params)
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
{
struct nlattr *flags[NL80211_STA_FLAG_MAX + 1];
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
struct nlattr *nla;
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
int flag;
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
/*
* Try parsing the new attribute first so userspace
* can specify both for older kernels.
*/
nla = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_FLAGS2];
if (nla) {
struct nl80211_sta_flag_update *sta_flags;
sta_flags = nla_data(nla);
params->sta_flags_mask = sta_flags->mask;
params->sta_flags_set = sta_flags->set;
if ((params->sta_flags_mask |
params->sta_flags_set) & BIT(__NL80211_STA_FLAG_INVALID))
return -EINVAL;
return 0;
}
/* if present, parse the old attribute */
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
nla = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_FLAGS];
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
if (!nla)
return 0;
if (nla_parse_nested(flags, NL80211_STA_FLAG_MAX,
nla, sta_flags_policy))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: fix old station flags compatibility My patch to validate station flags broke compatibility with the old station flags setting where all flags are always set at once since it always set the mask as all possible flags which ended up being rejected later in the station add/modify code. Fix by parsing only the current flags in the old flags attribute -- new applications and new flags should use (and will now require) the new flags attribute where the mask is given by the application. Reported-and-tested-by: Thomas Hilber <ath9k-dev@toh.cx> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-02 12:30:03 +00:00
/*
* Only allow certain flags for interface types so that
* other attributes are silently ignored. Remember that
* this is backward compatibility code with old userspace
* and shouldn't be hit in other cases anyway.
*/
switch (iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
params->sta_flags_mask = BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_SHORT_PREAMBLE) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_WME) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_MFP);
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
params->sta_flags_mask = BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER);
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
params->sta_flags_mask = BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHENTICATED) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_MFP) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED);
default:
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
nl80211: prevent additions to old station flags API We don't really want/need to maintain the old station flags API any more, so refuse changes to new (not yet defined) flags from the old flags API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-10 18:14:43 +00:00
for (flag = 1; flag <= NL80211_STA_FLAG_MAX; flag++) {
if (flags[flag]) {
nl80211: improve station flags handling It is currently not possible to modify station flags, but that capability would be very useful. This patch introduces a new nl80211 attribute that contains a set/mask for station flags, and updates the internal API (and mac80211) to mirror that. The new attribute is parsed before falling back to the old so that userspace can specify both (if it can) to work on all kernels. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 18:57:56 +00:00
params->sta_flags_set |= (1<<flag);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
nl80211: prevent additions to old station flags API We don't really want/need to maintain the old station flags API any more, so refuse changes to new (not yet defined) flags from the old flags API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-10 18:14:43 +00:00
/* no longer support new API additions in old API */
if (flag > NL80211_STA_FLAG_MAX_OLD_API)
return -EINVAL;
}
}
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
return 0;
}
cfg80211: add a field for the bitrate of the last rx data packet from a station Also fix a typo in the STATION_INFO_TX_BITRATE description Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-02-27 21:08:00 +00:00
static bool nl80211_put_sta_rate(struct sk_buff *msg, struct rate_info *info,
int attr)
{
struct nlattr *rate;
{nl,cfg}80211: support high bitrates Until now, a u16 value was used to represent bitrate value. With VHT bitrates this becomes too small. Introduce a new 32-bit bitrate attribute. nl80211 will report both the new and the old attribute, unless the bitrate doesn't fit into the old u16 attribute in which case only the new one will be reported. User space tools encouraged to prefer the 32-bit attribute, if available (since it won't be available on older kernels.) Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com> [reword commit message and comments a bit] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-05 11:25:49 +00:00
u32 bitrate;
u16 bitrate_compat;
cfg80211: add a field for the bitrate of the last rx data packet from a station Also fix a typo in the STATION_INFO_TX_BITRATE description Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-02-27 21:08:00 +00:00
rate = nla_nest_start(msg, attr);
if (!rate)
nl80211/cfg80211: add VHT MCS support Add support for reporting and calculating VHT MCSes. Note that I'm not completely sure that the bitrate calculations are correct, nor that they can't be simplified. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-09 13:56:41 +00:00
return false;
cfg80211: add a field for the bitrate of the last rx data packet from a station Also fix a typo in the STATION_INFO_TX_BITRATE description Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-02-27 21:08:00 +00:00
/* cfg80211_calculate_bitrate will return 0 for mcs >= 32 */
bitrate = cfg80211_calculate_bitrate(info);
{nl,cfg}80211: support high bitrates Until now, a u16 value was used to represent bitrate value. With VHT bitrates this becomes too small. Introduce a new 32-bit bitrate attribute. nl80211 will report both the new and the old attribute, unless the bitrate doesn't fit into the old u16 attribute in which case only the new one will be reported. User space tools encouraged to prefer the 32-bit attribute, if available (since it won't be available on older kernels.) Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com> [reword commit message and comments a bit] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-05 11:25:49 +00:00
/* report 16-bit bitrate only if we can */
bitrate_compat = bitrate < (1UL << 16) ? bitrate : 0;
nl80211/cfg80211: add VHT MCS support Add support for reporting and calculating VHT MCSes. Note that I'm not completely sure that the bitrate calculations are correct, nor that they can't be simplified. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-09 13:56:41 +00:00
if (bitrate > 0 &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_BITRATE32, bitrate))
return false;
if (bitrate_compat > 0 &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_BITRATE, bitrate_compat))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_MCS) {
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_MCS, info->mcs))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_40_MHZ_WIDTH &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_40_MHZ_WIDTH))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_SHORT_GI &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_SHORT_GI))
return false;
} else if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_VHT_MCS) {
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_VHT_MCS, info->mcs))
return false;
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_VHT_NSS, info->nss))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_40_MHZ_WIDTH &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_40_MHZ_WIDTH))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_80_MHZ_WIDTH &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_80_MHZ_WIDTH))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_80P80_MHZ_WIDTH &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_80P80_MHZ_WIDTH))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_160_MHZ_WIDTH &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_160_MHZ_WIDTH))
return false;
if (info->flags & RATE_INFO_FLAGS_SHORT_GI &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_RATE_INFO_SHORT_GI))
return false;
}
cfg80211: add a field for the bitrate of the last rx data packet from a station Also fix a typo in the STATION_INFO_TX_BITRATE description Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-02-27 21:08:00 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, rate);
return true;
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_station(struct sk_buff *msg, u32 portid, u32 seq,
cfg80211: allow CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC in station_info The station_info struct had demanded dBm signal values, but the cfg80211 wireless extensions implementation was also accepting "unspecified" (i.e. RSSI) unit values while the nl80211 code was completely unaware of them. Resolve this by formally allowing the "unspecified" units while making nl80211 ignore them. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2012-03-15 17:25:41 +00:00
int flags,
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *dev,
mac80211/cfg80211: add station events When, for instance, a new IBSS peer is found, userspace wants to be notified. Add events for all new stations that mac80211 learns about. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:44 +00:00
const u8 *mac_addr, struct station_info *sinfo)
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
{
void *hdr;
nl80211: Add BSS parameters to station This allows user-space monitoring of BSS parameters for the associated station. This is useful for debugging and verifying that the paramaters are as expected. [Exactly the same as before but bundled into a single message] Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-31 16:25:41 +00:00
struct nlattr *sinfoattr, *bss_param;
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags, NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION);
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
if (!hdr)
return -1;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, mac_addr) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_GENERATION, sinfo->generation))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
sinfoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_STA_INFO);
if (!sinfoattr)
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_CONNECTED_TIME) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_CONNECTED_TIME,
sinfo->connected_time))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_INACTIVE_TIME) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_INACTIVE_TIME,
sinfo->inactive_time))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_RX_BYTES) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_RX_BYTES,
sinfo->rx_bytes))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_TX_BYTES) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_TX_BYTES,
sinfo->tx_bytes))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_LLID) &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_LLID, sinfo->llid))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_PLID) &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_PLID, sinfo->plid))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_PLINK_STATE) &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_PLINK_STATE,
sinfo->plink_state))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC in station_info The station_info struct had demanded dBm signal values, but the cfg80211 wireless extensions implementation was also accepting "unspecified" (i.e. RSSI) unit values while the nl80211 code was completely unaware of them. Resolve this by formally allowing the "unspecified" units while making nl80211 ignore them. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2012-03-15 17:25:41 +00:00
switch (rdev->wiphy.signal_type) {
case CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_MBM:
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_SIGNAL) &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_SIGNAL,
sinfo->signal))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_SIGNAL_AVG) &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_SIGNAL_AVG,
sinfo->signal_avg))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC in station_info The station_info struct had demanded dBm signal values, but the cfg80211 wireless extensions implementation was also accepting "unspecified" (i.e. RSSI) unit values while the nl80211 code was completely unaware of them. Resolve this by formally allowing the "unspecified" units while making nl80211 ignore them. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2012-03-15 17:25:41 +00:00
break;
default:
break;
}
nl80211: Add signal strength and bandwith to nl80211station info This patch adds signal strength and transmission bitrate to the station_info of nl80211. Signed-off-by: Henning Rogge <rogge@fgan.de> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-12-11 21:04:19 +00:00
if (sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_TX_BITRATE) {
cfg80211: add a field for the bitrate of the last rx data packet from a station Also fix a typo in the STATION_INFO_TX_BITRATE description Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-02-27 21:08:00 +00:00
if (!nl80211_put_sta_rate(msg, &sinfo->txrate,
NL80211_STA_INFO_TX_BITRATE))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
if (sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_RX_BITRATE) {
if (!nl80211_put_sta_rate(msg, &sinfo->rxrate,
NL80211_STA_INFO_RX_BITRATE))
nl80211: Add signal strength and bandwith to nl80211station info This patch adds signal strength and transmission bitrate to the station_info of nl80211. Signed-off-by: Henning Rogge <rogge@fgan.de> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-12-11 21:04:19 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_RX_PACKETS) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_RX_PACKETS,
sinfo->rx_packets))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_TX_PACKETS) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_TX_PACKETS,
sinfo->tx_packets))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_TX_RETRIES) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_TX_RETRIES,
sinfo->tx_retries))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_TX_FAILED) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_TX_FAILED,
sinfo->tx_failed))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_BEACON_LOSS_COUNT) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_BEACON_LOSS,
sinfo->beacon_loss_count))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Add BSS parameters to station This allows user-space monitoring of BSS parameters for the associated station. This is useful for debugging and verifying that the paramaters are as expected. [Exactly the same as before but bundled into a single message] Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-31 16:25:41 +00:00
if (sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_BSS_PARAM) {
bss_param = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_BSS_PARAM);
if (!bss_param)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (((sinfo->bss_param.flags & BSS_PARAM_FLAGS_CTS_PROT) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_STA_BSS_PARAM_CTS_PROT)) ||
((sinfo->bss_param.flags & BSS_PARAM_FLAGS_SHORT_PREAMBLE) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_STA_BSS_PARAM_SHORT_PREAMBLE)) ||
((sinfo->bss_param.flags & BSS_PARAM_FLAGS_SHORT_SLOT_TIME) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_STA_BSS_PARAM_SHORT_SLOT_TIME)) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_STA_BSS_PARAM_DTIM_PERIOD,
sinfo->bss_param.dtim_period) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_STA_BSS_PARAM_BEACON_INTERVAL,
sinfo->bss_param.beacon_interval))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Add BSS parameters to station This allows user-space monitoring of BSS parameters for the associated station. This is useful for debugging and verifying that the paramaters are as expected. [Exactly the same as before but bundled into a single message] Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-31 16:25:41 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, bss_param);
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_STA_FLAGS) &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_STA_FLAGS,
sizeof(struct nl80211_sta_flag_update),
&sinfo->sta_flags))
goto nla_put_failure;
Merge branch 'master' into for-davem Conflicts: drivers/net/wireless/iwlwifi/iwl-testmode.c net/wireless/nl80211.c
2012-04-12 18:25:14 +00:00
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_T_OFFSET) &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_STA_INFO_T_OFFSET,
sinfo->t_offset))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, sinfoattr);
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((sinfo->filled & STATION_INFO_ASSOC_REQ_IES) &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IE, sinfo->assoc_req_ies_len,
sinfo->assoc_req_ies))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: Send AssocReq IEs to user space in AP mode When user space SME/MLME (e.g., hostapd) is not used in AP mode, the IEs from the (Re)Association Request frame that was processed in firmware need to be made available for user space (e.g., RSN IE for hostapd). Allow this to be done with cfg80211_new_sta(). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-08 09:11:52 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
netlink: Improve returned error codes Make nlmsg_trim(), nlmsg_cancel(), genlmsg_cancel(), and nla_nest_cancel() void functions. Return -EMSGSIZE instead of -1 if the provided message buffer is not big enough. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-06-03 23:36:54 +00:00
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
}
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
static int nl80211_dump_station(struct sk_buff *skb,
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
struct netlink_callback *cb)
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
{
struct station_info sinfo;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
u8 mac_addr[ETH_ALEN];
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
int sta_idx = cb->args[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
err = nl80211_prepare_netdev_dump(skb, cb, &dev, &netdev);
if (err)
return err;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (!dev->ops->dump_station) {
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
goto out_err;
}
while (1) {
nl80211/cfg80211: Make addition of new sinfo fields safer Add a comment pointing out the use of enum station_info_flags for all new struct station_info fields. In addition, memset the sinfo buffer to zero before use on all paths in the current tree to avoid leaving uninitialized pointers in the data. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-11 08:46:22 +00:00
memset(&sinfo, 0, sizeof(sinfo));
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_dump_station(dev, netdev, sta_idx,
mac_addr, &sinfo);
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (err == -ENOENT)
break;
if (err)
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
goto out_err;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_station(skb,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid,
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
cfg80211: allow CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC in station_info The station_info struct had demanded dBm signal values, but the cfg80211 wireless extensions implementation was also accepting "unspecified" (i.e. RSSI) unit values while the nl80211 code was completely unaware of them. Resolve this by formally allowing the "unspecified" units while making nl80211 ignore them. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2012-03-15 17:25:41 +00:00
dev, netdev, mac_addr,
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
&sinfo) < 0)
goto out;
sta_idx++;
}
out:
cb->args[1] = sta_idx;
err = skb->len;
out_err:
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
nl80211_finish_netdev_dump(dev);
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
return err;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
static int nl80211_get_station(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
struct station_info sinfo;
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg;
u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
int err;
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
memset(&sinfo, 0, sizeof(sinfo));
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->get_station)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_get_station(rdev, dev, mac_addr, &sinfo);
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return err;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
if (!msg)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -ENOMEM;
cfg80211/nl80211: implement station attribute retrieval After a station is added to the kernel's structures, userspace has to be able to retrieve statistics about that station, especially whether the station was idle and how much bytes were transferred to and from it. This adds the necessary code to nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:36 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_station(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
cfg80211: allow CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC in station_info The station_info struct had demanded dBm signal values, but the cfg80211 wireless extensions implementation was also accepting "unspecified" (i.e. RSSI) unit values while the nl80211 code was completely unaware of them. Resolve this by formally allowing the "unspecified" units while making nl80211 ignore them. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2012-03-15 17:25:41 +00:00
rdev, dev, mac_addr, &sinfo) < 0) {
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
}
/*
nl80211: only allow adding stations to running vlan interfaces Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 16:23:31 +00:00
* Get vlan interface making sure it is running and on the right wiphy.
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
*/
nl80211: make get_vlan logic more common get_vlan() sets the output parameter even if it returns an error, which is a bit odd. Instead, convert it to use ERR_PTR. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 15:23:01 +00:00
static struct net_device *get_vlan(struct genl_info *info,
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev)
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
{
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
struct nlattr *vlanattr = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_VLAN];
nl80211: make get_vlan logic more common get_vlan() sets the output parameter even if it returns an error, which is a bit odd. Instead, convert it to use ERR_PTR. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 15:23:01 +00:00
struct net_device *v;
int ret;
if (!vlanattr)
return NULL;
v = dev_get_by_index(genl_info_net(info), nla_get_u32(vlanattr));
if (!v)
return ERR_PTR(-ENODEV);
if (!v->ieee80211_ptr || v->ieee80211_ptr->wiphy != &rdev->wiphy) {
ret = -EINVAL;
goto error;
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
}
nl80211: make get_vlan logic more common get_vlan() sets the output parameter even if it returns an error, which is a bit odd. Instead, convert it to use ERR_PTR. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 15:23:01 +00:00
if (!netif_running(v)) {
ret = -ENETDOWN;
goto error;
}
return v;
error:
dev_put(v);
return ERR_PTR(ret);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_set_station(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
struct station_parameters params;
u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
memset(&params, 0, sizeof(params));
params.listen_interval = -1;
nl80211: Move peer link state definition to nl80211 These definitions need to be exposed now that we can set the peer link states via NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_STATE. They were already being (opaquely) reported by NL80211_STA_INFO_PLINK_STATE. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-13 17:45:43 +00:00
params.plink_state = -1;
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_AID])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES]) {
params.supported_rates =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES]);
params.supported_rates_len =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES]);
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_LISTEN_INTERVAL])
params.listen_interval =
nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_LISTEN_INTERVAL]);
mac80211/cfg80211: HT capabilities for NEW_STA Allow userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set HT capabilities for associated STAs. This is based on a patch from Zhu Yi <yi.zhu@intel.com> (only the NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY for NEW_STA part is included here). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-25 08:58:58 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY])
params.ht_capa =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY]);
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->change_station)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: fix old station flags compatibility My patch to validate station flags broke compatibility with the old station flags setting where all flags are always set at once since it always set the mask as all possible flags which ended up being rejected later in the station add/modify code. Fix by parsing only the current flags in the old flags attribute -- new applications and new flags should use (and will now require) the new flags attribute where the mask is given by the application. Reported-and-tested-by: Thomas Hilber <ath9k-dev@toh.cx> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-02 12:30:03 +00:00
if (parse_station_flags(info, dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype, &params))
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_ACTION])
params.plink_action =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_ACTION]);
nl80211: Let userspace drive the peer link management states. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-03 23:57:11 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_STATE])
params.plink_state =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_STATE]);
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
switch (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
/* disallow mesh-specific things */
if (params.plink_action)
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
/* TDLS can't be set, ... */
if (params.sta_flags_set & BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER))
return -EINVAL;
/*
* ... but don't bother the driver with it. This works around
* a hostapd/wpa_supplicant issue -- it always includes the
* TLDS_PEER flag in the mask even for AP mode.
*/
params.sta_flags_mask &= ~BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER);
/* accept only the listed bits */
if (params.sta_flags_mask &
~(BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_SHORT_PREAMBLE) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_WME) |
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_MFP)))
return -EINVAL;
/* must be last in here for error handling */
params.vlan = get_vlan(info, rdev);
if (IS_ERR(params.vlan))
return PTR_ERR(params.vlan);
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
break;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
/*
* Don't allow userspace to change the TDLS_PEER flag,
* but silently ignore attempts to change it since we
* don't have state here to verify that it doesn't try
* to change the flag.
*/
params.sta_flags_mask &= ~BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER);
cfg80211/mac80211: userspace peer authorization in IBSS If the IBSS network is RSN-protected, let userspace authorize the stations instead of adding them as AUTHORIZED by default. Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-31 19:25:47 +00:00
/* fall through */
case NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC:
/* disallow things sta doesn't support */
if (params.plink_action)
return -EINVAL;
if (params.ht_capa)
return -EINVAL;
if (params.listen_interval >= 0)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
/* reject any changes other than AUTHORIZED */
if (params.sta_flags_mask & ~BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED))
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
/* disallow things mesh doesn't support */
if (params.vlan)
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
if (params.ht_capa)
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
if (params.listen_interval >= 0)
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
/*
* No special handling for TDLS here -- the userspace
* mesh code doesn't have this bug.
*/
nl80211/mac80211: let userspace authenticate stations Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:30 +00:00
if (params.sta_flags_mask &
~(BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHENTICATED) |
nl80211: allow setting MFP flag for a meshif Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-03 23:57:13 +00:00
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_MFP) |
nl80211/mac80211: let userspace authenticate stations Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:30 +00:00
BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_AUTHORIZED)))
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate station settings When I disallowed interfering with stations on non-AP interfaces, I not only forget mesh but also managed interfaces which need this for the authorized flag. Let's actually validate everything properly. This fixes an nl80211 regression introduced by the interfering, under which wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211 could not properly connect. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-18 15:23:43 +00:00
break;
default:
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: disallow interfering with stations on non-AP (part 2) On non-AP interfaces userspace has no business interfering with the station management, this can confuse mac80211 (and other drivers probably wouldn't support it anyway). Allow adding and removing stations only on AP interfaces. (Reconcile this w/ previous version of patch posted with same subject... -- JWL) Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-27 08:35:29 +00:00
}
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
/* be aware of params.vlan when changing code here */
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_change_station(rdev, dev, mac_addr, &params);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
if (params.vlan)
dev_put(params.vlan);
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
return err;
}
nl80211/cfg80211: add STA WME parameters Add new NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME nested attribute that contains wme params needed by the low-level driver (uapsd_queues and max_sp). Add these params to the station_parameters struct as well. Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-23 11:37:46 +00:00
static struct nla_policy
nl80211_sta_wme_policy[NL80211_STA_WME_MAX + 1] __read_mostly = {
[NL80211_STA_WME_UAPSD_QUEUES] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_STA_WME_MAX_SP] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
};
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
static int nl80211_new_station(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
struct station_parameters params;
u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
memset(&params, 0, sizeof(params));
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_LISTEN_INTERVAL])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: does not allow NEW_STATION and DEL_STATION for mesh As discussed in linux-wireless mailing list, adding and removing stations for mesh topologies is not necessary. Since doing it triggers bugs, the sugestion was to simply disable it. Tested using a custom iw command "station new". Works only after using hostapd. "station del" command also works. Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Simon Raffeiner <sturmflut@lieberbiber.de> Cc: Andrey Yurovsky <andrey@cozybit.com> Cc: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-12 14:34:50 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_AID])
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
params.supported_rates =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES]);
params.supported_rates_len =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_SUPPORTED_RATES]);
params.listen_interval =
nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_LISTEN_INTERVAL]);
cfg80211: validate AID of stations being added We have some validation code in mac80211 but said code will force an invalid AID to 0 which isn't a valid AID either; instead require a valid AID (1-2007) to be passed in from userspace in cfg80211 already. Also move the code before the race comment since it can only be executed during STA addition and thus is not racy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:42:30 +00:00
nl80211: does not allow NEW_STATION and DEL_STATION for mesh As discussed in linux-wireless mailing list, adding and removing stations for mesh topologies is not necessary. Since doing it triggers bugs, the sugestion was to simply disable it. Tested using a custom iw command "station new". Works only after using hostapd. "station del" command also works. Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Simon Raffeiner <sturmflut@lieberbiber.de> Cc: Andrey Yurovsky <andrey@cozybit.com> Cc: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-12 14:34:50 +00:00
params.aid = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_AID]);
if (!params.aid || params.aid > IEEE80211_MAX_AID)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate AID of stations being added We have some validation code in mac80211 but said code will force an invalid AID to 0 which isn't a valid AID either; instead require a valid AID (1-2007) to be passed in from userspace in cfg80211 already. Also move the code before the race comment since it can only be executed during STA addition and thus is not racy. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:42:30 +00:00
mac80211/cfg80211: HT capabilities for NEW_STA Allow userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set HT capabilities for associated STAs. This is based on a patch from Zhu Yi <yi.zhu@intel.com> (only the NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY for NEW_STA part is included here). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-25 08:58:58 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY])
params.ht_capa =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY]);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
{nl,cfg}80211: Peer STA VHT caps To save STAs VHT caps in AP mode Signed-off-by: Mahesh Palivela <maheshp@posedge.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-11 08:04:52 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_VHT_CAPABILITY])
params.vht_capa =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_VHT_CAPABILITY]);
nl80211/mac80211: Perform PLINK_ACTION on new station Modify the NEW_STATION command to accept PLINK_ACTIONS, in case userspace wants to create stations and initiate a peer link right away (for authenticated stations) or create a blocked station (for debugging). Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:33 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_ACTION])
params.plink_action =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_PLINK_ACTION]);
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->add_station)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: fix old station flags compatibility My patch to validate station flags broke compatibility with the old station flags setting where all flags are always set at once since it always set the mask as all possible flags which ended up being rejected later in the station add/modify code. Fix by parsing only the current flags in the old flags attribute -- new applications and new flags should use (and will now require) the new flags attribute where the mask is given by the application. Reported-and-tested-by: Thomas Hilber <ath9k-dev@toh.cx> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-02 12:30:03 +00:00
if (parse_station_flags(info, dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype, &params))
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
switch (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
/* parse WME attributes if sta is WME capable */
if ((rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_AP_UAPSD) &&
(params.sta_flags_set & BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_WME)) &&
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME]) {
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_STA_WME_MAX + 1];
struct nlattr *nla;
nla = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME];
err = nla_parse_nested(tb, NL80211_STA_WME_MAX, nla,
nl80211_sta_wme_policy);
if (err)
return err;
if (tb[NL80211_STA_WME_UAPSD_QUEUES])
params.uapsd_queues =
nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_STA_WME_UAPSD_QUEUES]);
if (params.uapsd_queues &
~IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_MASK)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: add STA WME parameters Add new NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME nested attribute that contains wme params needed by the low-level driver (uapsd_queues and max_sp). Add these params to the station_parameters struct as well. Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-23 11:37:46 +00:00
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_STA_WME_MAX_SP])
params.max_sp =
nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_STA_WME_MAX_SP]);
nl80211/cfg80211: add STA WME parameters Add new NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME nested attribute that contains wme params needed by the low-level driver (uapsd_queues and max_sp). Add these params to the station_parameters struct as well. Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-23 11:37:46 +00:00
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
if (params.max_sp &
~IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_MASK)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: verify format of uAPSD information The format is intended to be like the subfields in the QoS Info field, verify that is the case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-07 09:50:48 +00:00
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
params.sta_modify_mask |= STATION_PARAM_APPLY_UAPSD;
}
/* TDLS peers cannot be added */
if (params.sta_flags_set & BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER))
cfg80211: verify format of uAPSD information The format is intended to be like the subfields in the QoS Info field, verify that is the case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-07 09:50:48 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
/* but don't bother the driver with it */
params.sta_flags_mask &= ~BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER);
cfg80211/mac80211: apply station uAPSD parameters selectively Currently, when hostapd sets the station as authorized we also overwrite its uAPSD parameter. This obviously leads to buggy behaviour (later, with my patches that actually add uAPSD support). To fix this, only apply those parameters if they were actually set in nl80211, and to achieve that add a bitmap of things to apply. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-27 18:56:12 +00:00
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
/* must be last in here for error handling */
params.vlan = get_vlan(info, rdev);
if (IS_ERR(params.vlan))
return PTR_ERR(params.vlan);
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
/* TDLS peers cannot be added */
if (params.sta_flags_set & BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER))
return -EINVAL;
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
/* Only TDLS peers can be added */
if (!(params.sta_flags_set & BIT(NL80211_STA_FLAG_TDLS_PEER)))
return -EINVAL;
/* Can only add if TDLS ... */
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_TDLS))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
/* ... with external setup is supported */
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_TDLS_EXTERNAL_SETUP))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
break;
default:
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211/cfg80211: add STA WME parameters Add new NL80211_ATTR_STA_WME nested attribute that contains wme params needed by the low-level driver (uapsd_queues and max_sp). Add these params to the station_parameters struct as well. Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-23 11:37:46 +00:00
}
cfg80211: validate nl80211 station handling better The nl80211 station handling code is a bit messy and doesn't do a lot of validation. It seems like this could be an issue for drivers that don't use mac80211 to validate everything. As cfg80211 doesn't keep station state, move the validation of allowing supported_rates to change for TDLS only in station mode to mac80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-14 11:20:27 +00:00
/* be aware of params.vlan when changing code here */
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_add_station(rdev, dev, mac_addr, &params);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
if (params.vlan)
dev_put(params.vlan);
return err;
}
static int nl80211_del_station(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
u8 *mac_addr = NULL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
mac_addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211: disallow interfering with stations on non-AP On non-AP interfaces userspace has no business interfering with the station management, this can confuse mac80211 (and other drivers probably wouldn't support it anyway). Allow adding and removing stations only on AP interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-11 12:43:13 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
nl80211: reenable station del for mesh iw dev <devname> station del <MAC address> is quiet useful in mesh mode and should be possible. Signed-off-by: Marco Porsch <marco.porsch@siemens.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-30 08:00:16 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN &&
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->del_station)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_del_station(rdev, dev, mac_addr);
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_mpath(struct sk_buff *msg, u32 portid, u32 seq,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
int flags, struct net_device *dev,
u8 *dst, u8 *next_hop,
struct mpath_info *pinfo)
{
void *hdr;
struct nlattr *pinfoattr;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags, NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
if (!hdr)
return -1;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, dst) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_NEXT_HOP, ETH_ALEN, next_hop) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_GENERATION, pinfo->generation))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: add generation number to all dumps In order for userspace to be able to figure out whether it obtained a consistent snapshot of data or not when using netlink dumps, we need to have a generation number in each dump message that indicates whether the list has changed or not -- its value is arbitrary. This patch adds such a number to all dumps, this needs some mac80211 involvement to keep track of a generation number to start with when adding/removing mesh paths or stations. The wiphy and netdev lists can be fully handled within cfg80211, of course, but generation numbers need to be stored there as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 14:17:38 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
pinfoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_INFO);
if (!pinfoattr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_FRAME_QLEN) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_FRAME_QLEN,
pinfo->frame_qlen))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_SN) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_SN, pinfo->sn)) ||
((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_METRIC) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_METRIC,
pinfo->metric)) ||
((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_EXPTIME) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_EXPTIME,
pinfo->exptime)) ||
((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_FLAGS) &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_FLAGS,
pinfo->flags)) ||
((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_DISCOVERY_TIMEOUT) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_DISCOVERY_TIMEOUT,
pinfo->discovery_timeout)) ||
((pinfo->filled & MPATH_INFO_DISCOVERY_RETRIES) &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MPATH_INFO_DISCOVERY_RETRIES,
pinfo->discovery_retries)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, pinfoattr);
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
netlink: Improve returned error codes Make nlmsg_trim(), nlmsg_cancel(), genlmsg_cancel(), and nla_nest_cancel() void functions. Return -EMSGSIZE instead of -1 if the provided message buffer is not big enough. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-06-03 23:36:54 +00:00
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_dump_mpath(struct sk_buff *skb,
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
struct netlink_callback *cb)
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
{
struct mpath_info pinfo;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
u8 dst[ETH_ALEN];
u8 next_hop[ETH_ALEN];
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
int path_idx = cb->args[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
err = nl80211_prepare_netdev_dump(skb, cb, &dev, &netdev);
if (err)
return err;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (!dev->ops->dump_mpath) {
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
goto out_err;
}
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
if (netdev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT) {
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: jump to out_err upon unsupported iftype Jump to out_err when the iftype is not supported. Signed-off-by: Roel Kluin <roel.kluin@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-22 19:15:49 +00:00
goto out_err;
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
}
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
while (1) {
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_dump_mpath(dev, netdev, path_idx, dst, next_hop,
&pinfo);
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (err == -ENOENT)
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
break;
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
goto out_err;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_mpath(skb, NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid,
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
netdev, dst, next_hop,
&pinfo) < 0)
goto out;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
path_idx++;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
out:
cb->args[1] = path_idx;
err = skb->len;
out_err:
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
nl80211_finish_netdev_dump(dev);
nl80211: fix dump callbacks Julius Volz pointed out that the dump callbacks in nl80211 were broken and fixed one of them. This patch fixes the other three and also addresses the TODOs there. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Julius Volz <juliusv@google.com> Cc: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-07-29 11:22:51 +00:00
return err;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_get_mpath(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
struct mpath_info pinfo;
struct sk_buff *msg;
u8 *dst = NULL;
u8 next_hop[ETH_ALEN];
memset(&pinfo, 0, sizeof(pinfo));
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
dst = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->get_mpath)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_get_mpath(rdev, dev, dst, next_hop, &pinfo);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return err;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
if (!msg)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -ENOMEM;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_mpath(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev, dst, next_hop, &pinfo) < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_set_mpath(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
u8 *dst = NULL;
u8 *next_hop = NULL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_NEXT_HOP])
return -EINVAL;
dst = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
next_hop = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_NEXT_HOP]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->change_mpath)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check that netif_runnin is true in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this or to be prepared to handle these commands when the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:18 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_change_mpath(rdev, dev, dst, next_hop);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
static int nl80211_new_mpath(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
u8 *dst = NULL;
u8 *next_hop = NULL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_NEXT_HOP])
return -EINVAL;
dst = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
next_hop = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MPATH_NEXT_HOP]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->add_mpath)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check that netif_runnin is true in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this or to be prepared to handle these commands when the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:18 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_add_mpath(rdev, dev, dst, next_hop);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_del_mpath(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
u8 *dst = NULL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
dst = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->del_mpath)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_del_mpath(rdev, dev, dst);
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
}
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_bss(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
struct bss_parameters params;
memset(&params, 0, sizeof(params));
/* default to not changing parameters */
params.use_cts_prot = -1;
params.use_short_preamble = -1;
params.use_short_slot_time = -1;
cfg80211: add ap isolation support This is used to configure APs to not bridge traffic between connected stations. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-26 23:23:35 +00:00
params.ap_isolate = -1;
cfg80211: Add new BSS attribute ht_opmode Add a new BSS attribute to allow hostapd to set the current HT opmode. Otherwise drivers won't be able to set up protection for HT rates in AP mode. Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-19 11:40:25 +00:00
params.ht_opmode = -1;
nl80211: support P2P GO powersave configuration If a driver supports P2P GO powersave, allow it to set the new feature flags for it and allow userspace to configure the parameters for it. This can be done at GO startup and later changed with SET_BSS. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-14 14:17:28 +00:00
params.p2p_ctwindow = -1;
params.p2p_opp_ps = -1;
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_CTS_PROT])
params.use_cts_prot =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_CTS_PROT]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_SHORT_PREAMBLE])
params.use_short_preamble =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_SHORT_PREAMBLE]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_SHORT_SLOT_TIME])
params.use_short_slot_time =
nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_SHORT_SLOT_TIME]);
nl80211: Add basic rate configuration for AP mode Add a new attribute, NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES, that can be used with NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS for userspace (e.g., hostapd) to set which rates are in the basic rate set. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-30 14:59:22 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES]) {
params.basic_rates =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES]);
params.basic_rates_len =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES]);
}
cfg80211: add ap isolation support This is used to configure APs to not bridge traffic between connected stations. Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-26 23:23:35 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AP_ISOLATE])
params.ap_isolate = !!nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AP_ISOLATE]);
cfg80211: Add new BSS attribute ht_opmode Add a new BSS attribute to allow hostapd to set the current HT opmode. Otherwise drivers won't be able to set up protection for HT rates in AP mode. Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-19 11:40:25 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_HT_OPMODE])
params.ht_opmode =
nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_HT_OPMODE]);
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
nl80211: support P2P GO powersave configuration If a driver supports P2P GO powersave, allow it to set the new feature flags for it and allow userspace to configure the parameters for it. This can be done at GO startup and later changed with SET_BSS. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-14 14:17:28 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_CTWINDOW]) {
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EINVAL;
params.p2p_ctwindow =
nla_get_s8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_CTWINDOW]);
if (params.p2p_ctwindow < 0)
return -EINVAL;
if (params.p2p_ctwindow != 0 &&
!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_P2P_GO_CTWIN))
return -EINVAL;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_OPPPS]) {
u8 tmp;
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EINVAL;
tmp = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_P2P_OPPPS]);
if (tmp > 1)
return -EINVAL;
params.p2p_opp_ps = tmp;
if (params.p2p_opp_ps &&
!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_P2P_GO_OPPPS))
return -EINVAL;
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->change_bss)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_change_bss(rdev, dev, &params);
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
}
const: struct nla_policy Make remaining netlink policies as const. Fixup coding style where needed. Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan <adobriyan@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2010-02-18 08:14:31 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy reg_rule_policy[NL80211_REG_RULE_ATTR_MAX + 1] = {
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULE_FLAGS] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_START] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_END] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_MAX_BW] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_ANT_GAIN] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_EIRP] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
};
static int parse_reg_rule(struct nlattr *tb[],
struct ieee80211_reg_rule *reg_rule)
{
struct ieee80211_freq_range *freq_range = &reg_rule->freq_range;
struct ieee80211_power_rule *power_rule = &reg_rule->power_rule;
if (!tb[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULE_FLAGS])
return -EINVAL;
if (!tb[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_START])
return -EINVAL;
if (!tb[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_END])
return -EINVAL;
if (!tb[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_MAX_BW])
return -EINVAL;
if (!tb[NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_EIRP])
return -EINVAL;
reg_rule->flags = nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULE_FLAGS]);
freq_range->start_freq_khz =
nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_START]);
freq_range->end_freq_khz =
nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_END]);
freq_range->max_bandwidth_khz =
nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_MAX_BW]);
power_rule->max_eirp =
nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_EIRP]);
if (tb[NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_ANT_GAIN])
power_rule->max_antenna_gain =
nla_get_u32(tb[NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_ANT_GAIN]);
return 0;
}
static int nl80211_req_set_reg(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
int r;
char *data = NULL;
cfg80211: add cellular base station regulatory hint support Cellular base stations can provide hints to cfg80211 about where they think we are. This can be done for example on a cell phone. To enable these hints we simply allow them through as user regulatory hints but we allow userspace to clasify the hint as either coming directly from the user or coming from a cellular base station. This option is only available when you enable CONFIG_CFG80211_CERTIFICATION_ONUS. The base station hints themselves will not be processed by the core unless at least one device on the system supports this feature. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 18:49:18 +00:00
enum nl80211_user_reg_hint_type user_reg_hint_type;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
nl80211: disallow user requests prior to regulatory_init() If cfg80211 is built into the kernel there is perhaps a small time window betwen nl80211_init() and regulatory_init() where cfg80211_regdomain hasn't yet been initialized to let the wireless core do its work. During that rare case and time frame (if its even possible) we don't allow user regulatory changes as cfg80211 is working on enabling its first regulatory domain. To check for cfg80211_regdomain we now contend the entire operation using the cfg80211_mutex. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:22 +00:00
/*
* You should only get this when cfg80211 hasn't yet initialized
* completely when built-in to the kernel right between the time
* window between nl80211_init() and regulatory_init(), if that is
* even possible.
*/
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
if (unlikely(!cfg80211_regdomain)) {
cfg80211: move all regulatory hints to workqueue All regulatory hints (core, driver, userspace and 11d) are now processed in a workqueue. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:30 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
return -EINPROGRESS;
nl80211: disallow user requests prior to regulatory_init() If cfg80211 is built into the kernel there is perhaps a small time window betwen nl80211_init() and regulatory_init() where cfg80211_regdomain hasn't yet been initialized to let the wireless core do its work. During that rare case and time frame (if its even possible) we don't allow user regulatory changes as cfg80211 is working on enabling its first regulatory domain. To check for cfg80211_regdomain we now contend the entire operation using the cfg80211_mutex. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:22 +00:00
}
cfg80211: move all regulatory hints to workqueue All regulatory hints (core, driver, userspace and 11d) are now processed in a workqueue. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:30 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: disallow user requests prior to regulatory_init() If cfg80211 is built into the kernel there is perhaps a small time window betwen nl80211_init() and regulatory_init() where cfg80211_regdomain hasn't yet been initialized to let the wireless core do its work. During that rare case and time frame (if its even possible) we don't allow user regulatory changes as cfg80211 is working on enabling its first regulatory domain. To check for cfg80211_regdomain we now contend the entire operation using the cfg80211_mutex. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:22 +00:00
cfg80211: move all regulatory hints to workqueue All regulatory hints (core, driver, userspace and 11d) are now processed in a workqueue. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:30 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2])
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
data = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2]);
cfg80211: add cellular base station regulatory hint support Cellular base stations can provide hints to cfg80211 about where they think we are. This can be done for example on a cell phone. To enable these hints we simply allow them through as user regulatory hints but we allow userspace to clasify the hint as either coming directly from the user or coming from a cellular base station. This option is only available when you enable CONFIG_CFG80211_CERTIFICATION_ONUS. The base station hints themselves will not be processed by the core unless at least one device on the system supports this feature. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 18:49:18 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_USER_REG_HINT_TYPE])
user_reg_hint_type =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_USER_REG_HINT_TYPE]);
else
user_reg_hint_type = NL80211_USER_REG_HINT_USER;
switch (user_reg_hint_type) {
case NL80211_USER_REG_HINT_USER:
case NL80211_USER_REG_HINT_CELL_BASE:
break;
default:
return -EINVAL;
}
r = regulatory_hint_user(data, user_reg_hint_type);
cfg80211: move all regulatory hints to workqueue All regulatory hints (core, driver, userspace and 11d) are now processed in a workqueue. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:30 +00:00
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
return r;
}
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_get_mesh_config(struct sk_buff *skb,
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
struct genl_info *info)
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct mesh_config cur_params;
int err = 0;
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
void *hdr;
struct nlattr *pinfoattr;
struct sk_buff *msg;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->get_mesh_config)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check that function pointer != NULL before using it NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS handlers did not verify whether a function pointer is NULL (not supported by the driver) before trying to call the function. The former nl80211 command is available for unprivileged users, too, so this can potentially allow normal users to kill networking (or worse..) if mac80211 is built without CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH=y. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 15:57:36 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
wdev_lock(wdev);
/* If not connected, get default parameters */
if (!wdev->mesh_id_len)
memcpy(&cur_params, &default_mesh_config, sizeof(cur_params));
else
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_get_mesh_config(rdev, dev, &cur_params);
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
wdev_unlock(wdev);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
if (err)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return err;
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
/* Draw up a netlink message to send back */
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_CONFIG);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
if (!hdr)
net/wireless/nl80211.c: Avoid call to genlmsg_cancel genlmsg_cancel subtracts some constants from its second argument before calling nlmsg_cancel. nlmsg_cancel then calls nlmsg_trim on the same arguments. nlmsg_trim tests for NULL before doing any computation, but a NULL second argument to genlmsg_cancel is no longer NULL due to the initial subtraction. Nothing else happens in this execution, so the call to genlmsg_cancel is simply unnecessary in this case. The semantic match that finds this problem is as follows: (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) // <smpl> @@ expression data; @@ if (data == NULL) { ... * genlmsg_cancel(..., data); ... return ...; } // </smpl> Signed-off-by: Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-01-28 14:17:11 +00:00
goto out;
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
pinfoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_CONFIG);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
if (!pinfoattr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_RETRY_TIMEOUT,
cur_params.dot11MeshRetryTimeout) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_CONFIRM_TIMEOUT,
cur_params.dot11MeshConfirmTimeout) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HOLDING_TIMEOUT,
cur_params.dot11MeshHoldingTimeout) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_MAX_PEER_LINKS,
cur_params.dot11MeshMaxPeerLinks) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_MAX_RETRIES,
cur_params.dot11MeshMaxRetries) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_TTL,
cur_params.dot11MeshTTL) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_ELEMENT_TTL,
cur_params.element_ttl) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_AUTO_OPEN_PLINKS,
cur_params.auto_open_plinks) ||
Merge branch 'master' into for-davem Conflicts: drivers/net/wireless/iwlwifi/iwl-testmode.c net/wireless/nl80211.c
2012-04-12 18:25:14 +00:00
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_SYNC_OFFSET_MAX_NEIGHBOR,
cur_params.dot11MeshNbrOffsetMaxNeighbor) ||
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_MAX_PREQ_RETRIES,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPmaxPREQretries) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_PATH_REFRESH_TIME,
cur_params.path_refresh_time) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_MIN_DISCOVERY_TIMEOUT,
cur_params.min_discovery_timeout) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ACTIVE_PATH_TIMEOUT,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPactivePathTimeout) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PREQ_MIN_INTERVAL,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPpreqMinInterval) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PERR_MIN_INTERVAL,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPperrMinInterval) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_NET_DIAM_TRVS_TIME,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPnetDiameterTraversalTime) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ROOTMODE,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPRootMode) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_RANN_INTERVAL,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPRannInterval) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_GATE_ANNOUNCEMENTS,
cur_params.dot11MeshGateAnnouncementProtocol) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_FORWARDING,
cur_params.dot11MeshForwarding) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_RSSI_THRESHOLD,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: Allow user to see/configure HT protection mode This patch introduces a new mesh configuration parameter "ht_opmode" and will allow user to check the current HT protection mode selected. Users could configure the protection mode by the command "iw mesh_iface set mesh_param mesh_ht_protection_mode=2". The default protection mode of mesh is set to non-HT mixed mode. Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok@cozybit.com> Reviewed-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-30 21:20:32 +00:00
cur_params.rssi_threshold) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HT_OPMODE,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMProotInterval and dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout Add the mesh configuration parameters dot11MeshHWMProotInterval and dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout to be used by proactive PREQ mechanism. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> [line-break commit log] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 18:06:06 +00:00
cur_params.ht_opmode) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PATH_TO_ROOT_TIMEOUT,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ROOT_INTERVAL,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval As defined in section 13.10.9.3 Case D (802.11-2012), this control variable is used to limit the mesh STA to send only one PREQ to a root mesh STA within this interval of time (in TUs). The default value for this variable is set to 2000 TUs. However, for current implementation, the maximum configurable of dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval is restricted by dot11MeshHWMPactivePathTimeout. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> [line-break commit log] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 18:06:10 +00:00
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMProotInterval) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_CONFIRMATION_INTERVAL,
cur_params.dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval))
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, pinfoattr);
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
nla_put_failure:
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
net/wireless/nl80211.c: Avoid call to genlmsg_cancel genlmsg_cancel subtracts some constants from its second argument before calling nlmsg_cancel. nlmsg_cancel then calls nlmsg_trim on the same arguments. nlmsg_trim tests for NULL before doing any computation, but a NULL second argument to genlmsg_cancel is no longer NULL due to the initial subtraction. Nothing else happens in this execution, so the call to genlmsg_cancel is simply unnecessary in this case. The semantic match that finds this problem is as follows: (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) // <smpl> @@ expression data; @@ if (data == NULL) { ... * genlmsg_cancel(..., data); ... return ...; } // </smpl> Signed-off-by: Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-01-28 14:17:11 +00:00
out:
nl80211: Fix memory leaks In case of errors during message composing msg should be freed after canceling. Signed-off-by: Yuri Kululin <ext-yuri.kululin@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: Yuri Ershov <ext-yuri.ershov@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-29 11:08:07 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -ENOBUFS;
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
}
const: struct nla_policy Make remaining netlink policies as const. Fixup coding style where needed. Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan <adobriyan@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2010-02-18 08:14:31 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy nl80211_meshconf_params_policy[NL80211_MESHCONF_ATTR_MAX+1] = {
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_RETRY_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_CONFIRM_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HOLDING_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_MAX_PEER_LINKS] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_MAX_RETRIES] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_TTL] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
nl80211/mac80211: define and allow configuring mesh element TTL The TTL in path selection information elements is different from the mesh ttl used in mesh data frames. Version 7.03 of the 11s draft calls this ttl 'Element TTL'. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:40 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_ELEMENT_TTL] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_AUTO_OPEN_PLINKS] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
{nl,cfg}80211: Support for mesh synchronization Report Toffset to userspace. Let userspace select the mesh synchronization method. Signed-off-by: Marco Porsch <marco.porsch@s2005.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Pavel Zubarev <pavel.zubarev@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-31 18:31:33 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_SYNC_OFFSET_MAX_NEIGHBOR] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_MAX_PREQ_RETRIES] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_PATH_REFRESH_TIME] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_MIN_DISCOVERY_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ACTIVE_PATH_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PREQ_MIN_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMPperrMinInterval As per 802.11mb 13.9.11.3 Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-25 01:15:24 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PERR_MIN_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_NET_DIAM_TRVS_TIME] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
{nl,mac}80211: add missing root mode meshconf entries This fix allows userspace to mark a meshif as a root node. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-09 23:45:09 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ROOTMODE] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: let userspace set RANN interval Allow userspace to set Root Announcement Interval for our mesh interface. Also, RANN interval is now in proper units of TUs. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-09 23:45:10 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_RANN_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: let userspace make meshif mesh gate Allow userspace to set NL80211_MESHCONF_GATE_ANNOUNCEMENTS attribute, which will advertise this mesh node as being a mesh gate. NL80211_HWMP_ROOTMODE must be set or this will do nothing. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-09 23:45:11 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_GATE_ANNOUNCEMENTS] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: Add support of setting non-forwarding entity in Mesh A mesh node that joins the mesh network is by default a forwarding entity. This patch allows the mesh node to set as non-forwarding entity. Whenever dot11MeshForwarding is set to 0, the mesh node can prevent itself from forwarding the traffic which is not destined to him. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-20 17:02:16 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_FORWARDING] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_RSSI_THRESHOLD] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HT_OPMODE] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMProotInterval and dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout Add the mesh configuration parameters dot11MeshHWMProotInterval and dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout to be used by proactive PREQ mechanism. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> [line-break commit log] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 18:06:06 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PATH_TO_ROOT_TIMEOUT] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ROOT_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval As defined in section 13.10.9.3 Case D (802.11-2012), this control variable is used to limit the mesh STA to send only one PREQ to a root mesh STA within this interval of time (in TUs). The default value for this variable is set to 2000 TUs. However, for current implementation, the maximum configurable of dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval is restricted by dot11MeshHWMPactivePathTimeout. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> [line-break commit log] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 18:06:10 +00:00
[NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_CONFIRMATION_INTERVAL] = { .type = NLA_U16 },
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
};
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy
nl80211_mesh_setup_params_policy[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ATTR_MAX+1] = {
{nl,cfg}80211: Support for mesh synchronization Report Toffset to userspace. Let userspace select the mesh synchronization method. Signed-off-by: Marco Porsch <marco.porsch@s2005.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Pavel Zubarev <pavel.zubarev@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-31 18:31:33 +00:00
[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_SYNC] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_PATH_SEL] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_METRIC] = { .type = NLA_U8 },
cfg80211/nl80211: Add userspace authentication flag to mesh setup During mesh setup, use NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AUTH flag to create a secure mesh and route management frames to userspace. Also, NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY now returns a flag NL80211_SUPPORT_MESH_AUTH if the wiphy's mesh implementation supports routing of mesh auth frames to userspace. This is useful for forward compatibility between old kernels and new userspace tools. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:28 +00:00
[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AUTH] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
nl80211: rename NL80211_MESH_SETUP_VENDOR_PATH_SEL_IE To NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE. This reflects our ability to insert any ie into a mesh beacon, not simply path selection ies. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:27 +00:00
[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
.len = IEEE80211_MAX_DATA_LEN },
nl80211: Introduce NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AMPE Introduce a new configuration option to support AMPE from userspace. Prior to this series we only supported authentication in userspace: an authentication daemon would authenticate peer candidates in userspace and hand them over to the kernel. From that point the mesh stack would take over and establish a peer link (Mesh Peering Management). These patches introduce support for Authenticated Mesh Peering Exchange in userspace. The userspace daemon implements the AMPE protocol and on successfull completion create mesh peers and install encryption keys. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-03 23:57:07 +00:00
[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AMPE] = { .type = NLA_FLAG },
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
};
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_parse_mesh_config(struct genl_info *info,
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
struct mesh_config *cfg,
u32 *mask_out)
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
{
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_MESHCONF_ATTR_MAX + 1];
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
u32 mask = 0;
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
#define FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(table, cfg, param, mask, attr_num, nla_fn) \
do {\
if (table[attr_num]) {\
cfg->param = nla_fn(table[attr_num]); \
mask |= (1 << (attr_num - 1)); \
} \
} while (0);\
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_CONFIG])
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
if (nla_parse_nested(tb, NL80211_MESHCONF_ATTR_MAX,
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_CONFIG],
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
nl80211_meshconf_params_policy))
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
/* This makes sure that there aren't more than 32 mesh config
* parameters (otherwise our bitfield scheme would not work.) */
BUILD_BUG_ON(NL80211_MESHCONF_ATTR_MAX > 32);
/* Fill in the params struct */
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshRetryTimeout,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_RETRY_TIMEOUT,
nla_get_u16);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshConfirmTimeout,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_CONFIRM_TIMEOUT,
nla_get_u16);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHoldingTimeout,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_HOLDING_TIMEOUT,
nla_get_u16);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshMaxPeerLinks,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_MAX_PEER_LINKS,
nla_get_u16);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshMaxRetries,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_MAX_RETRIES,
nla_get_u8);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshTTL,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_TTL, nla_get_u8);
nl80211/mac80211: define and allow configuring mesh element TTL The TTL in path selection information elements is different from the mesh ttl used in mesh data frames. Version 7.03 of the 11s draft calls this ttl 'Element TTL'. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:40 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, element_ttl,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_ELEMENT_TTL,
nla_get_u8);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, auto_open_plinks,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_AUTO_OPEN_PLINKS,
nla_get_u8);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshNbrOffsetMaxNeighbor, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_SYNC_OFFSET_MAX_NEIGHBOR,
nla_get_u32);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPmaxPREQretries,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_MAX_PREQ_RETRIES,
nla_get_u8);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, path_refresh_time,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_PATH_REFRESH_TIME,
nla_get_u32);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, min_discovery_timeout,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_MIN_DISCOVERY_TIMEOUT,
nla_get_u16);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPactivePathTimeout, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ACTIVE_PATH_TIMEOUT,
nla_get_u32);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPpreqMinInterval,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PREQ_MIN_INTERVAL,
nla_get_u16);
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMPperrMinInterval As per 802.11mb 13.9.11.3 Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-25 01:15:24 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPperrMinInterval,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PERR_MIN_INTERVAL,
nla_get_u16);
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
dot11MeshHWMPnetDiameterTraversalTime, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_NET_DIAM_TRVS_TIME,
nla_get_u16);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPRootMode, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ROOTMODE, nla_get_u8);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPRannInterval, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_RANN_INTERVAL,
nla_get_u16);
mac80211: add nl80211/cfg80211 handling of the new mesh root mode option. Signed-off-by: Rui Paulo <rpaulo@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Reviewed-by: Andrey Yurovsky <andrey@cozybit.com> Tested-by: Brian Cavagnolo <brian@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-09 23:46:57 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
dot11MeshGateAnnouncementProtocol, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_GATE_ANNOUNCEMENTS,
nla_get_u8);
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: Add support of setting non-forwarding entity in Mesh A mesh node that joins the mesh network is by default a forwarding entity. This patch allows the mesh node to set as non-forwarding entity. Whenever dot11MeshForwarding is set to 0, the mesh node can prevent itself from forwarding the traffic which is not destined to him. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-20 17:02:16 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshForwarding,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_FORWARDING,
nla_get_u8);
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: Implement RSSI threshold for mesh peering Mesh peer links are established only if average rssi of the peer candidate satisfies the threshold. This is not in 802.11s specification but was requested by David Fulgham, an open80211s user. This is a way to avoid marginal peer links with stations that are barely within range. This patch adds a new mesh configuration parameter, mesh_rssi_threshold. This feature is supported only for hardwares that report signal in dBm. Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-29 01:04:08 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, rssi_threshold,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_RSSI_THRESHOLD,
nla_get_u32);
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: Allow user to see/configure HT protection mode This patch introduces a new mesh configuration parameter "ht_opmode" and will allow user to check the current HT protection mode selected. Users could configure the protection mode by the command "iw mesh_iface set mesh_param mesh_ht_protection_mode=2". The default protection mode of mesh is set to non-HT mixed mode. Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok@cozybit.com> Reviewed-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-30 21:20:32 +00:00
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, ht_opmode,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_HT_OPMODE,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMProotInterval and dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout Add the mesh configuration parameters dot11MeshHWMProotInterval and dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout to be used by proactive PREQ mechanism. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> [line-break commit log] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 18:06:06 +00:00
nla_get_u16);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMPactivePathToRootTimeout,
mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_PATH_TO_ROOT_TIMEOUT,
nla_get_u32);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg, dot11MeshHWMProotInterval,
mask, NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_ROOT_INTERVAL,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: implement dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval As defined in section 13.10.9.3 Case D (802.11-2012), this control variable is used to limit the mesh STA to send only one PREQ to a root mesh STA within this interval of time (in TUs). The default value for this variable is set to 2000 TUs. However, for current implementation, the maximum configurable of dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval is restricted by dot11MeshHWMPactivePathTimeout. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> [line-break commit log] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 18:06:10 +00:00
nla_get_u16);
FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET(tb, cfg,
dot11MeshHWMPconfirmationInterval, mask,
NL80211_MESHCONF_HWMP_CONFIRMATION_INTERVAL,
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: fix the coding style related to mesh parameters fix the coding style related to mesh parameters, especially the indentation, as pointed out by Johannes Berg. Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-11 03:59:36 +00:00
nla_get_u16);
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
if (mask_out)
*mask_out = mask;
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
return 0;
#undef FILL_IN_MESH_PARAM_IF_SET
}
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
static int nl80211_parse_mesh_setup(struct genl_info *info,
struct mesh_setup *setup)
{
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ATTR_MAX + 1];
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_SETUP])
return -EINVAL;
if (nla_parse_nested(tb, NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ATTR_MAX,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_SETUP],
nl80211_mesh_setup_params_policy))
return -EINVAL;
{nl,cfg}80211: Support for mesh synchronization Report Toffset to userspace. Let userspace select the mesh synchronization method. Signed-off-by: Marco Porsch <marco.porsch@s2005.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Pavel Zubarev <pavel.zubarev@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-31 18:31:33 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_SYNC])
setup->sync_method =
(nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_SYNC])) ?
IEEE80211_SYNC_METHOD_VENDOR :
IEEE80211_SYNC_METHOD_NEIGHBOR_OFFSET;
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_PATH_SEL])
setup->path_sel_proto =
(nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_PATH_SEL])) ?
IEEE80211_PATH_PROTOCOL_VENDOR :
IEEE80211_PATH_PROTOCOL_HWMP;
if (tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_METRIC])
setup->path_metric =
(nla_get_u8(tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_ENABLE_VENDOR_METRIC])) ?
IEEE80211_PATH_METRIC_VENDOR :
IEEE80211_PATH_METRIC_AIRTIME;
nl80211: rename NL80211_MESH_SETUP_VENDOR_PATH_SEL_IE To NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE. This reflects our ability to insert any ie into a mesh beacon, not simply path selection ies. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:27 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE]) {
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
struct nlattr *ieattr =
nl80211: rename NL80211_MESH_SETUP_VENDOR_PATH_SEL_IE To NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE. This reflects our ability to insert any ie into a mesh beacon, not simply path selection ies. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:27 +00:00
tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE];
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(ieattr))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: rename NL80211_MESH_SETUP_VENDOR_PATH_SEL_IE To NL80211_MESH_SETUP_IE. This reflects our ability to insert any ie into a mesh beacon, not simply path selection ies. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:27 +00:00
setup->ie = nla_data(ieattr);
setup->ie_len = nla_len(ieattr);
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
}
nl80211: Introduce NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AMPE Introduce a new configuration option to support AMPE from userspace. Prior to this series we only supported authentication in userspace: an authentication daemon would authenticate peer candidates in userspace and hand them over to the kernel. From that point the mesh stack would take over and establish a peer link (Mesh Peering Management). These patches introduce support for Authenticated Mesh Peering Exchange in userspace. The userspace daemon implements the AMPE protocol and on successfull completion create mesh peers and install encryption keys. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-03 23:57:07 +00:00
setup->is_authenticated = nla_get_flag(tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AUTH]);
setup->is_secure = nla_get_flag(tb[NL80211_MESH_SETUP_USERSPACE_AMPE]);
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
return 0;
}
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_update_mesh_config(struct sk_buff *skb,
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
struct genl_info *info)
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
struct mesh_config cfg;
u32 mask;
int err;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->update_mesh_config)
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_mesh_config(info, &cfg, &mask);
nl80211: refactor mesh parameter parsing I'm going to need this in a new place later. Tested-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:43 +00:00
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
wdev_lock(wdev);
if (!wdev->mesh_id_len)
err = -ENOLINK;
if (!err)
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_update_mesh_config(rdev, dev, mask, &cfg);
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
wdev_unlock(wdev);
return err;
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
}
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
static int nl80211_get_reg(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr = NULL;
struct nlattr *nl_reg_rules;
unsigned int i;
int err = -EINVAL;
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_regdomain)
goto out;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
if (!msg) {
err = -ENOBUFS;
goto out;
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_GET_REG);
if (!hdr)
net/wireless/nl80211.c: Avoid call to genlmsg_cancel genlmsg_cancel subtracts some constants from its second argument before calling nlmsg_cancel. nlmsg_cancel then calls nlmsg_trim on the same arguments. nlmsg_trim tests for NULL before doing any computation, but a NULL second argument to genlmsg_cancel is no longer NULL due to the initial subtraction. Nothing else happens in this execution, so the call to genlmsg_cancel is simply unnecessary in this case. The semantic match that finds this problem is as follows: (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) // <smpl> @@ expression data; @@ if (data == NULL) { ... * genlmsg_cancel(..., data); ... return ...; } // </smpl> Signed-off-by: Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-01-28 14:17:11 +00:00
goto put_failure;
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_string(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2,
cfg80211_regdomain->alpha2) ||
(cfg80211_regdomain->dfs_region &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_DFS_REGION,
cfg80211_regdomain->dfs_region)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
cfg80211: add cellular base station regulatory hint support Cellular base stations can provide hints to cfg80211 about where they think we are. This can be done for example on a cell phone. To enable these hints we simply allow them through as user regulatory hints but we allow userspace to clasify the hint as either coming directly from the user or coming from a cellular base station. This option is only available when you enable CONFIG_CFG80211_CERTIFICATION_ONUS. The base station hints themselves will not be processed by the core unless at least one device on the system supports this feature. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 18:49:18 +00:00
if (reg_last_request_cell_base() &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_USER_REG_HINT_TYPE,
NL80211_USER_REG_HINT_CELL_BASE))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
nl_reg_rules = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULES);
if (!nl_reg_rules)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (i = 0; i < cfg80211_regdomain->n_reg_rules; i++) {
struct nlattr *nl_reg_rule;
const struct ieee80211_reg_rule *reg_rule;
const struct ieee80211_freq_range *freq_range;
const struct ieee80211_power_rule *power_rule;
reg_rule = &cfg80211_regdomain->reg_rules[i];
freq_range = &reg_rule->freq_range;
power_rule = &reg_rule->power_rule;
nl_reg_rule = nla_nest_start(msg, i);
if (!nl_reg_rule)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULE_FLAGS,
reg_rule->flags) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_START,
freq_range->start_freq_khz) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_END,
freq_range->end_freq_khz) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_RANGE_MAX_BW,
freq_range->max_bandwidth_khz) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_ANT_GAIN,
power_rule->max_antenna_gain) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_POWER_RULE_MAX_EIRP,
power_rule->max_eirp))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_reg_rule);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_reg_rules);
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
genetlink: make netns aware This makes generic netlink network namespace aware. No generic netlink families except for the controller family are made namespace aware, they need to be checked one by one and then set the family->netnsok member to true. A new function genlmsg_multicast_netns() is introduced to allow sending a multicast message in a given namespace, for example when it applies to an object that lives in that namespace, a new function genlmsg_multicast_allns() to send a message to all network namespaces (for objects that do not have an associated netns). The function genlmsg_multicast() is changed to multicast the message in just init_net, which is currently correct for all generic netlink families since they only work in init_net right now. Some will later want to work in all net namespaces because they do not care about the netns at all -- those will have to be converted to use one of the new functions genlmsg_multicast_allns() or genlmsg_multicast_netns() whenever they are made netns aware in some way. After this patch families can easily decide whether or not they should be available in all net namespaces. Many genl families us it for objects not related to networking and should therefore be available in all namespaces, but that will have to be done on a per family basis. Note that this doesn't touch on the checkpoint/restart problem where network namespaces could be used, genl families and multicast groups are numbered globally and I see no easy way of changing that, especially since it must be possible to multicast to all network namespaces for those families that do not care about netns. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-07-10 09:51:34 +00:00
err = genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
goto out;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
net/wireless/nl80211.c: Avoid call to genlmsg_cancel genlmsg_cancel subtracts some constants from its second argument before calling nlmsg_cancel. nlmsg_cancel then calls nlmsg_trim on the same arguments. nlmsg_trim tests for NULL before doing any computation, but a NULL second argument to genlmsg_cancel is no longer NULL due to the initial subtraction. Nothing else happens in this execution, so the call to genlmsg_cancel is simply unnecessary in this case. The semantic match that finds this problem is as follows: (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) // <smpl> @@ expression data; @@ if (data == NULL) { ... * genlmsg_cancel(..., data); ... return ...; } // </smpl> Signed-off-by: Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-01-28 14:17:11 +00:00
put_failure:
nl80211: Fix memory leaks In case of errors during message composing msg should be freed after canceling. Signed-off-by: Yuri Kululin <ext-yuri.kululin@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: Yuri Ershov <ext-yuri.ershov@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-29 11:08:07 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
err = -EMSGSIZE;
out:
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
return err;
}
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_reg(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_REG_RULE_ATTR_MAX + 1];
struct nlattr *nl_reg_rule;
char *alpha2 = NULL;
int rem_reg_rules = 0, r = 0;
u32 num_rules = 0, rule_idx = 0, size_of_regd;
cfg80211: process regulatory DFS region for countries The wireless-regdb now has support for mapping a country to one DFS region. CRDA sends this to us now so process it so we can provide that hint to drivers. This will later be used by code for processing DFS in a way that meets the criteria for the DFS region the country belongs to. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-11 17:59:02 +00:00
u8 dfs_region = 0;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
struct ieee80211_regdomain *rd = NULL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULES])
return -EINVAL;
alpha2 = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2]);
cfg80211: process regulatory DFS region for countries The wireless-regdb now has support for mapping a country to one DFS region. CRDA sends this to us now so process it so we can provide that hint to drivers. This will later be used by code for processing DFS in a way that meets the criteria for the DFS region the country belongs to. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-11 17:59:02 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DFS_REGION])
dfs_region = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DFS_REGION]);
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
nla_for_each_nested(nl_reg_rule, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULES],
rem_reg_rules) {
num_rules++;
if (num_rules > NL80211_MAX_SUPP_REG_RULES)
cfg80211: return immediately if num reg rules > NL80211_MAX_SUPP_REG_RULES This has no functional change except we save a kfree(rd) and allows us to clean this code up a bit after this. We do avoid an unnecessary kfree(NULL) but calling that was OK too. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:39 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
}
cfg80211: fix in nl80211_set_reg() There is a race on access to last_request and its alpha2 through reg_is_valid_request() and us possibly processing first another regulatory request on another CPU. We avoid this improbably race by locking with the cfg80211_mutex as we should have done in the first place. While at it add the assert on locking on reg_is_valid_request(). Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:41 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211: cleanup return calls on nl80211_set_reg() This has no functional change, but it will make the race fix easier to spot in my next patch. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:40 +00:00
if (!reg_is_valid_request(alpha2)) {
r = -EINVAL;
goto bad_reg;
}
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
size_of_regd = sizeof(struct ieee80211_regdomain) +
(num_rules * sizeof(struct ieee80211_reg_rule));
rd = kzalloc(size_of_regd, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: cleanup return calls on nl80211_set_reg() This has no functional change, but it will make the race fix easier to spot in my next patch. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:40 +00:00
if (!rd) {
r = -ENOMEM;
goto bad_reg;
}
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
rd->n_reg_rules = num_rules;
rd->alpha2[0] = alpha2[0];
rd->alpha2[1] = alpha2[1];
cfg80211: process regulatory DFS region for countries The wireless-regdb now has support for mapping a country to one DFS region. CRDA sends this to us now so process it so we can provide that hint to drivers. This will later be used by code for processing DFS in a way that meets the criteria for the DFS region the country belongs to. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <mcgrof@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-11 17:59:02 +00:00
/*
* Disable DFS master mode if the DFS region was
* not supported or known on this kernel.
*/
if (reg_supported_dfs_region(dfs_region))
rd->dfs_region = dfs_region;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
nla_for_each_nested(nl_reg_rule, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REG_RULES],
rem_reg_rules) {
nla_parse(tb, NL80211_REG_RULE_ATTR_MAX,
nla_data(nl_reg_rule), nla_len(nl_reg_rule),
reg_rule_policy);
r = parse_reg_rule(tb, &rd->reg_rules[rule_idx]);
if (r)
goto bad_reg;
rule_idx++;
cfg80211: cleanup return calls on nl80211_set_reg() This has no functional change, but it will make the race fix easier to spot in my next patch. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:40 +00:00
if (rule_idx > NL80211_MAX_SUPP_REG_RULES) {
r = -EINVAL;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
goto bad_reg;
cfg80211: cleanup return calls on nl80211_set_reg() This has no functional change, but it will make the race fix easier to spot in my next patch. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:40 +00:00
}
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
}
BUG_ON(rule_idx != num_rules);
r = set_regdom(rd);
cfg80211: fix in nl80211_set_reg() There is a race on access to last_request and its alpha2 through reg_is_valid_request() and us possibly processing first another regulatory request on another CPU. We avoid this improbably race by locking with the cfg80211_mutex as we should have done in the first place. While at it add the assert on locking on reg_is_valid_request(). Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:41 +00:00
cfg80211: rename cfg80211_drv_mutex to cfg80211_mutex cfg80211_drv_mutex is protecting more than the driver list, this renames it and documents what its currently supposed to protect. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-21 05:04:21 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211: cleanup return calls on nl80211_set_reg() This has no functional change, but it will make the race fix easier to spot in my next patch. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:40 +00:00
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
return r;
wireless: make regdom passing semantics simpler The regdom struct is given to the core, so it might as well free it in error conditions. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-24 18:32:20 +00:00
bad_reg:
cfg80211: fix in nl80211_set_reg() There is a race on access to last_request and its alpha2 through reg_is_valid_request() and us possibly processing first another regulatory request on another CPU. We avoid this improbably race by locking with the cfg80211_mutex as we should have done in the first place. While at it add the assert on locking on reg_is_valid_request(). Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:41 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
kfree(rd);
cfg80211: cleanup return calls on nl80211_set_reg() This has no functional change, but it will make the race fix easier to spot in my next patch. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-13 21:04:40 +00:00
return r;
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
}
cfg80211: prohibit scanning the same channel more than once It isn't very useful to scan the same channel more than once during a given scan, and some hardware (notably iwlwifi) can only scan a limited number of channels at a time. To prevent any overflows, simply disallow scanning any channel multiple times in a given scan command. This is a small change in the userspace ABI, but the only user, wpa_supplicant, never asks for a scan with the same frequency listed twice. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-17 15:41:49 +00:00
static int validate_scan_freqs(struct nlattr *freqs)
{
struct nlattr *attr1, *attr2;
int n_channels = 0, tmp1, tmp2;
nla_for_each_nested(attr1, freqs, tmp1) {
n_channels++;
/*
* Some hardware has a limited channel list for
* scanning, and it is pretty much nonsensical
* to scan for a channel twice, so disallow that
* and don't require drivers to check that the
* channel list they get isn't longer than what
* they can scan, as long as they can scan all
* the channels they registered at once.
*/
nla_for_each_nested(attr2, freqs, tmp2)
if (attr1 != attr2 &&
nla_get_u32(attr1) == nla_get_u32(attr2))
return 0;
}
return n_channels;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
static int nl80211_trigger_scan(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
struct cfg80211_scan_request *request;
struct nlattr *attr;
struct wiphy *wiphy;
cfg80211: prohibit scanning the same channel more than once It isn't very useful to scan the same channel more than once during a given scan, and some hardware (notably iwlwifi) can only scan a limited number of channels at a time. To prevent any overflows, simply disallow scanning any channel multiple times in a given scan command. This is a small change in the userspace ABI, but the only user, wpa_supplicant, never asks for a scan with the same frequency listed twice. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-17 15:41:49 +00:00
int err, tmp, n_ssids = 0, n_channels, i;
nl80211: Optional IEs into scan request This extends the NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN command to allow applications to specify a set of information element(s) to be added into Probe Request frames with NL80211_ATTR_IE. This provides support for the MLME-SCAN.request primitive parameter VendorSpecificInfo and can be used, e.g., to implement WPS scanning. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-16 17:39:13 +00:00
size_t ie_len;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->scan)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (rdev->scan_req)
return -EBUSY;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES]) {
cfg80211: prohibit scanning the same channel more than once It isn't very useful to scan the same channel more than once during a given scan, and some hardware (notably iwlwifi) can only scan a limited number of channels at a time. To prevent any overflows, simply disallow scanning any channel multiple times in a given scan command. This is a small change in the userspace ABI, but the only user, wpa_supplicant, never asks for a scan with the same frequency listed twice. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-17 15:41:49 +00:00
n_channels = validate_scan_freqs(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!n_channels)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
} else {
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
enum ieee80211_band band;
cfg80211: prohibit scanning the same channel more than once It isn't very useful to scan the same channel more than once during a given scan, and some hardware (notably iwlwifi) can only scan a limited number of channels at a time. To prevent any overflows, simply disallow scanning any channel multiple times in a given scan command. This is a small change in the userspace ABI, but the only user, wpa_supplicant, never asks for a scan with the same frequency listed twice. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-17 15:41:49 +00:00
n_channels = 0;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
for (band = 0; band < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; band++)
if (wiphy->bands[band])
n_channels += wiphy->bands[band]->n_channels;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS])
nla_for_each_nested(attr, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS], tmp)
n_ssids++;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (n_ssids > wiphy->max_scan_ssids)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: Optional IEs into scan request This extends the NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN command to allow applications to specify a set of information element(s) to be added into Probe Request frames with NL80211_ATTR_IE. This provides support for the MLME-SCAN.request primitive parameter VendorSpecificInfo and can be used, e.g., to implement WPS scanning. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-16 17:39:13 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE])
ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
else
ie_len = 0;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ie_len > wiphy->max_scan_ie_len)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: introduce scan IE limit attribute This patch introduces a new attribute for a wiphy that tells userspace how long the information elements added to a probe request frame can be at most. It also updates the at76 to advertise that it cannot support that, and, for now until I can fix that, iwlwifi too. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-31 10:12:05 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
request = kzalloc(sizeof(*request)
nl80211: remove some stack variables in trigger_scan and start_sched_scan Some stack variables (name *ssid and *channel) are only used to define the size of the memory block that needs to be allocated for the request structure in the nl80211_trigger_scan() and nl80211_start_sched_scan() functions. This is unnecessary because the sizes of the actual elements in the structure can be used instead. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-18 08:42:03 +00:00
+ sizeof(*request->ssids) * n_ssids
+ sizeof(*request->channels) * n_channels
nl80211: Optional IEs into scan request This extends the NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN command to allow applications to specify a set of information element(s) to be added into Probe Request frames with NL80211_ATTR_IE. This provides support for the MLME-SCAN.request primitive parameter VendorSpecificInfo and can be used, e.g., to implement WPS scanning. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-16 17:39:13 +00:00
+ ie_len, GFP_KERNEL);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!request)
return -ENOMEM;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (n_ssids)
cfg80211: fix alignment problem in scan request The memory layout for scan requests was rather wrong, we put the scan SSIDs before the channels which could lead to the channel pointers being unaligned in memory. It turns out that using a pointer to the channel array isn't necessary anyway since we can embed a zero-length array into the struct. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-08-07 15:54:07 +00:00
request->ssids = (void *)&request->channels[n_channels];
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
request->n_ssids = n_ssids;
nl80211: Optional IEs into scan request This extends the NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN command to allow applications to specify a set of information element(s) to be added into Probe Request frames with NL80211_ATTR_IE. This provides support for the MLME-SCAN.request primitive parameter VendorSpecificInfo and can be used, e.g., to implement WPS scanning. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-16 17:39:13 +00:00
if (ie_len) {
if (request->ssids)
request->ie = (void *)(request->ssids + n_ssids);
else
request->ie = (void *)(request->channels + n_channels);
}
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
cfg80211: validate scan channels Currently it is possible to request a scan on only disabled channels, which could be problematic for some drivers. Reject such scans, and also ignore disabled channels that are given. This resuls in the scan begin/end event only including channels that are actually used. This makes the mac80211 check for disabled channels superfluous. At the same time, remove the no-IBSS check from mac80211 -- nothing says that we should not find any networks on channels that cannot be used for an IBSS, even when operating in IBSS mode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-02 12:32:03 +00:00
i = 0;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES]) {
/* user specified, bail out if channel not found */
nla_for_each_nested(attr, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES], tmp) {
cfg80211: validate scan channels Currently it is possible to request a scan on only disabled channels, which could be problematic for some drivers. Reject such scans, and also ignore disabled channels that are given. This resuls in the scan begin/end event only including channels that are actually used. This makes the mac80211 check for disabled channels superfluous. At the same time, remove the no-IBSS check from mac80211 -- nothing says that we should not find any networks on channels that cannot be used for an IBSS, even when operating in IBSS mode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-02 12:32:03 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
chan = ieee80211_get_channel(wiphy, nla_get_u32(attr));
if (!chan) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
cfg80211: validate scan channels Currently it is possible to request a scan on only disabled channels, which could be problematic for some drivers. Reject such scans, and also ignore disabled channels that are given. This resuls in the scan begin/end event only including channels that are actually used. This makes the mac80211 check for disabled channels superfluous. At the same time, remove the no-IBSS check from mac80211 -- nothing says that we should not find any networks on channels that cannot be used for an IBSS, even when operating in IBSS mode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-02 12:32:03 +00:00
/* ignore disabled channels */
if (chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED)
continue;
request->channels[i] = chan;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
i++;
}
} else {
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
enum ieee80211_band band;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
/* all channels */
for (band = 0; band < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; band++) {
int j;
if (!wiphy->bands[band])
continue;
for (j = 0; j < wiphy->bands[band]->n_channels; j++) {
cfg80211: validate scan channels Currently it is possible to request a scan on only disabled channels, which could be problematic for some drivers. Reject such scans, and also ignore disabled channels that are given. This resuls in the scan begin/end event only including channels that are actually used. This makes the mac80211 check for disabled channels superfluous. At the same time, remove the no-IBSS check from mac80211 -- nothing says that we should not find any networks on channels that cannot be used for an IBSS, even when operating in IBSS mode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-02 12:32:03 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
chan = &wiphy->bands[band]->channels[j];
if (chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED)
continue;
request->channels[i] = chan;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
i++;
}
}
}
cfg80211: validate scan channels Currently it is possible to request a scan on only disabled channels, which could be problematic for some drivers. Reject such scans, and also ignore disabled channels that are given. This resuls in the scan begin/end event only including channels that are actually used. This makes the mac80211 check for disabled channels superfluous. At the same time, remove the no-IBSS check from mac80211 -- nothing says that we should not find any networks on channels that cannot be used for an IBSS, even when operating in IBSS mode. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-02 12:32:03 +00:00
if (!i) {
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
request->n_channels = i;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
i = 0;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS]) {
nla_for_each_nested(attr, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS], tmp) {
nl80211: fix overflow in ssid_len When one of the SSID's length passed in a scan or sched_scan request is larger than 255, there will be an overflow in the u8 that is used to store the length before checking. This causes the check to fail and we overrun the buffer when copying the SSID. Fix this by checking the nl80211 attribute length before copying it to the struct. This is a follow up for the previous commit 208c72f4fe44fe09577e7975ba0e7fa0278f3d03, which didn't fix the problem entirely. Reported-by: Ido Yariv <ido@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-07 17:42:26 +00:00
if (nla_len(attr) > IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
nl80211: fix overflow in ssid_len When one of the SSID's length passed in a scan or sched_scan request is larger than 255, there will be an overflow in the u8 that is used to store the length before checking. This causes the check to fail and we overrun the buffer when copying the SSID. Fix this by checking the nl80211 attribute length before copying it to the struct. This is a follow up for the previous commit 208c72f4fe44fe09577e7975ba0e7fa0278f3d03, which didn't fix the problem entirely. Reported-by: Ido Yariv <ido@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-07 17:42:26 +00:00
request->ssids[i].ssid_len = nla_len(attr);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
memcpy(request->ssids[i].ssid, nla_data(attr), nla_len(attr));
i++;
}
}
nl80211: Optional IEs into scan request This extends the NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN command to allow applications to specify a set of information element(s) to be added into Probe Request frames with NL80211_ATTR_IE. This provides support for the MLME-SCAN.request primitive parameter VendorSpecificInfo and can be used, e.g., to implement WPS scanning. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-16 17:39:13 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
request->ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
mac80211: pass all probe request IEs to driver Instead of just passing the cfg80211-requested IEs, pass the locally generated ones as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-01 09:58:36 +00:00
memcpy((void *)request->ie,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]),
nl80211: Optional IEs into scan request This extends the NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN command to allow applications to specify a set of information element(s) to be added into Probe Request frames with NL80211_ATTR_IE. This provides support for the MLME-SCAN.request primitive parameter VendorSpecificInfo and can be used, e.g., to implement WPS scanning. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-16 17:39:13 +00:00
request->ie_len);
}
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; i++)
cfg80211: fix scan crash on single-band cards commit 58389c69150e6032504dfcd3edca6b1975c8b5bc Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Mon Jul 18 18:08:35 2011 +0200 cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan made single-band cards crash since it would always access all wiphy->bands[]. Fix this and reject any attempts in the new helper ieee80211_get_ratemask() to do the same, rejecting rates configuration for unsupported bands. Reported-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org> Tested-by: Pavel Roskin <proski@gnu.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-19 22:52:16 +00:00
if (wiphy->bands[i])
request->rates[i] =
(1 << wiphy->bands[i]->n_bitrates) - 1;
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SUPP_RATES]) {
nla_for_each_nested(attr,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SUPP_RATES],
tmp) {
enum ieee80211_band band = nla_type(attr);
cfg80211: off by one in nl80211_trigger_scan() The test is off by one so we'd read past the end of the wiphy->bands[] array on the next line. Signed-off-by: Dan Carpenter <error27@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-29 08:52:18 +00:00
if (band < 0 || band >= IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS) {
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
err = ieee80211_get_ratemask(wiphy->bands[band],
nla_data(attr),
nla_len(attr),
&request->rates[band]);
if (err)
goto out_free;
}
}
cfg80211: add scan flag to indicate its priority Add NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_LOW_PRIORITY flag support. It tells drivers that this is a low priority scan request, so that they can take necessary action. Drivers need to advertise low priority scan capability during registration. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:32 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FLAGS]) {
{nl,cfg}80211: add a flags word to scan requests Add a flags word to direct and scheduled scan requests; it will be used for control of optional behaviours such as flushing the bss cache prior to doing a scan. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:31 +00:00
request->flags = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FLAGS]);
cfg80211: add support for flushing old scan results Add an NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_FLUSH flag that causes old bss cache entries to be flushed on scan completion. This is useful for collecting guaranteed fresh scan/survey result (e.g. on resume). For normal scan, flushing only happens on successful completion of a scan; i.e. it does not happen if the scan is aborted. For scheduled scan, previous scan results are flushed everytime when we get new scan results. This feature is enabled by default. Drivers can disable it by unsetting the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_FLUSH flag. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> [invert polarity of feature flag to account for old kernels] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:34 +00:00
if (((request->flags & NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_LOW_PRIORITY) &&
!(wiphy->features & NL80211_FEATURE_LOW_PRIORITY_SCAN)) ||
((request->flags & NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_FLUSH) &&
!(wiphy->features & NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_FLUSH))) {
cfg80211: add scan flag to indicate its priority Add NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_LOW_PRIORITY flag support. It tells drivers that this is a low priority scan request, so that they can take necessary action. Drivers need to advertise low priority scan capability during registration. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:32 +00:00
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out_free;
}
}
{nl,cfg}80211: add a flags word to scan requests Add a flags word to direct and scheduled scan requests; it will be used for control of optional behaviours such as flushing the bss cache prior to doing a scan. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:31 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: Add support to disable CCK rate for management frame Add a new nl80211 attribute to specify whether to send the management frames in CCK rate or not. As of now the wpa_supplicant is disabling CCK rate at P2P init itself. So this patch helps to send P2P probe request/probe response/action frames being sent at non CCK rate in 2GHz without disabling 11b rates. This attribute is used with NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_FRAME commands to disable CCK rate for management frame transmission. Cc: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-25 09:23:30 +00:00
request->no_cck =
nla_get_flag(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TX_NO_CCK_RATE]);
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
request->wdev = wdev;
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
request->wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
cfg80211: add support for flushing old scan results Add an NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_FLUSH flag that causes old bss cache entries to be flushed on scan completion. This is useful for collecting guaranteed fresh scan/survey result (e.g. on resume). For normal scan, flushing only happens on successful completion of a scan; i.e. it does not happen if the scan is aborted. For scheduled scan, previous scan results are flushed everytime when we get new scan results. This feature is enabled by default. Drivers can disable it by unsetting the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_FLUSH flag. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> [invert polarity of feature flag to account for old kernels] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:34 +00:00
request->scan_start = jiffies;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
rdev->scan_req = request;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_scan(rdev, request);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
if (!err) {
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
nl80211_send_scan_start(rdev, wdev);
if (wdev->netdev)
dev_hold(wdev->netdev);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
} else {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
out_free:
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
rdev->scan_req = NULL;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
kfree(request);
}
nl80211: rework locking When I added scanning to cfg80211, we got a lock dependency like this: rtnl --> cfg80211_mtx nl80211, on the other hand, has the reverse lock dependency: cfg80211_mtx --> rtnl which clearly is a bad idea. This patch reworks nl80211 to take these two locks in the other order to fix the possible, and easily triggerable, deadlock. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-12 08:55:09 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
return err;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_start_sched_scan(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *request;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct nlattr *attr;
struct wiphy *wiphy;
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
int err, tmp, n_ssids = 0, n_match_sets = 0, n_channels, i;
cfg80211/nl80211: add interval attribute for scheduled scans Introduce NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL as a required attribute for NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN. This value informs the driver at which intervals the scheduled scan cycles should be executed. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:37 +00:00
u32 interval;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
enum ieee80211_band band;
size_t ie_len;
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_MAX + 1];
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_SCHED_SCAN) ||
!rdev->ops->sched_scan_start)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: add interval attribute for scheduled scans Introduce NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL as a required attribute for NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN. This value informs the driver at which intervals the scheduled scan cycles should be executed. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:37 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL])
return -EINVAL;
interval = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL]);
if (interval == 0)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES]) {
n_channels = validate_scan_freqs(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES]);
if (!n_channels)
return -EINVAL;
} else {
n_channels = 0;
for (band = 0; band < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; band++)
if (wiphy->bands[band])
n_channels += wiphy->bands[band]->n_channels;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS])
nla_for_each_nested(attr, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS],
tmp)
n_ssids++;
nl80211/cfg80211: add max_sched_scan_ssids in the hw description Some chips can scan more SSIDs with a single scheduled scan command than with a single normal scan command (eg. wl12xx chips). To support this, this patch creates a separate hardware description element that describes the amount of SSIDs supported in scheduled scans. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-13 11:57:28 +00:00
if (n_ssids > wiphy->max_sched_scan_ssids)
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH])
nla_for_each_nested(attr,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH],
tmp)
n_match_sets++;
if (n_match_sets > wiphy->max_match_sets)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE])
ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
else
ie_len = 0;
nl80211/cfg80211: add max_sched_scan_ie_len in the hw description Some chips may support different lengths of user-supplied IEs with a single scheduled scan command than with a single normal scan command. To support this, this patch creates a separate hardware description element that describes the maximum size of user-supplied information element data supported in scheduled scans. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-13 11:57:29 +00:00
if (ie_len > wiphy->max_sched_scan_ie_len)
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: fix deadlock with rfkill/sched_scan by adding new mutex There was a deadlock when rfkill-blocking a wireless interface, because we were locking the rdev mutex on NETDEV_GOING_DOWN to stop sched_scans that were eventually running. The rfkill block code was already holding a mutex under rdev: kernel: ======================================================= kernel: [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] kernel: 3.0.0-rc1-00049-g1fa7b6a #57 kernel: ------------------------------------------------------- kernel: kworker/0:1/4525 is trying to acquire lock: kernel: (&rdev->mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164c831>] cfg80211_netdev_notifier_call+0x131/0x5b0 kernel: kernel: but task is already holding lock: kernel: (&rdev->devlist_mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164dcef>] cfg80211_rfkill_set_block+0x4f/0xa0 kernel: kernel: which lock already depends on the new lock. To fix this, add a new mutex specifically for sched_scan, to protect the sched_scan_req element in the rdev struct, instead of using the global rdev mutex. Reported-by: Duane Griffin <duaneg@dghda.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-30 05:32:41 +00:00
mutex_lock(&rdev->sched_scan_mtx);
if (rdev->sched_scan_req) {
err = -EINPROGRESS;
goto out;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
request = kzalloc(sizeof(*request)
nl80211: remove some stack variables in trigger_scan and start_sched_scan Some stack variables (name *ssid and *channel) are only used to define the size of the memory block that needs to be allocated for the request structure in the nl80211_trigger_scan() and nl80211_start_sched_scan() functions. This is unnecessary because the sizes of the actual elements in the structure can be used instead. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-18 08:42:03 +00:00
+ sizeof(*request->ssids) * n_ssids
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
+ sizeof(*request->match_sets) * n_match_sets
nl80211: remove some stack variables in trigger_scan and start_sched_scan Some stack variables (name *ssid and *channel) are only used to define the size of the memory block that needs to be allocated for the request structure in the nl80211_trigger_scan() and nl80211_start_sched_scan() functions. This is unnecessary because the sizes of the actual elements in the structure can be used instead. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-18 08:42:03 +00:00
+ sizeof(*request->channels) * n_channels
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
+ ie_len, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: fix deadlock with rfkill/sched_scan by adding new mutex There was a deadlock when rfkill-blocking a wireless interface, because we were locking the rdev mutex on NETDEV_GOING_DOWN to stop sched_scans that were eventually running. The rfkill block code was already holding a mutex under rdev: kernel: ======================================================= kernel: [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] kernel: 3.0.0-rc1-00049-g1fa7b6a #57 kernel: ------------------------------------------------------- kernel: kworker/0:1/4525 is trying to acquire lock: kernel: (&rdev->mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164c831>] cfg80211_netdev_notifier_call+0x131/0x5b0 kernel: kernel: but task is already holding lock: kernel: (&rdev->devlist_mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164dcef>] cfg80211_rfkill_set_block+0x4f/0xa0 kernel: kernel: which lock already depends on the new lock. To fix this, add a new mutex specifically for sched_scan, to protect the sched_scan_req element in the rdev struct, instead of using the global rdev mutex. Reported-by: Duane Griffin <duaneg@dghda.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-30 05:32:41 +00:00
if (!request) {
err = -ENOMEM;
goto out;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (n_ssids)
request->ssids = (void *)&request->channels[n_channels];
request->n_ssids = n_ssids;
if (ie_len) {
if (request->ssids)
request->ie = (void *)(request->ssids + n_ssids);
else
request->ie = (void *)(request->channels + n_channels);
}
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
if (n_match_sets) {
if (request->ie)
request->match_sets = (void *)(request->ie + ie_len);
else if (request->ssids)
request->match_sets =
(void *)(request->ssids + n_ssids);
else
request->match_sets =
(void *)(request->channels + n_channels);
}
request->n_match_sets = n_match_sets;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
i = 0;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES]) {
/* user specified, bail out if channel not found */
nla_for_each_nested(attr,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES],
tmp) {
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
chan = ieee80211_get_channel(wiphy, nla_get_u32(attr));
if (!chan) {
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
/* ignore disabled channels */
if (chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED)
continue;
request->channels[i] = chan;
i++;
}
} else {
/* all channels */
for (band = 0; band < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; band++) {
int j;
if (!wiphy->bands[band])
continue;
for (j = 0; j < wiphy->bands[band]->n_channels; j++) {
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
chan = &wiphy->bands[band]->channels[j];
if (chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED)
continue;
request->channels[i] = chan;
i++;
}
}
}
if (!i) {
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
request->n_channels = i;
i = 0;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS]) {
nla_for_each_nested(attr, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS],
tmp) {
nl80211: fix overflow in ssid_len When one of the SSID's length passed in a scan or sched_scan request is larger than 255, there will be an overflow in the u8 that is used to store the length before checking. This causes the check to fail and we overrun the buffer when copying the SSID. Fix this by checking the nl80211 attribute length before copying it to the struct. This is a follow up for the previous commit 208c72f4fe44fe09577e7975ba0e7fa0278f3d03, which didn't fix the problem entirely. Reported-by: Ido Yariv <ido@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-07 17:42:26 +00:00
if (nla_len(attr) > IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN) {
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
nl80211: fix overflow in ssid_len When one of the SSID's length passed in a scan or sched_scan request is larger than 255, there will be an overflow in the u8 that is used to store the length before checking. This causes the check to fail and we overrun the buffer when copying the SSID. Fix this by checking the nl80211 attribute length before copying it to the struct. This is a follow up for the previous commit 208c72f4fe44fe09577e7975ba0e7fa0278f3d03, which didn't fix the problem entirely. Reported-by: Ido Yariv <ido@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-07 17:42:26 +00:00
request->ssids[i].ssid_len = nla_len(attr);
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
memcpy(request->ssids[i].ssid, nla_data(attr),
nla_len(attr));
i++;
}
}
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
i = 0;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH]) {
nla_for_each_nested(attr,
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH],
tmp) {
nl80211: specify RSSI threshold in scheduled scan Support configuring an RSSI threshold in dBm (s32) when requesting scheduled scan, below which a BSS won't be reported by the cfg80211 driver. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-21 18:09:54 +00:00
struct nlattr *ssid, *rssi;
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
nla_parse(tb, NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_MAX,
nla_data(attr), nla_len(attr),
nl80211_match_policy);
nl80211: fix sched scan match attribute name It should be NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_SSID as documented, not NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_SSID. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-13 09:17:11 +00:00
ssid = tb[NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_SSID];
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
if (ssid) {
if (nla_len(ssid) > IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN) {
err = -EINVAL;
goto out_free;
}
memcpy(request->match_sets[i].ssid.ssid,
nla_data(ssid), nla_len(ssid));
request->match_sets[i].ssid.ssid_len =
nla_len(ssid);
}
nl80211: specify RSSI threshold in scheduled scan Support configuring an RSSI threshold in dBm (s32) when requesting scheduled scan, below which a BSS won't be reported by the cfg80211 driver. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-21 18:09:54 +00:00
rssi = tb[NL80211_SCHED_SCAN_MATCH_ATTR_RSSI];
if (rssi)
request->rssi_thold = nla_get_u32(rssi);
else
request->rssi_thold =
NL80211_SCAN_RSSI_THOLD_OFF;
nl80211/cfg80211: add match filtering for sched_scan Introduce filtering for scheduled scans to reduce the number of unnecessary results (which cause useless wake-ups). Add a new nested attribute where sets of parameters to be matched can be passed when starting a scheduled scan. Only scan results that match any of the sets will be returned. At this point, the set consists of a single parameter, an SSID. This can be easily extended in the future to support more complex matches. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-08-31 13:01:48 +00:00
i++;
}
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
request->ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
memcpy((void *)request->ie,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]),
request->ie_len);
}
cfg80211: add scan flag to indicate its priority Add NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_LOW_PRIORITY flag support. It tells drivers that this is a low priority scan request, so that they can take necessary action. Drivers need to advertise low priority scan capability during registration. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:32 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FLAGS]) {
{nl,cfg}80211: add a flags word to scan requests Add a flags word to direct and scheduled scan requests; it will be used for control of optional behaviours such as flushing the bss cache prior to doing a scan. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:31 +00:00
request->flags = nla_get_u32(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FLAGS]);
cfg80211: add support for flushing old scan results Add an NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_FLUSH flag that causes old bss cache entries to be flushed on scan completion. This is useful for collecting guaranteed fresh scan/survey result (e.g. on resume). For normal scan, flushing only happens on successful completion of a scan; i.e. it does not happen if the scan is aborted. For scheduled scan, previous scan results are flushed everytime when we get new scan results. This feature is enabled by default. Drivers can disable it by unsetting the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_FLUSH flag. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> [invert polarity of feature flag to account for old kernels] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:34 +00:00
if (((request->flags & NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_LOW_PRIORITY) &&
!(wiphy->features & NL80211_FEATURE_LOW_PRIORITY_SCAN)) ||
((request->flags & NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_FLUSH) &&
!(wiphy->features & NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_FLUSH))) {
cfg80211: add scan flag to indicate its priority Add NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_LOW_PRIORITY flag support. It tells drivers that this is a low priority scan request, so that they can take necessary action. Drivers need to advertise low priority scan capability during registration. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:32 +00:00
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out_free;
}
}
{nl,cfg}80211: add a flags word to scan requests Add a flags word to direct and scheduled scan requests; it will be used for control of optional behaviours such as flushing the bss cache prior to doing a scan. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:31 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
request->dev = dev;
request->wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
cfg80211/nl80211: add interval attribute for scheduled scans Introduce NL80211_ATTR_SCHED_SCAN_INTERVAL as a required attribute for NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN. This value informs the driver at which intervals the scheduled scan cycles should be executed. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:37 +00:00
request->interval = interval;
cfg80211: add support for flushing old scan results Add an NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_FLUSH flag that causes old bss cache entries to be flushed on scan completion. This is useful for collecting guaranteed fresh scan/survey result (e.g. on resume). For normal scan, flushing only happens on successful completion of a scan; i.e. it does not happen if the scan is aborted. For scheduled scan, previous scan results are flushed everytime when we get new scan results. This feature is enabled by default. Drivers can disable it by unsetting the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_FLUSH flag. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> [invert polarity of feature flag to account for old kernels] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:34 +00:00
request->scan_start = jiffies;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_sched_scan_start(rdev, dev, request);
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (!err) {
rdev->sched_scan_req = request;
nl80211_send_sched_scan(rdev, dev,
NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN);
goto out;
}
out_free:
kfree(request);
out:
cfg80211: fix deadlock with rfkill/sched_scan by adding new mutex There was a deadlock when rfkill-blocking a wireless interface, because we were locking the rdev mutex on NETDEV_GOING_DOWN to stop sched_scans that were eventually running. The rfkill block code was already holding a mutex under rdev: kernel: ======================================================= kernel: [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] kernel: 3.0.0-rc1-00049-g1fa7b6a #57 kernel: ------------------------------------------------------- kernel: kworker/0:1/4525 is trying to acquire lock: kernel: (&rdev->mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164c831>] cfg80211_netdev_notifier_call+0x131/0x5b0 kernel: kernel: but task is already holding lock: kernel: (&rdev->devlist_mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164dcef>] cfg80211_rfkill_set_block+0x4f/0xa0 kernel: kernel: which lock already depends on the new lock. To fix this, add a new mutex specifically for sched_scan, to protect the sched_scan_req element in the rdev struct, instead of using the global rdev mutex. Reported-by: Duane Griffin <duaneg@dghda.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-30 05:32:41 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&rdev->sched_scan_mtx);
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_stop_sched_scan(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: fix deadlock with rfkill/sched_scan by adding new mutex There was a deadlock when rfkill-blocking a wireless interface, because we were locking the rdev mutex on NETDEV_GOING_DOWN to stop sched_scans that were eventually running. The rfkill block code was already holding a mutex under rdev: kernel: ======================================================= kernel: [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] kernel: 3.0.0-rc1-00049-g1fa7b6a #57 kernel: ------------------------------------------------------- kernel: kworker/0:1/4525 is trying to acquire lock: kernel: (&rdev->mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164c831>] cfg80211_netdev_notifier_call+0x131/0x5b0 kernel: kernel: but task is already holding lock: kernel: (&rdev->devlist_mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164dcef>] cfg80211_rfkill_set_block+0x4f/0xa0 kernel: kernel: which lock already depends on the new lock. To fix this, add a new mutex specifically for sched_scan, to protect the sched_scan_req element in the rdev struct, instead of using the global rdev mutex. Reported-by: Duane Griffin <duaneg@dghda.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-30 05:32:41 +00:00
int err;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_SCHED_SCAN) ||
!rdev->ops->sched_scan_stop)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: fix deadlock with rfkill/sched_scan by adding new mutex There was a deadlock when rfkill-blocking a wireless interface, because we were locking the rdev mutex on NETDEV_GOING_DOWN to stop sched_scans that were eventually running. The rfkill block code was already holding a mutex under rdev: kernel: ======================================================= kernel: [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] kernel: 3.0.0-rc1-00049-g1fa7b6a #57 kernel: ------------------------------------------------------- kernel: kworker/0:1/4525 is trying to acquire lock: kernel: (&rdev->mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164c831>] cfg80211_netdev_notifier_call+0x131/0x5b0 kernel: kernel: but task is already holding lock: kernel: (&rdev->devlist_mtx){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff8164dcef>] cfg80211_rfkill_set_block+0x4f/0xa0 kernel: kernel: which lock already depends on the new lock. To fix this, add a new mutex specifically for sched_scan, to protect the sched_scan_req element in the rdev struct, instead of using the global rdev mutex. Reported-by: Duane Griffin <duaneg@dghda.com> Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-30 05:32:41 +00:00
mutex_lock(&rdev->sched_scan_mtx);
err = __cfg80211_stop_sched_scan(rdev, false);
mutex_unlock(&rdev->sched_scan_mtx);
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: use netlink consistent dump feature for BSS dumps Use the new consistent dump feature from (generic) netlink to advertise when dumps are incomplete. Readers may note that this does not initialize the rdev->bss_generation counter to a non-zero value. This is still OK since the value is modified only under spinlock when the list is modified. Since the dump code holds the spinlock, the value will either be > 0 already, or the list will still be empty in which case a consistent dump will actually be made (and be empty). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-21 07:45:33 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_bss(struct sk_buff *msg, struct netlink_callback *cb,
u32 seq, int flags,
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev,
struct cfg80211_internal_bss *intbss)
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
{
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
struct cfg80211_bss *res = &intbss->pub;
cfg80211: fix BSS struct IE access races When a BSS struct is updated, the IEs are currently overwritten or freed. This can lead to races if some other CPU is accessing the BSS struct and using the IEs concurrently. Fix this by always allocating the IEs in a new struct that holds the data and length and protecting access to this new struct with RCU. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-29 00:25:20 +00:00
const struct cfg80211_bss_ies *ies;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
void *hdr;
struct nlattr *bss;
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
ASSERT_WDEV_LOCK(wdev);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid, seq, flags,
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_NEW_SCAN_RESULTS);
if (!hdr)
return -1;
nl80211: use netlink consistent dump feature for BSS dumps Use the new consistent dump feature from (generic) netlink to advertise when dumps are incomplete. Readers may note that this does not initialize the rdev->bss_generation counter to a non-zero value. This is still OK since the value is modified only under spinlock when the list is modified. Since the dump code holds the spinlock, the value will either be > 0 already, or the list will still be empty in which case a consistent dump will actually be made (and be empty). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-21 07:45:33 +00:00
genl_dump_check_consistent(cb, hdr, &nl80211_fam);
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_GENERATION, rdev->bss_generation) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, wdev->netdev->ifindex))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
bss = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_BSS);
if (!bss)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((!is_zero_ether_addr(res->bssid) &&
cfg80211: fix BSS struct IE access races When a BSS struct is updated, the IEs are currently overwritten or freed. This can lead to races if some other CPU is accessing the BSS struct and using the IEs concurrently. Fix this by always allocating the IEs in a new struct that holds the data and length and protecting access to this new struct with RCU. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-29 00:25:20 +00:00
nla_put(msg, NL80211_BSS_BSSID, ETH_ALEN, res->bssid)))
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: fix BSS struct IE access races When a BSS struct is updated, the IEs are currently overwritten or freed. This can lead to races if some other CPU is accessing the BSS struct and using the IEs concurrently. Fix this by always allocating the IEs in a new struct that holds the data and length and protecting access to this new struct with RCU. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-29 00:25:20 +00:00
rcu_read_lock();
ies = rcu_dereference(res->ies);
if (ies && ies->len && nla_put(msg, NL80211_BSS_INFORMATION_ELEMENTS,
ies->len, ies->data)) {
rcu_read_unlock();
goto nla_put_failure;
}
ies = rcu_dereference(res->beacon_ies);
if (ies && ies->len && nla_put(msg, NL80211_BSS_BEACON_IES,
ies->len, ies->data)) {
rcu_read_unlock();
goto nla_put_failure;
}
rcu_read_unlock();
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (res->tsf &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_BSS_TSF, res->tsf))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (res->beacon_interval &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_BSS_BEACON_INTERVAL, res->beacon_interval))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_BSS_CAPABILITY, res->capability) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BSS_FREQUENCY, res->channel->center_freq) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BSS_SEEN_MS_AGO,
jiffies_to_msecs(jiffies - intbss->ts)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
cfg80211: clean up signal type It wasn't a good idea to make the signal type a per-BSS option, although then it is closer to the actual value. Move it to be a per-wiphy setting, update mac80211 to match. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-18 17:45:06 +00:00
switch (rdev->wiphy.signal_type) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
case CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_MBM:
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BSS_SIGNAL_MBM, res->signal))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
break;
case CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC:
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_BSS_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, res->signal))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
break;
default:
break;
}
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
switch (wdev->iftype) {
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (intbss == wdev->current_bss &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BSS_STATUS,
NL80211_BSS_STATUS_ASSOCIATED))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
break;
case NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC:
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (intbss == wdev->current_bss &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_BSS_STATUS,
NL80211_BSS_STATUS_IBSS_JOINED))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
break;
default:
break;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, bss);
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
}
static int nl80211_dump_scan(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct netlink_callback *cb)
{
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
struct net_device *dev;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
struct cfg80211_internal_bss *scan;
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
int start = cb->args[1], idx = 0;
int err;
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
err = nl80211_prepare_netdev_dump(skb, cb, &rdev, &dev);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
wdev_lock(wdev);
spin_lock_bh(&rdev->bss_lock);
cfg80211_bss_expire(rdev);
nl80211: use netlink consistent dump feature for BSS dumps Use the new consistent dump feature from (generic) netlink to advertise when dumps are incomplete. Readers may note that this does not initialize the rdev->bss_generation counter to a non-zero value. This is still OK since the value is modified only under spinlock when the list is modified. Since the dump code holds the spinlock, the value will either be > 0 already, or the list will still be empty in which case a consistent dump will actually be made (and be empty). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-21 07:45:33 +00:00
cb->seq = rdev->bss_generation;
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
list_for_each_entry(scan, &rdev->bss_list, list) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (++idx <= start)
continue;
nl80211: use netlink consistent dump feature for BSS dumps Use the new consistent dump feature from (generic) netlink to advertise when dumps are incomplete. Readers may note that this does not initialize the rdev->bss_generation counter to a non-zero value. This is still OK since the value is modified only under spinlock when the list is modified. Since the dump code holds the spinlock, the value will either be > 0 already, or the list will still be empty in which case a consistent dump will actually be made (and be empty). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-06-21 07:45:33 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_bss(skb, cb,
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
rdev, wdev, scan) < 0) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
idx--;
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
break;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
}
}
nl80211: report BSS status When connected to a BSS, or joined to an IBSS, we'll want to know in userspace without using wireless extensions, so report the BSS status in the BSS list. Userspace can query the BSS list, display all the information and retrieve the station information as well. For example (from hwsim): $ iw dev wlan1 scan dump BSS 02:00:00:00:00:00 (on wlan1) -- associated freq: 2462 beacon interval: 100 capability: ESS ShortSlotTime (0x0401) signal: -50.00 dBm SSID: j Supported rates: 1.0* 2.0* 5.5* 11.0* 6.0 9.0 12.0 18.0 DS Paramater set: channel 11 ERP: <no flags> Extended supported rates: 24.0 36.0 48.0 54.0 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-10 16:42:31 +00:00
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->bss_lock);
wdev_unlock(wdev);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
cb->args[1] = idx;
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
nl80211_finish_netdev_dump(rdev);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
return skb->len;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_survey(struct sk_buff *msg, u32 portid, u32 seq,
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
int flags, struct net_device *dev,
struct survey_info *survey)
{
void *hdr;
struct nlattr *infoattr;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags,
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_NEW_SURVEY_RESULTS);
if (!hdr)
return -ENOMEM;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
infoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SURVEY_INFO);
if (!infoattr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_FREQUENCY,
survey->channel->center_freq))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_NOISE_DBM) &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_NOISE, survey->noise))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_IN_USE) &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_IN_USE))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME) &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME,
survey->channel_time))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_BUSY) &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_BUSY,
survey->channel_time_busy))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_EXT_BUSY) &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_EXT_BUSY,
survey->channel_time_ext_busy))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_RX) &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_RX,
survey->channel_time_rx))
goto nla_put_failure;
if ((survey->filled & SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_TX) &&
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_SURVEY_INFO_CHANNEL_TIME_TX,
survey->channel_time_tx))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, infoattr);
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
}
static int nl80211_dump_survey(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct netlink_callback *cb)
{
struct survey_info survey;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *dev;
struct net_device *netdev;
int survey_idx = cb->args[1];
int res;
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
res = nl80211_prepare_netdev_dump(skb, cb, &dev, &netdev);
if (res)
return res;
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
if (!dev->ops->dump_survey) {
res = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out_err;
}
while (1) {
cfg80211: skip disabled channels on channel survey The channel survey information will be empy for disabled channels so simply discard those entries. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-27 14:24:02 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
res = rdev_dump_survey(dev, netdev, survey_idx, &survey);
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
if (res == -ENOENT)
break;
if (res)
goto out_err;
cfg80211: skip disabled channels on channel survey The channel survey information will be empy for disabled channels so simply discard those entries. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-27 14:24:02 +00:00
/* Survey without a channel doesn't make sense */
if (!survey.channel) {
res = -EINVAL;
goto out;
}
chan = ieee80211_get_channel(&dev->wiphy,
survey.channel->center_freq);
if (!chan || chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED) {
survey_idx++;
continue;
}
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_survey(skb,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid,
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
netdev,
&survey) < 0)
goto out;
survey_idx++;
}
out:
cb->args[1] = survey_idx;
res = skb->len;
out_err:
nl80211: reduce dumping boilerplate Consolidate boilerplate code needed for .dumpit calls operating on netdevs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:06 +00:00
nl80211_finish_netdev_dump(dev);
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
return res;
}
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
static bool nl80211_valid_wpa_versions(u32 wpa_versions)
{
return !(wpa_versions & ~(NL80211_WPA_VERSION_1 |
NL80211_WPA_VERSION_2));
}
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
static int nl80211_authenticate(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
const u8 *bssid, *ssid, *ie = NULL, *sae_data = NULL;
int err, ssid_len, ie_len = 0, sae_data_len = 0;
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
enum nl80211_auth_type auth_type;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
struct key_parse key;
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
bool local_state_change;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Require auth type for NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE is a required parameter for NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE. We are currently (by chance) defaulting to open system authentication if the attribute is not specified. It is better to just reject the invalid command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 18:52:47 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE])
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ])
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_key(info, &key);
if (err)
return err;
if (key.idx >= 0) {
cfg80211/mac80211: allow per-station GTKs This adds API to allow adding per-station GTKs, updates mac80211 to support it, and also allows drivers to remove a key from hwaccel again when this may be necessary due to multiple GTKs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-05 17:39:30 +00:00
if (key.type != -1 && key.type != NL80211_KEYTYPE_GROUP)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
if (!key.p.key || !key.p.key_len)
return -EINVAL;
if ((key.p.cipher != WLAN_CIPHER_SUITE_WEP40 ||
key.p.key_len != WLAN_KEY_LEN_WEP40) &&
(key.p.cipher != WLAN_CIPHER_SUITE_WEP104 ||
key.p.key_len != WLAN_KEY_LEN_WEP104))
return -EINVAL;
if (key.idx > 4)
return -EINVAL;
} else {
key.p.key_len = 0;
key.p.key = NULL;
}
cfg80211: check if WEP is available for shared key auth When shared key auth is requested, cfg80211 should verify that the device is capable of WEP crypto which is required. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-10 07:46:42 +00:00
if (key.idx >= 0) {
int i;
bool ok = false;
for (i = 0; i < rdev->wiphy.n_cipher_suites; i++) {
if (key.p.cipher == rdev->wiphy.cipher_suites[i]) {
ok = true;
break;
}
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!ok)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: check if WEP is available for shared key auth When shared key auth is requested, cfg80211 should verify that the device is capable of WEP crypto which is required. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-10 07:46:42 +00:00
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->auth)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
chan = ieee80211_get_channel(&rdev->wiphy,
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]));
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!chan || (chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
ssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
ssid_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
ie = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
auth_type = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE]);
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
if (!nl80211_valid_auth_type(rdev, auth_type, NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE))
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
if (auth_type == NL80211_AUTHTYPE_SAE &&
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SAE_DATA])
return -EINVAL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SAE_DATA]) {
if (auth_type != NL80211_AUTHTYPE_SAE)
return -EINVAL;
sae_data = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SAE_DATA]);
sae_data_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SAE_DATA]);
/* need to include at least Auth Transaction and Status Code */
if (sae_data_len < 4)
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
local_state_change = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE];
cfg80211: stop tracking authenticated state To track authenticated state seems to have been a design mistake in cfg80211. It is possible to have out of band authentication (FT), tracking multiple authentications caused more problems than it ever helped, and the implementation in mac80211 is too complex. Remove all this complexity, and let userspace do whatever it wants to, mac80211 can deal with that just fine. Association is still tracked of course, but authentication no longer is. Local auth state changes are thus no longer of value, so ignore them completely. This will also help implement SAE -- asking the driver to do an authentication is now almost equivalent to sending an authentication frame, with the exception of shared key authentication which is still handled completely. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-20 12:55:25 +00:00
/*
* Since we no longer track auth state, ignore
* requests to only change local state.
*/
if (local_state_change)
return 0;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return cfg80211_mlme_auth(rdev, dev, chan, auth_type, bssid,
ssid, ssid_len, ie, ie_len,
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
key.p.key, key.p.key_len, key.idx,
sae_data, sae_data_len);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
cfg80211: allow changing port control protocol Some vendor specified mechanisms for 802.1X-style functionality use a different protocol than EAP (even if EAP is vendor-extensible). Allow setting the ethertype for the protocol when a driver has support for this. The default if unspecified is EAP, of course. Note: This is suitable only for station mode, not for AP implementation. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-27 11:26:53 +00:00
static int nl80211_crypto_settings(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct genl_info *info,
nl80211: limit to one pairwise cipher for associate() In this case, only one cipher makes sense, unlike for connect() where it may be possible to have the card or driver select. No changes to mac80211 due to the way the structs are laid out -- but the loop in net/mac80211/cfg.c will degrade to just zero or one passes. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 19:36:37 +00:00
struct cfg80211_crypto_settings *settings,
int cipher_limit)
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
{
nl80211: add missing parameter clearing Jouni and Maxim reported an oops when using wpa_supplicant -Dnl80211, which seems to be due to random data being contained in the crypto settings for the assoc() command. This seems to be due to the missing memset here, so add it -- it's certainly missing but I'm not 100% certain that it will fix the problem. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-25 14:54:36 +00:00
memset(settings, 0, sizeof(*settings));
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
settings->control_port = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT];
cfg80211: allow changing port control protocol Some vendor specified mechanisms for 802.1X-style functionality use a different protocol than EAP (even if EAP is vendor-extensible). Allow setting the ethertype for the protocol when a driver has support for this. The default if unspecified is EAP, of course. Note: This is suitable only for station mode, not for AP implementation. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-27 11:26:53 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_ETHERTYPE]) {
u16 proto;
proto = nla_get_u16(
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_ETHERTYPE]);
settings->control_port_ethertype = cpu_to_be16(proto);
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_CONTROL_PORT_PROTOCOL) &&
proto != ETH_P_PAE)
return -EINVAL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_NO_ENCRYPT])
settings->control_port_no_encrypt = true;
} else
settings->control_port_ethertype = cpu_to_be16(ETH_P_PAE);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES_PAIRWISE]) {
void *data;
int len, i;
data = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES_PAIRWISE]);
len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES_PAIRWISE]);
settings->n_ciphers_pairwise = len / sizeof(u32);
if (len % sizeof(u32))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: limit to one pairwise cipher for associate() In this case, only one cipher makes sense, unlike for connect() where it may be possible to have the card or driver select. No changes to mac80211 due to the way the structs are laid out -- but the loop in net/mac80211/cfg.c will degrade to just zero or one passes. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 19:36:37 +00:00
if (settings->n_ciphers_pairwise > cipher_limit)
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
memcpy(settings->ciphers_pairwise, data, len);
for (i = 0; i < settings->n_ciphers_pairwise; i++)
cfg80211: Validate cipher suite against supported ciphers Instead of using a hardcoded list of cipher suites in nl80211.c, use a shared function in util.c to verify that the driver advertises support for the specified cipher. This provides more accurate validation of the values and allows vendor-specific cipher suites to be added in drivers. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-21 15:14:56 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_supported_cipher_suite(
&rdev->wiphy,
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
settings->ciphers_pairwise[i]))
return -EINVAL;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITE_GROUP]) {
settings->cipher_group =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITE_GROUP]);
cfg80211: Validate cipher suite against supported ciphers Instead of using a hardcoded list of cipher suites in nl80211.c, use a shared function in util.c to verify that the driver advertises support for the specified cipher. This provides more accurate validation of the values and allows vendor-specific cipher suites to be added in drivers. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-21 15:14:56 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_supported_cipher_suite(&rdev->wiphy,
settings->cipher_group))
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WPA_VERSIONS]) {
settings->wpa_versions =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WPA_VERSIONS]);
if (!nl80211_valid_wpa_versions(settings->wpa_versions))
return -EINVAL;
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES]) {
void *data;
cfg80211: Remove strict validation of AKM suites NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES can be used to configure new AKMs, like FT or the SHA-256 -based AKMs or FT from 802.11r/802.11w. In addition, vendor specific AKMs could be used. The current validation code for the connect command prevents cfg80211-based drivers from using these mechanisms even if the driver would not actually use this AKM value (i.e., it uses WPA/RSN IE from user space). mac80211-based drivers allow any AKM to be used since this value is not used there. Remove the unnecessary validation step in cfg80211 to allow drivers to decide what AKMs are supported. In theory, we could handle this by advertising supported AKMs, but that would not be very effective unless we enforce all drivers (including mac80211) to advertise the set of supported AKMs. This would require additional changes in many places whenever a new AKM is introduced even though no actually functionality changes may be required in most drivers. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-21 15:11:33 +00:00
int len;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
data = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES]);
len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES]);
settings->n_akm_suites = len / sizeof(u32);
if (len % sizeof(u32))
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: Fix validation of AKM suites Incorrect variable was used in validating the akm_suites array from NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES. In addition, there was no explicit validation of the array length (we only have room for NL80211_MAX_NR_AKM_SUITES). This can result in a buffer write overflow for stack variables with arbitrary data from user space. The nl80211 commands using the affected functionality require GENL_ADMIN_PERM, so this is only exposed to admin users. Cc: stable@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-21 13:13:07 +00:00
if (settings->n_akm_suites > NL80211_MAX_NR_AKM_SUITES)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
memcpy(settings->akm_suites, data, len);
}
return 0;
}
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
static int nl80211_associate(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
struct cfg80211_crypto_settings crypto;
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan;
cfg80211: let SME control reassociation vs. association Since we don't really know that well in the kernel, let's let the SME control whether it wants to use reassociation or not, by allowing it to give the previous BSSID in the associate() parameters. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 12:37:26 +00:00
const u8 *bssid, *ssid, *ie = NULL, *prev_bssid = NULL;
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
int err, ssid_len, ie_len = 0;
bool use_mfp = false;
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
u32 flags = 0;
struct ieee80211_ht_cap *ht_capa = NULL;
struct ieee80211_ht_cap *ht_capa_mask = NULL;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC] ||
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ])
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->assoc)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
chan = ieee80211_get_channel(&rdev->wiphy,
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]));
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!chan || (chan->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
ssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
ssid_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
ie = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
nl80211 : Add support for configuring MFP NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE request must be able to indicate whether management frame protection (IEEE 802.11w) is being used. mac80211 was able to use MFP in client mode only with WEXT, but the new NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute will allow this to be done with nl80211, too. Since we are currently using nl80211 for MFP only with drivers that use user space SME, only MFP disabled and required values are used. However, the NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute is an enum that can be extended with MFP optional in the future, if that is needed with some drivers (e.g., if the RSN IE is generated by the driver). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-06 19:09:37 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP]) {
cfg80211: fix MFP bug, sparse warnings sparse warns about a number of things, and one of them (use_mfp shadowed variable) actually is a bug, fix all of them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:10 +00:00
enum nl80211_mfp mfp =
nl80211 : Add support for configuring MFP NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE request must be able to indicate whether management frame protection (IEEE 802.11w) is being used. mac80211 was able to use MFP in client mode only with WEXT, but the new NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute will allow this to be done with nl80211, too. Since we are currently using nl80211 for MFP only with drivers that use user space SME, only MFP disabled and required values are used. However, the NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute is an enum that can be extended with MFP optional in the future, if that is needed with some drivers (e.g., if the RSN IE is generated by the driver). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-06 19:09:37 +00:00
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP]);
cfg80211: fix MFP bug, sparse warnings sparse warns about a number of things, and one of them (use_mfp shadowed variable) actually is a bug, fix all of them. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:10 +00:00
if (mfp == NL80211_MFP_REQUIRED)
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
use_mfp = true;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
else if (mfp != NL80211_MFP_NO)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211 : Add support for configuring MFP NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE request must be able to indicate whether management frame protection (IEEE 802.11w) is being used. mac80211 was able to use MFP in client mode only with WEXT, but the new NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute will allow this to be done with nl80211, too. Since we are currently using nl80211 for MFP only with drivers that use user space SME, only MFP disabled and required values are used. However, the NL80211_ATTR_USE_MFP attribute is an enum that can be extended with MFP optional in the future, if that is needed with some drivers (e.g., if the RSN IE is generated by the driver). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-06 19:09:37 +00:00
}
cfg80211: let SME control reassociation vs. association Since we don't really know that well in the kernel, let's let the SME control whether it wants to use reassociation or not, by allowing it to give the previous BSSID in the associate() parameters. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 12:37:26 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PREV_BSSID])
prev_bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PREV_BSSID]);
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
if (nla_get_flag(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DISABLE_HT]))
flags |= ASSOC_REQ_DISABLE_HT;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK])
ht_capa_mask =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY]) {
if (!ht_capa_mask)
return -EINVAL;
ht_capa = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY]);
}
cfg80211: allow changing port control protocol Some vendor specified mechanisms for 802.1X-style functionality use a different protocol than EAP (even if EAP is vendor-extensible). Allow setting the ethertype for the protocol when a driver has support for this. The default if unspecified is EAP, of course. Note: This is suitable only for station mode, not for AP implementation. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-27 11:26:53 +00:00
err = nl80211_crypto_settings(rdev, info, &crypto, 1);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (!err)
cfg80211: let SME control reassociation vs. association Since we don't really know that well in the kernel, let's let the SME control whether it wants to use reassociation or not, by allowing it to give the previous BSSID in the associate() parameters. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 12:37:26 +00:00
err = cfg80211_mlme_assoc(rdev, dev, chan, bssid, prev_bssid,
ssid, ssid_len, ie, ie_len, use_mfp,
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
&crypto, flags, ht_capa,
ht_capa_mask);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_deauthenticate(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
const u8 *ie = NULL, *bssid;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
int ie_len = 0;
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
u16 reason_code;
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
bool local_state_change;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->deauth)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
reason_code = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE]);
if (reason_code == 0) {
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
/* Reason Code 0 is reserved */
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Add more through validation of MLME command parameters Check that the used authentication type and reason code are valid here so that drivers/mac80211 do not need to care about this. In addition, remove the unnecessary validation of SSID attribute length which is taken care of by netlink policy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:17 +00:00
}
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
ie = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
local_state_change = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE];
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return cfg80211_mlme_deauth(rdev, dev, bssid, ie, ie_len, reason_code,
local_state_change);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_disassociate(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
const u8 *ie = NULL, *bssid;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
int ie_len = 0;
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
u16 reason_code;
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
bool local_state_change;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->disassoc)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: Check iftype in cfg80211 code We do not want to require all the drivers using cfg80211 to need to do this. In addition, make the error values consistent by using EOPNOTSUPP instead of semi-random assortment of errno values. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:19 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
reason_code = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE]);
if (reason_code == 0) {
nl80211: validate some input better This patch changes nl80211 to: * validate that any IE input is a valid IE (stream) * move some validation code before locking * require that a reason code is given for both deauth/disassoc Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 11:40:28 +00:00
/* Reason Code 0 is reserved */
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: Add more through validation of MLME command parameters Check that the used authentication type and reason code are valid here so that drivers/mac80211 do not need to care about this. In addition, remove the unnecessary validation of SSID attribute length which is taken care of by netlink policy. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-20 19:21:17 +00:00
}
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
cfg80211: keep track of BSSes In order to avoid problems with BSS structs going away while they're in use, I've long wanted to make cfg80211 keep track of them. Without the SME, that wasn't doable but now that we have the SME we can do this too. It can keep track of up to four separate authentications and one association, regardless of whether it's controlled by the cfg80211 SME or the userspace SME. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 15:20:43 +00:00
ie = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
cfg80211: Add local-state-change-only auth/deauth/disassoc cfg80211 is quite strict on allowing authentication and association commands only in certain states. In order to meet these requirements, user space applications may need to clear authentication or association state in some cases. Currently, this can be done with deauth/disassoc command, but that ends up sending out Deauthentication or Disassociation frame unnecessarily. Add a new nl80211 attribute to allow this sending of the frame be skipped, but with all other deauth/disassoc operations being completed. Similar state change is also needed for IEEE 802.11r FT protocol in the FT-over-DS case which does not use Authentication frame exchange in a transition to another BSS. For this to work with cfg80211, an authentication entry needs to be created for the target BSS without sending out an Authentication frame. The nl80211 authentication command can be used for this purpose, too, with the new attribute to indicate that the command is only for changing local state. This enables wpa_supplicant to complete FT-over-DS transition successfully. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-04-04 06:37:19 +00:00
local_state_change = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_LOCAL_STATE_CHANGE];
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return cfg80211_mlme_disassoc(rdev, dev, bssid, ie, ie_len, reason_code,
local_state_change);
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: improve ad-hoc multicast rate handling - store the multicast rate as an index instead of the rate value (reduces cpu overhead in a hotpath) - validate the rate values (must match a bitrate in at least one sband) Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-22 19:58:24 +00:00
static bool
nl80211_parse_mcast_rate(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS],
int rateval)
{
struct wiphy *wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
bool found = false;
int band, i;
for (band = 0; band < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; band++) {
struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
sband = wiphy->bands[band];
if (!sband)
continue;
for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) {
if (sband->bitrates[i].bitrate == rateval) {
mcast_rate[band] = i + 1;
found = true;
break;
}
}
}
return found;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
static int nl80211_join_ibss(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
struct cfg80211_ibss_params ibss;
struct wiphy *wiphy;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
struct cfg80211_cached_keys *connkeys = NULL;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: allow configuring IBSS beacon interval Make the JOIN_IBSS command look at the beacon interval attribute to see if the user requested a specific beacon interval, if not default to 100 TU (wext too). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 15:45:38 +00:00
memset(&ibss, 0, sizeof(ibss));
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID] ||
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
!nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: allow configuring IBSS beacon interval Make the JOIN_IBSS command look at the beacon interval attribute to see if the user requested a specific beacon interval, if not default to 100 TU (wext too). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 15:45:38 +00:00
ibss.beacon_interval = 100;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_INTERVAL]) {
ibss.beacon_interval =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BEACON_INTERVAL]);
if (ibss.beacon_interval < 1 || ibss.beacon_interval > 10000)
return -EINVAL;
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->join_ibss)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
cfg80211: validate IBSS BSSID The IBSS BSSID is never validated, so an invalid one might end up being used. Fix this by rejecting invalid configuration. Reported-by: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 11:45:25 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]) {
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
ibss.bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211: validate IBSS BSSID The IBSS BSSID is never validated, so an invalid one might end up being used. Fix this by rejecting invalid configuration. Reported-by: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 11:45:25 +00:00
if (!is_valid_ether_addr(ibss.bssid))
return -EINVAL;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
ibss.ssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
ibss.ssid_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
ibss.ie = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
ibss.ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
}
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_chandef(rdev, info, &ibss.chandef);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!cfg80211_reg_can_beacon(&rdev->wiphy, &ibss.chandef))
nl80211: Parse channel type attribute in an ibss join request Prepare cfg80211 for IBSS HT: * extend cfg80211 ibss struct with channel_type * Check if extension channel can be used * Export can_beacon_sec_chan for use in mac80211 (will be called from ibss.c later). Signed-off-by: Alexander Simon <an.alexsimon@googlemail.com> [siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de: Updates] * fix cfg80211_can_beacon_ext_chan comment * remove implicit channel_type enum assumptions * remove radar channel flags check * add HT IBSS feature flag * reword commit message Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-30 15:56:32 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: add VHT MCS support Add support for reporting and calculating VHT MCSes. Note that I'm not completely sure that the bitrate calculations are correct, nor that they can't be simplified. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-09 13:56:41 +00:00
if (ibss.chandef.width > NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40)
return -EINVAL;
if (ibss.chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT &&
!(rdev->wiphy.features & NL80211_FEATURE_HT_IBSS))
nl80211: Fix HT_IBSS feature check in ibss_join There is a standalone if, seems to be a regression of commit "nl80211/cfg80211: add VHT MCS support". Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-29 17:37:22 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: add VHT MCS support Add support for reporting and calculating VHT MCSes. Note that I'm not completely sure that the bitrate calculations are correct, nor that they can't be simplified. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-09 13:56:41 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
ibss.channel_fixed = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_FIXED];
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
ibss.privacy = !!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PRIVACY];
mac80211: Set basic rates while joining ibss network This patch adds support to nl80211 and mac80211 to set basic rates when joining/creating ibss network. Original patch was posted by Johannes Berg on the linux-wireless posting list. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Teemu Paasikivi <ext-teemu.3.paasikivi@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-14 09:55:31 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES]) {
u8 *rates =
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES]);
int n_rates =
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BSS_BASIC_RATES]);
struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband =
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
wiphy->bands[ibss.chandef.chan->band];
mac80211: Set basic rates while joining ibss network This patch adds support to nl80211 and mac80211 to set basic rates when joining/creating ibss network. Original patch was posted by Johannes Berg on the linux-wireless posting list. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Teemu Paasikivi <ext-teemu.3.paasikivi@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-14 09:55:31 +00:00
cfg80211: allow userspace to control supported rates in scan Some P2P scans are not allowed to advertise 11b rates, but that is a rather special case so instead of having that, allow userspace to request the rate sets (per band) that are advertised in scan probe request frames. Since it's needed in two places now, factor out some common code parsing a rate array. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-18 16:08:35 +00:00
err = ieee80211_get_ratemask(sband, rates, n_rates,
&ibss.basic_rates);
if (err)
return err;
mac80211: Set basic rates while joining ibss network This patch adds support to nl80211 and mac80211 to set basic rates when joining/creating ibss network. Original patch was posted by Johannes Berg on the linux-wireless posting list. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Teemu Paasikivi <ext-teemu.3.paasikivi@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-14 09:55:31 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: improve ad-hoc multicast rate handling - store the multicast rate as an index instead of the rate value (reduces cpu overhead in a hotpath) - validate the rate values (must match a bitrate in at least one sband) Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-22 19:58:24 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE] &&
!nl80211_parse_mcast_rate(rdev, ibss.mcast_rate,
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE])))
return -EINVAL;
mac80211: Set basic rates while joining ibss network This patch adds support to nl80211 and mac80211 to set basic rates when joining/creating ibss network. Original patch was posted by Johannes Berg on the linux-wireless posting list. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Teemu Paasikivi <ext-teemu.3.paasikivi@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-06-14 09:55:31 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ibss.privacy && info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEYS]) {
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
bool no_ht = false;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
connkeys = nl80211_parse_connkeys(rdev,
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEYS],
&no_ht);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(connkeys))
return PTR_ERR(connkeys);
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: support VHT channel configuration Change nl80211 to support specifying a VHT (or HT) using the control channel frequency (as before) and new attributes for the channel width and first and second center frequency. The old channel type is of course still supported for HT. Also change the cfg80211 channel definition struct to support these by adding the relevant fields to it (and removing the _type field.) This also adds new helper functions: - cfg80211_chandef_create to create a channel def struct given the control channel and channel type, - cfg80211_chandef_identical to check if two channel definitions are identical - cfg80211_chandef_compatible to check if the given channel definitions are compatible, and return the wider of the two This isn't entirely complete, but that doesn't matter until we have a driver using it. In particular, it's missing - regulatory checks on the usable bandwidth (if that even makes sense) - regulatory TX power (database can't deal with it) - a proper channel compatibility calculation for the new channel types Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 22:14:50 +00:00
if ((ibss.chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT) &&
no_ht) {
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
kfree(connkeys);
return -EINVAL;
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: userspace peer authorization in IBSS If the IBSS network is RSN-protected, let userspace authorize the stations instead of adding them as AUTHORIZED by default. Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-31 19:25:47 +00:00
ibss.control_port =
nla_get_flag(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
err = cfg80211_join_ibss(rdev, dev, &ibss, connkeys);
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
if (err)
kfree(connkeys);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_leave_ibss(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->leave_ibss)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return cfg80211_leave_ibss(rdev, dev, false);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
}
nl/cfg80211: add the NL80211_CMD_SET_MCAST_RATE command This command triggers a new callback: set_mcast_rate(). It enables the user to change the rate used to send multicast frames for vif configured as IBSS or MESH_POINT Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-02 12:27:48 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_mcast_rate(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
u32 nla_rate;
int err;
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC &&
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!rdev->ops->set_mcast_rate)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
memset(mcast_rate, 0, sizeof(mcast_rate));
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE])
return -EINVAL;
nla_rate = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE]);
if (!nl80211_parse_mcast_rate(rdev, mcast_rate, nla_rate))
return -EINVAL;
err = rdev->ops->set_mcast_rate(&rdev->wiphy, dev, mcast_rate);
return err;
}
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
static struct genl_multicast_group nl80211_testmode_mcgrp = {
.name = "testmode",
};
static int nl80211_testmode_do(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
int err;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA])
return -EINVAL;
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (rdev->ops->testmode_cmd) {
rdev->testmode_info = info;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_testmode_cmd(rdev,
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA]),
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA]));
rdev->testmode_info = NULL;
}
return err;
}
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_testmode_dump(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct netlink_callback *cb)
{
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
int err;
long phy_idx;
void *data = NULL;
int data_len = 0;
if (cb->args[0]) {
/*
* 0 is a valid index, but not valid for args[0],
* so we need to offset by 1.
*/
phy_idx = cb->args[0] - 1;
} else {
err = nlmsg_parse(cb->nlh, GENL_HDRLEN + nl80211_fam.hdrsize,
nl80211_fam.attrbuf, nl80211_fam.maxattr,
nl80211_policy);
if (err)
return err;
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
nl80211: use __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs for testmode To fix the testmode cross-namespace access problem, use __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs() to get the device instead of open-coding similar functionality. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:23:16 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
rdev = __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs(sock_net(skb->sk),
nl80211_fam.attrbuf);
if (IS_ERR(rdev)) {
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
return PTR_ERR(rdev);
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
}
nl80211: use __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs for testmode To fix the testmode cross-namespace access problem, use __cfg80211_rdev_from_attrs() to get the device instead of open-coding similar functionality. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:23:16 +00:00
phy_idx = rdev->wiphy_idx;
rdev = NULL;
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
if (nl80211_fam.attrbuf[NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA])
cb->args[1] =
(long)nl80211_fam.attrbuf[NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA];
}
if (cb->args[1]) {
data = nla_data((void *)cb->args[1]);
data_len = nla_len((void *)cb->args[1]);
}
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
rdev = cfg80211_rdev_by_wiphy_idx(phy_idx);
if (!rdev) {
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
return -ENOENT;
}
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
cfg80211_lock_rdev(rdev);
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->testmode_dump) {
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out_err;
}
while (1) {
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
void *hdr = nl80211hdr_put(skb, NETLINK_CB(cb->skb).portid,
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
cb->nlh->nlmsg_seq, NLM_F_MULTI,
NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE);
struct nlattr *tmdata;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(skb, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, phy_idx)) {
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
genlmsg_cancel(skb, hdr);
break;
}
tmdata = nla_nest_start(skb, NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA);
if (!tmdata) {
genlmsg_cancel(skb, hdr);
break;
}
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_testmode_dump(rdev, skb, cb, data, data_len);
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
nla_nest_end(skb, tmdata);
if (err == -ENOBUFS || err == -ENOENT) {
genlmsg_cancel(skb, hdr);
break;
} else if (err) {
genlmsg_cancel(skb, hdr);
goto out_err;
}
genlmsg_end(skb, hdr);
}
err = skb->len;
/* see above */
cb->args[0] = phy_idx + 1;
out_err:
nl80211: accept testmode dump with netdev All nl80211 commands that need only the wiphy still allow identifying it by giving an interface index, except, as Kenny pointed out, the testmode dump support. Fix this by looking up the wiphy via the ifidx in this case as well. Tested-by: Kenny Hsu <kenny.hsu@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-12-13 16:22:05 +00:00
cfg80211_unlock_rdev(rdev);
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
return err;
}
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
static struct sk_buff *
__cfg80211_testmode_alloc_skb(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
int approxlen, u32 portid, u32 seq, gfp_t gfp)
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *skb;
void *hdr;
struct nlattr *data;
skb = nlmsg_new(approxlen + 100, gfp);
if (!skb)
return NULL;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(skb, portid, seq, 0, NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE);
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
if (!hdr) {
kfree_skb(skb);
return NULL;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(skb, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
data = nla_nest_start(skb, NL80211_ATTR_TESTDATA);
((void **)skb->cb)[0] = rdev;
((void **)skb->cb)[1] = hdr;
((void **)skb->cb)[2] = data;
return skb;
nla_put_failure:
kfree_skb(skb);
return NULL;
}
struct sk_buff *cfg80211_testmode_alloc_reply_skb(struct wiphy *wiphy,
int approxlen)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wiphy);
if (WARN_ON(!rdev->testmode_info))
return NULL;
return __cfg80211_testmode_alloc_skb(rdev, approxlen,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
rdev->testmode_info->snd_portid,
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
rdev->testmode_info->snd_seq,
GFP_KERNEL);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_testmode_alloc_reply_skb);
int cfg80211_testmode_reply(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = ((void **)skb->cb)[0];
void *hdr = ((void **)skb->cb)[1];
struct nlattr *data = ((void **)skb->cb)[2];
if (WARN_ON(!rdev->testmode_info)) {
kfree_skb(skb);
return -EINVAL;
}
nla_nest_end(skb, data);
genlmsg_end(skb, hdr);
return genlmsg_reply(skb, rdev->testmode_info);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_testmode_reply);
struct sk_buff *cfg80211_testmode_alloc_event_skb(struct wiphy *wiphy,
int approxlen, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wiphy);
return __cfg80211_testmode_alloc_skb(rdev, approxlen, 0, 0, gfp);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_testmode_alloc_event_skb);
void cfg80211_testmode_event(struct sk_buff *skb, gfp_t gfp)
{
void *hdr = ((void **)skb->cb)[1];
struct nlattr *data = ((void **)skb->cb)[2];
nla_nest_end(skb, data);
genlmsg_end(skb, hdr);
genlmsg_multicast(skb, 0, nl80211_testmode_mcgrp.id, gfp);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_testmode_event);
#endif
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_connect(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
struct cfg80211_connect_params connect;
struct wiphy *wiphy;
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
struct cfg80211_cached_keys *connkeys = NULL;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
int err;
memset(&connect, 0, sizeof(connect));
if (!is_valid_ie_attr(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]))
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID] ||
!nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]))
return -EINVAL;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE]) {
connect.auth_type =
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE]);
cfg80211: Allow user space to specify non-IEs to SAE Authentication SAE extends Authentication frames with fields that are not information elements. NL80211_ATTR_IE is not suitable for these, so introduce a new attribute that can be used to specify the fields needed for SAE in station mode. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> [change to verify that SAE is only used with authenticate command] Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-30 16:29:39 +00:00
if (!nl80211_valid_auth_type(rdev, connect.auth_type,
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT))
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
} else
connect.auth_type = NL80211_AUTHTYPE_AUTOMATIC;
connect.privacy = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PRIVACY];
cfg80211: allow changing port control protocol Some vendor specified mechanisms for 802.1X-style functionality use a different protocol than EAP (even if EAP is vendor-extensible). Allow setting the ethertype for the protocol when a driver has support for this. The default if unspecified is EAP, of course. Note: This is suitable only for station mode, not for AP implementation. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-27 11:26:53 +00:00
err = nl80211_crypto_settings(rdev, info, &connect.crypto,
nl80211: limit to one pairwise cipher for associate() In this case, only one cipher makes sense, unlike for connect() where it may be possible to have the card or driver select. No changes to mac80211 due to the way the structs are laid out -- but the loop in net/mac80211/cfg.c will degrade to just zero or one passes. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-02 19:36:37 +00:00
NL80211_MAX_NR_CIPHER_SUITES);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
cfg80211: clean up naming once and for all We've named the registered devices 'drv' sometimes, thinking of "driver", which is not what it is, it's the internal representation of a wiphy, i.e. a device. Let's clean up the naming once and and use 'rdev' aka 'registered device' everywhere. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:12 +00:00
wiphy = &rdev->wiphy;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
cfg80211: Add background scan period attribute. Receive background scan period as part of connect command and pass the same to the driver. Signed-off-by: Bala Shanmugam <bkamatch@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-07 11:57:12 +00:00
connect.bg_scan_period = -1;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BG_SCAN_PERIOD] &&
(wiphy->flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_FW_ROAM)) {
connect.bg_scan_period =
nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_BG_SCAN_PERIOD]);
}
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
connect.bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
connect.ssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
connect.ssid_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_SSID]);
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]) {
connect.ie = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
connect.ie_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]);
}
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]) {
connect.channel =
ieee80211_get_channel(wiphy,
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]));
if (!connect.channel ||
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
connect.channel->flags & IEEE80211_CHAN_DISABLED)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
}
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
if (connect.privacy && info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEYS]) {
connkeys = nl80211_parse_connkeys(rdev,
cfg80211: Disallow HT/WEP in IBSS mode Currently, a user is allowed to choose a HT operating channel with WEP when creating an IBSS network. WEP is not allowed in HT configuration - this patch ensures that such requests are denied. Signed-off-by: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qti.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-18 04:49:28 +00:00
info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_KEYS], NULL);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(connkeys))
return PTR_ERR(connkeys);
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
}
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
if (nla_get_flag(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DISABLE_HT]))
connect.flags |= ASSOC_REQ_DISABLE_HT;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK])
memcpy(&connect.ht_capa_mask,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK]),
sizeof(connect.ht_capa_mask));
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY]) {
nl80211: fix possible memory leak nl80211_connect() connkeys is malloced in nl80211_parse_connkeys() and should be freed in the error handling case, otherwise it will cause memory leak. spatch with a semantic match is used to found this problem. (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) Signed-off-by: Wei Yongjun <yongjun_wei@trendmicro.com.cn> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-02 13:41:04 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY_MASK]) {
kfree(connkeys);
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: fix possible memory leak nl80211_connect() connkeys is malloced in nl80211_parse_connkeys() and should be freed in the error handling case, otherwise it will cause memory leak. spatch with a semantic match is used to found this problem. (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) Signed-off-by: Wei Yongjun <yongjun_wei@trendmicro.com.cn> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-02 13:41:04 +00:00
}
wireless: Support ht-capabilities over-rides. This allows users to disable features such as HT, HT40, and to modify the MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU settings for drivers that support it. The MCS, AMPDU, and AMSDU features that may be disabled are are reported in the phy-info netlink message as a mask. Attemping to disable features that are not supported will take no affect, but will not return errors. This is to aid backwards compatibility in user-space apps that may not be clever enough to deal with parsing the the capabilities mask. This patch only enables the infrastructure. An additional patch will enable the feature in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 19:31:59 +00:00
memcpy(&connect.ht_capa,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_HT_CAPABILITY]),
sizeof(connect.ht_capa));
}
cfg80211: rework key operation This reworks the key operation in cfg80211, and now only allows, from userspace, configuring keys (via nl80211) after the connection has been established (in managed mode), the IBSS been joined (in IBSS mode), at any time (in AP[_VLAN] modes) or never for all the other modes. In order to do shared key authentication correctly, it is now possible to give a WEP key to the AUTH command. To configure static WEP keys, these are given to the CONNECT or IBSS_JOIN command directly, for a userspace SME it is assumed it will configure it properly after the connection has been established. Since mac80211 used to check the default key in IBSS mode to see whether or not the network is protected, it needs an update in that area, as well as an update to make use of the WEP key passed to auth() for shared key authentication. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-08 12:22:54 +00:00
err = cfg80211_connect(rdev, dev, &connect, connkeys);
if (err)
kfree(connkeys);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_disconnect(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
u16 reason;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE])
reason = WLAN_REASON_DEAUTH_LEAVING;
else
reason = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE]);
if (reason == 0)
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return cfg80211_disconnect(rdev, dev, reason, true);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
}
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_wiphy_netns(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
struct net *net;
int err;
u32 pid;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PID])
return -EINVAL;
pid = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PID]);
net = get_net_ns_by_pid(pid);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(net))
return PTR_ERR(net);
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
err = 0;
/* check if anything to do */
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!net_eq(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), net))
err = cfg80211_switch_netns(rdev, net);
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
put_net(net);
return err;
}
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
static int nl80211_setdel_pmksa(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
int (*rdev_ops)(struct wiphy *wiphy, struct net_device *dev,
struct cfg80211_pmksa *pmksa) = NULL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
struct cfg80211_pmksa pmksa;
memset(&pmksa, 0, sizeof(struct cfg80211_pmksa));
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PMKID])
return -EINVAL;
pmksa.pmkid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PMKID]);
pmksa.bssid = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
switch (info->genlhdr->cmd) {
case NL80211_CMD_SET_PMKSA:
rdev_ops = rdev->ops->set_pmksa;
break;
case NL80211_CMD_DEL_PMKSA:
rdev_ops = rdev->ops->del_pmksa;
break;
default:
WARN_ON(1);
break;
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev_ops)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return rdev_ops(&rdev->wiphy, dev, &pmksa);
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_flush_pmksa(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
dev->ieee80211_ptr->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->flush_pmksa)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_flush_pmksa(rdev, dev);
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
}
nl80211: support sending TDLS commands/frames Add support for sending high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames via NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER and NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT, respectively. Add appropriate cfg80211 callbacks for lower level drivers. Add wiphy capability flags for TDLS support and advertise them via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-28 11:12:50 +00:00
static int nl80211_tdls_mgmt(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
u8 action_code, dialog_token;
u16 status_code;
u8 *peer;
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_TDLS) ||
!rdev->ops->tdls_mgmt)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_ACTION] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STATUS_CODE] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_DIALOG_TOKEN] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
peer = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
action_code = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_ACTION]);
status_code = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_STATUS_CODE]);
dialog_token = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_DIALOG_TOKEN]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_tdls_mgmt(rdev, dev, peer, action_code,
dialog_token, status_code,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]),
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_IE]));
nl80211: support sending TDLS commands/frames Add support for sending high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames via NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER and NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT, respectively. Add appropriate cfg80211 callbacks for lower level drivers. Add wiphy capability flags for TDLS support and advertise them via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-28 11:12:50 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_tdls_oper(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
enum nl80211_tdls_operation operation;
u8 *peer;
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_SUPPORTS_TDLS) ||
!rdev->ops->tdls_oper)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_OPERATION] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
operation = nla_get_u8(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_OPERATION]);
peer = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_tdls_oper(rdev, dev, peer, operation);
nl80211: support sending TDLS commands/frames Add support for sending high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames via NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER and NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT, respectively. Add appropriate cfg80211 callbacks for lower level drivers. Add wiphy capability flags for TDLS support and advertise them via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-28 11:12:50 +00:00
}
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
static int nl80211_remain_on_channel(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
u64 cookie;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
u32 duration;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
int err;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ] ||
!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DURATION])
return -EINVAL;
duration = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DURATION]);
cfg80211: validate remain-on-channel time better The remain-on-channel time validation shouldn't depend on the value of HZ, as it does now with the check against jiffies, since then you might use a value that works on one system but not on another. Fix it by checking against a minimum that's fixed. Also add validation of the wait duration for a management frame TX since this also translates into remain-on-channel internally. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-01 10:50:54 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->remain_on_channel ||
!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_HAS_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
/*
cfg80211: validate remain-on-channel time better The remain-on-channel time validation shouldn't depend on the value of HZ, as it does now with the check against jiffies, since then you might use a value that works on one system but not on another. Fix it by checking against a minimum that's fixed. Also add validation of the wait duration for a management frame TX since this also translates into remain-on-channel internally. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-01 10:50:54 +00:00
* We should be on that channel for at least a minimum amount of
* time (10ms) but no longer than the driver supports.
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
*/
cfg80211: validate remain-on-channel time better The remain-on-channel time validation shouldn't depend on the value of HZ, as it does now with the check against jiffies, since then you might use a value that works on one system but not on another. Fix it by checking against a minimum that's fixed. Also add validation of the wait duration for a management frame TX since this also translates into remain-on-channel internally. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-01 10:50:54 +00:00
if (duration < NL80211_MIN_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL_TIME ||
nl80211: advertise maximum remain-on-channel duration With the upcoming hardware offload implementation, some devices will have a different maximum duration for the remain-on-channel command. Advertise the maximum duration in mac80211, and make mac80211 set it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-14 16:54:28 +00:00
duration > rdev->wiphy.max_remain_on_channel_duration)
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_chandef(rdev, info, &chandef);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL);
if (IS_ERR(hdr)) {
err = PTR_ERR(hdr);
goto free_msg;
}
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = rdev_remain_on_channel(rdev, wdev, chandef.chan,
duration, &cookie);
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
if (err)
goto free_msg;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE, cookie))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
nla_put_failure:
err = -ENOBUFS;
free_msg:
nlmsg_free(msg);
return err;
}
static int nl80211_cancel_remain_on_channel(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
u64 cookie;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->cancel_remain_on_channel)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
cookie = nla_get_u64(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_cancel_remain_on_channel(rdev, wdev, cookie);
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
}
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
static u32 rateset_to_mask(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
u8 *rates, u8 rates_len)
{
u8 i;
u32 mask = 0;
for (i = 0; i < rates_len; i++) {
int rate = (rates[i] & 0x7f) * 5;
int ridx;
for (ridx = 0; ridx < sband->n_bitrates; ridx++) {
struct ieee80211_rate *srate =
&sband->bitrates[ridx];
if (rate == srate->bitrate) {
mask |= 1 << ridx;
break;
}
}
if (ridx == sband->n_bitrates)
return 0; /* rate not found */
}
return mask;
}
nl80211: add support for mcs masks Allow to set mcs masks through nl80211. We also allow to set MCS rates but no legacy rates (and vice versa). Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-28 16:25:32 +00:00
static bool ht_rateset_to_mask(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
u8 *rates, u8 rates_len,
u8 mcs[IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN])
{
u8 i;
memset(mcs, 0, IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN);
for (i = 0; i < rates_len; i++) {
int ridx, rbit;
ridx = rates[i] / 8;
rbit = BIT(rates[i] % 8);
/* check validity */
mac80211: off by one in mcs mask handling "ridx" is used as an index into the mcs_mask[] array which has IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN elements. Signed-off-by: Dan Carpenter <dan.carpenter@oracle.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-01 07:42:11 +00:00
if ((ridx < 0) || (ridx >= IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN))
nl80211: add support for mcs masks Allow to set mcs masks through nl80211. We also allow to set MCS rates but no legacy rates (and vice versa). Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-28 16:25:32 +00:00
return false;
/* check availability */
if (sband->ht_cap.mcs.rx_mask[ridx] & rbit)
mcs[ridx] |= rbit;
else
return false;
}
return true;
}
const: struct nla_policy Make remaining netlink policies as const. Fixup coding style where needed. Signed-off-by: Alexey Dobriyan <adobriyan@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2010-02-18 08:14:31 +00:00
static const struct nla_policy nl80211_txattr_policy[NL80211_TXRATE_MAX + 1] = {
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
[NL80211_TXRATE_LEGACY] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = NL80211_MAX_SUPP_RATES },
nl80211: add support for mcs masks Allow to set mcs masks through nl80211. We also allow to set MCS rates but no legacy rates (and vice versa). Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-28 16:25:32 +00:00
[NL80211_TXRATE_MCS] = { .type = NLA_BINARY,
.len = NL80211_MAX_SUPP_HT_RATES },
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
};
static int nl80211_set_tx_bitrate_mask(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
struct nlattr *tb[NL80211_TXRATE_MAX + 1];
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask mask;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
int rem, i;
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
struct nlattr *tx_rates;
struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TX_RATES] == NULL)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_bitrate_mask)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
memset(&mask, 0, sizeof(mask));
/* Default to all rates enabled */
for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS; i++) {
sband = rdev->wiphy.bands[i];
mask.control[i].legacy =
sband ? (1 << sband->n_bitrates) - 1 : 0;
nl80211: add support for mcs masks Allow to set mcs masks through nl80211. We also allow to set MCS rates but no legacy rates (and vice versa). Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-28 16:25:32 +00:00
if (sband)
memcpy(mask.control[i].mcs,
sband->ht_cap.mcs.rx_mask,
sizeof(mask.control[i].mcs));
else
memset(mask.control[i].mcs, 0,
sizeof(mask.control[i].mcs));
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
}
/*
* The nested attribute uses enum nl80211_band as the index. This maps
* directly to the enum ieee80211_band values used in cfg80211.
*/
nl80211: add support for mcs masks Allow to set mcs masks through nl80211. We also allow to set MCS rates but no legacy rates (and vice versa). Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-28 16:25:32 +00:00
BUILD_BUG_ON(NL80211_MAX_SUPP_HT_RATES > IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN * 8);
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
nla_for_each_nested(tx_rates, info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TX_RATES], rem)
{
enum ieee80211_band band = nla_type(tx_rates);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (band < 0 || band >= IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
sband = rdev->wiphy.bands[band];
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (sband == NULL)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
nla_parse(tb, NL80211_TXRATE_MAX, nla_data(tx_rates),
nla_len(tx_rates), nl80211_txattr_policy);
if (tb[NL80211_TXRATE_LEGACY]) {
mask.control[band].legacy = rateset_to_mask(
sband,
nla_data(tb[NL80211_TXRATE_LEGACY]),
nla_len(tb[NL80211_TXRATE_LEGACY]));
cfg80211: Validate legacy rateset. Legacy rates are not validated while configuring tx rateset using iw. So below cmd is accepted by nl80211. sudo iw wlan2 set bitrates legacy-2.4 1 2 3 Validate legacy rates and return error if any rate in the rateset is not valid. Signed-off-by: Bala Shanmugam <bkamatch@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-20 13:42:58 +00:00
if ((mask.control[band].legacy == 0) &&
nla_len(tb[NL80211_TXRATE_LEGACY]))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: add support for mcs masks Allow to set mcs masks through nl80211. We also allow to set MCS rates but no legacy rates (and vice versa). Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-01-28 16:25:32 +00:00
}
if (tb[NL80211_TXRATE_MCS]) {
if (!ht_rateset_to_mask(
sband,
nla_data(tb[NL80211_TXRATE_MCS]),
nla_len(tb[NL80211_TXRATE_MCS]),
mask.control[band].mcs))
return -EINVAL;
}
if (mask.control[band].legacy == 0) {
/* don't allow empty legacy rates if HT
* is not even supported. */
if (!rdev->wiphy.bands[band]->ht_cap.ht_supported)
return -EINVAL;
for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN; i++)
if (mask.control[band].mcs[i])
break;
/* legacy and mcs rates may not be both empty */
if (i == IEEE80211_HT_MCS_MASK_LEN)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
}
}
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_set_bitrate_mask(rdev, dev, NULL, &mask);
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
static int nl80211_register_mgmt(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
u16 frame_type = IEEE80211_FTYPE_MGMT | IEEE80211_STYPE_ACTION;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_MATCH])
return -EINVAL;
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_TYPE])
frame_type = nla_get_u16(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_TYPE]);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
switch (wdev->iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_DEVICE:
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
break;
default:
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
/* not much point in registering if we can't reply */
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->mgmt_tx)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
return cfg80211_mlme_register_mgmt(wdev, info->snd_portid, frame_type,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_MATCH]),
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME_MATCH]));
}
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
static int nl80211_tx_mgmt(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
int err;
nl80211: fix compiler warning John reported the following warning: net/wireless/nl80211.c: In function ‘nl80211_tx_mgmt’: net/wireless/nl80211.c:5286:8: warning: ‘hdr’ may be used uninitialized in this function Evidently, his version of gcc isn't able to see that when "msg" is initialized, "hdr" must also be. My gcc, 4.6.1, can actually see that and doesn't warn. Simply initialize the variable to NULL. That means if the compiler was ever right we'll crash though so isn't really optimal since it may hide warnings from the compiler when somebody modifies this code in the future. Reported-by: John Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-10 08:44:46 +00:00
void *hdr = NULL;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
u64 cookie;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg = NULL;
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
unsigned int wait = 0;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
bool offchan, no_cck, dont_wait_for_ack;
dont_wait_for_ack = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DONT_WAIT_FOR_ACK];
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME])
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->mgmt_tx)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
switch (wdev->iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_DEVICE:
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
break;
default:
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DURATION]) {
cfg80211: add flags for off-channel capabilities Currently mac80211 implements these for all devices, but given restrictions of some devices that isn't really true, so prepare for being able to remove the capability for some mac80211 devices. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Acked-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 14:33:48 +00:00
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_OFFCHAN_TX))
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
wait = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_DURATION]);
cfg80211: validate remain-on-channel time better The remain-on-channel time validation shouldn't depend on the value of HZ, as it does now with the check against jiffies, since then you might use a value that works on one system but not on another. Fix it by checking against a minimum that's fixed. Also add validation of the wait duration for a management frame TX since this also translates into remain-on-channel internally. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-06-01 10:50:54 +00:00
/*
* We should wait on the channel for at least a minimum amount
* of time (10ms) but no longer than the driver supports.
*/
if (wait < NL80211_MIN_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL_TIME ||
wait > rdev->wiphy.max_remain_on_channel_duration)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
}
offchan = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_OFFCHANNEL_TX_OK];
cfg80211: add flags for off-channel capabilities Currently mac80211 implements these for all devices, but given restrictions of some devices that isn't really true, so prepare for being able to remove the capability for some mac80211 devices. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Acked-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 14:33:48 +00:00
if (offchan && !(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_OFFCHAN_TX))
return -EINVAL;
nl80211/cfg80211: Add support to disable CCK rate for management frame Add a new nl80211 attribute to specify whether to send the management frames in CCK rate or not. As of now the wpa_supplicant is disabling CCK rate at P2P init itself. So this patch helps to send P2P probe request/probe response/action frames being sent at non CCK rate in 2GHz without disabling 11b rates. This attribute is used with NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_FRAME commands to disable CCK rate for management frame transmission. Cc: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-25 09:23:30 +00:00
no_cck = nla_get_flag(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_TX_NO_CCK_RATE]);
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_chandef(rdev, info, &chandef);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
if (!dont_wait_for_ack) {
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_FRAME);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(hdr)) {
err = PTR_ERR(hdr);
goto free_msg;
}
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = cfg80211_mlme_mgmt_tx(rdev, wdev, chandef.chan, offchan, wait,
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME]),
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_FRAME]),
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
no_cck, dont_wait_for_ack, &cookie);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
if (err)
goto free_msg;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
if (msg) {
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE, cookie))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
cfg80211/mac80211: allow management TX to not wait for ACK For probe responses it can be useful to not wait for ACK to avoid retransmissions if the station that sent the probe is already on the next channel, so allow userspace to request not caring about the ACK with a new nl80211 flag. Since mac80211 needs to be updated for the new function prototype anyway implement it right away -- it's just a few lines of code. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:21 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
}
return 0;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
nla_put_failure:
err = -ENOBUFS;
free_msg:
nlmsg_free(msg);
return err;
}
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
static int nl80211_tx_mgmt_cancel_wait(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
u64 cookie;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE])
return -EINVAL;
if (!rdev->ops->mgmt_tx_cancel_wait)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
switch (wdev->iftype) {
case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP_VLAN:
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO:
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
case NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_DEVICE:
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
break;
default:
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
}
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
cookie = nla_get_u64(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_mgmt_tx_cancel_wait(rdev, wdev, cookie);
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
}
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_power_save(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
u8 ps_state;
bool state;
int err;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PS_STATE])
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
ps_state = nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_PS_STATE]);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ps_state != NL80211_PS_DISABLED && ps_state != NL80211_PS_ENABLED)
return -EINVAL;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_power_mgmt)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
state = (ps_state == NL80211_PS_ENABLED) ? true : false;
if (state == wdev->ps)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return 0;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_set_power_mgmt(rdev, dev, state, wdev->ps_timeout);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!err)
wdev->ps = state;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
return err;
}
static int nl80211_get_power_save(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
enum nl80211_ps_state ps_state;
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
int err;
wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_power_mgmt)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_GET_POWER_SAVE);
if (!hdr) {
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
err = -ENOBUFS;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
goto free_msg;
}
if (wdev->ps)
ps_state = NL80211_PS_ENABLED;
else
ps_state = NL80211_PS_DISABLED;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_PS_STATE, ps_state))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
nla_put_failure:
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
err = -ENOBUFS;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
free_msg:
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return err;
}
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
static struct nla_policy
nl80211_attr_cqm_policy[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_MAX + 1] __read_mostly = {
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_THOLD] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_HYST] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_THRESHOLD_EVENT] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_RATE] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_PKTS] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_INTVL] = { .type = NLA_U32 },
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
};
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_cqm_txe(struct genl_info *info,
nl80211: remove unnecessary checks The CQM TX-error rate/interval can't be less than zero since they're unsigned values, remove checks. Also fix indentation of the function. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-26 11:51:52 +00:00
u32 rate, u32 pkts, u32 intvl)
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
nl80211: remove unnecessary checks The CQM TX-error rate/interval can't be less than zero since they're unsigned values, remove checks. Also fix indentation of the function. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-26 11:51:52 +00:00
if (rate > 100 || intvl > NL80211_CQM_TXE_MAX_INTVL)
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
return -EINVAL;
wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
if (!rdev->ops->set_cqm_txe_config)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_set_cqm_txe_config(rdev, dev, rate, pkts, intvl);
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
}
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_cqm_rssi(struct genl_info *info,
s32 threshold, u32 hysteresis)
{
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
if (threshold > 0)
return -EINVAL;
wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (!rdev->ops->set_cqm_rssi_config)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce p2p device types This adds P2P-STA and P2P-GO as device types so we can distinguish between those and normal STA or AP (respectively) type interfaces. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-09-16 12:58:22 +00:00
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION &&
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
return rdev_set_cqm_rssi_config(rdev, dev, threshold, hysteresis);
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_set_cqm(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct nlattr *attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_MAX + 1];
struct nlattr *cqm;
int err;
cqm = info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM];
if (!cqm) {
err = -EINVAL;
goto out;
}
err = nla_parse_nested(attrs, NL80211_ATTR_CQM_MAX, cqm,
nl80211_attr_cqm_policy);
if (err)
goto out;
if (attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_THOLD] &&
attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_HYST]) {
s32 threshold;
u32 hysteresis;
threshold = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_THOLD]);
hysteresis = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_HYST]);
err = nl80211_set_cqm_rssi(info, threshold, hysteresis);
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
} else if (attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_RATE] &&
attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_PKTS] &&
attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_INTVL]) {
u32 rate, pkts, intvl;
rate = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_RATE]);
pkts = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_PKTS]);
intvl = nla_get_u32(attrs[NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_INTVL]);
err = nl80211_set_cqm_txe(info, rate, pkts, intvl);
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
} else
err = -EINVAL;
out:
return err;
}
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
static int nl80211_join_mesh(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct mesh_config cfg;
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
struct mesh_setup setup;
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
int err;
/* start with default */
memcpy(&cfg, &default_mesh_config, sizeof(cfg));
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
memcpy(&setup, &default_mesh_setup, sizeof(setup));
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_CONFIG]) {
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
/* and parse parameters if given */
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_mesh_config(info, &cfg, NULL);
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
if (err)
return err;
}
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID] ||
!nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]))
return -EINVAL;
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
setup.mesh_id = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]);
setup.mesh_id_len = nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_ID]);
{nl,cfg,mac}80211: Allow Setting Multicast Rate in Mesh Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-25 01:15:20 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE] &&
!nl80211_parse_mcast_rate(rdev, setup.mcast_rate,
nla_get_u32(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MCAST_RATE])))
return -EINVAL;
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MESH_SETUP]) {
/* parse additional setup parameters if given */
err = nl80211_parse_mesh_setup(info, &setup);
if (err)
return err;
}
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
if (info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ]) {
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
err = nl80211_parse_chandef(rdev, info, &setup.chandef);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
} else {
/* cfg80211_join_mesh() will sort it out */
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
setup.chandef.chan = NULL;
cfg80211: provide channel to join_mesh function Just like the AP mode patch, instead of setting the channel and then joining the mesh network, provide the channel to join the network on to the join_mesh() function. Like in AP mode, you can also give the channel to the join-mesh nl80211 command now. Unlike AP mode, it picks a default channel if none was given. As libertas uses mesh mode interfaces but has no join_mesh callback and we can't simply break it, keep some compatibility code for that case and configure the channel directly for it. In the non-libertas case, where we store the channel until join, allow setting it while the interface is down. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-05-16 21:50:20 +00:00
}
mac80211: Let userspace enable and configure vendor specific path selection. Userspace will now be allowed to toggle between the default path selection algorithm (HWMP, implemented in the kernel), and a vendor specific alternative. Also in the same patch, allow userspace to add information elements to mesh beacons. This is accordance with the Extensible Path Selection Framework specified in version 7.0 of the 802.11s draft. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:49 +00:00
return cfg80211_join_mesh(rdev, dev, &setup, &cfg);
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
}
static int nl80211_leave_mesh(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
return cfg80211_leave_mesh(rdev, dev);
}
cfg80211: don't allow WoWLAN support without CONFIG_PM When CONFIG_PM is disabled, no device can possibly support WoWLAN since it can't go to sleep to start with. Due to this, mac80211 had even rejected the hardware registration. By making all the code and data for WoWLAN depend on CONFIG_PM we can promote this runtime error to a compile-time error. Add #ifdef around all WoWLAN code to remove it in systems that don't need it as they never suspend. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 07:23:48 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_PM
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
static int nl80211_get_wowlan(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
if (!rdev->wiphy.wowlan.flags && !rdev->wiphy.wowlan.n_patterns)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_GET_WOWLAN);
if (!hdr)
goto nla_put_failure;
if (rdev->wowlan) {
struct nlattr *nl_wowlan;
nl_wowlan = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WOWLAN_TRIGGERS);
if (!nl_wowlan)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if ((rdev->wowlan->any &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_ANY)) ||
(rdev->wowlan->disconnect &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_DISCONNECT)) ||
(rdev->wowlan->magic_pkt &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_MAGIC_PKT)) ||
(rdev->wowlan->gtk_rekey_failure &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_GTK_REKEY_FAILURE)) ||
(rdev->wowlan->eap_identity_req &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_EAP_IDENT_REQUEST)) ||
(rdev->wowlan->four_way_handshake &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_4WAY_HANDSHAKE)) ||
(rdev->wowlan->rfkill_release &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_RFKILL_RELEASE)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
if (rdev->wowlan->n_patterns) {
struct nlattr *nl_pats, *nl_pat;
int i, pat_len;
nl_pats = nla_nest_start(msg,
NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_PKT_PATTERN);
if (!nl_pats)
goto nla_put_failure;
for (i = 0; i < rdev->wowlan->n_patterns; i++) {
nl_pat = nla_nest_start(msg, i + 1);
if (!nl_pat)
goto nla_put_failure;
pat_len = rdev->wowlan->patterns[i].pattern_len;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_MASK,
DIV_ROUND_UP(pat_len, 8),
rdev->wowlan->patterns[i].mask) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_PATTERN,
pat_len,
rdev->wowlan->patterns[i].pattern))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_pat);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_pats);
}
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_wowlan);
}
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
nla_put_failure:
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
static int nl80211_set_wowlan(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct nlattr *tb[NUM_NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG];
struct cfg80211_wowlan new_triggers = {};
nl80211: allow enabling WoWLAN without triggers It may be desirable to use WoWLAN without triggers to keep the connection alive to the AP while suspended. Allow this use by enabling WoWLAN without triggers if no triggers were requested. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 14:25:02 +00:00
struct cfg80211_wowlan *ntrig;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
struct wiphy_wowlan_support *wowlan = &rdev->wiphy.wowlan;
int err, i;
cfg80211/mac80211: enable proper device_set_wakeup_enable handling In WoWLAN, we only get the triggers when we actually get to suspend. As a consequence, drivers currently don't know that the device should enable wakeup. However, the device_set_wakeup_enable() API is intended to be called when the wakeup is enabled, not later when needed. Add a new set_wakeup() call to cfg80211 and mac80211 to allow drivers to properly call device_set_wakeup_enable. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-04 13:05:25 +00:00
bool prev_enabled = rdev->wowlan;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
if (!rdev->wiphy.wowlan.flags && !rdev->wiphy.wowlan.n_patterns)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
nl80211: allow enabling WoWLAN without triggers It may be desirable to use WoWLAN without triggers to keep the connection alive to the AP while suspended. Allow this use by enabling WoWLAN without triggers if no triggers were requested. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 14:25:02 +00:00
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WOWLAN_TRIGGERS]) {
cfg80211_rdev_free_wowlan(rdev);
rdev->wowlan = NULL;
goto set_wakeup;
}
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
err = nla_parse(tb, MAX_NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WOWLAN_TRIGGERS]),
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_WOWLAN_TRIGGERS]),
nl80211_wowlan_policy);
if (err)
return err;
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_ANY]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_ANY))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.any = true;
}
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_DISCONNECT]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_DISCONNECT))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.disconnect = true;
}
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_MAGIC_PKT]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_MAGIC_PKT))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.magic_pkt = true;
}
nl80211: advertise GTK rekey support, new triggers Since we now have the necessary API in place to support GTK rekeying, applications will need to know whether it is supported by a device. Add a pseudo-trigger that is used only to advertise that capability. Also, add some new triggers that match what iwlagn devices can do. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-13 08:48:55 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_GTK_REKEY_SUPPORTED])
return -EINVAL;
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_GTK_REKEY_FAILURE]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_GTK_REKEY_FAILURE))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.gtk_rekey_failure = true;
}
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_EAP_IDENT_REQUEST]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_EAP_IDENTITY_REQ))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.eap_identity_req = true;
}
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_4WAY_HANDSHAKE]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_4WAY_HANDSHAKE))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.four_way_handshake = true;
}
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_RFKILL_RELEASE]) {
if (!(wowlan->flags & WIPHY_WOWLAN_RFKILL_RELEASE))
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.rfkill_release = true;
}
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
if (tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_PKT_PATTERN]) {
struct nlattr *pat;
int n_patterns = 0;
int rem, pat_len, mask_len;
struct nlattr *pat_tb[NUM_NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT];
nla_for_each_nested(pat, tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_PKT_PATTERN],
rem)
n_patterns++;
if (n_patterns > wowlan->n_patterns)
return -EINVAL;
new_triggers.patterns = kcalloc(n_patterns,
sizeof(new_triggers.patterns[0]),
GFP_KERNEL);
if (!new_triggers.patterns)
return -ENOMEM;
new_triggers.n_patterns = n_patterns;
i = 0;
nla_for_each_nested(pat, tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_TRIG_PKT_PATTERN],
rem) {
nla_parse(pat_tb, MAX_NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT,
nla_data(pat), nla_len(pat), NULL);
err = -EINVAL;
if (!pat_tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_MASK] ||
!pat_tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_PATTERN])
goto error;
pat_len = nla_len(pat_tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_PATTERN]);
mask_len = DIV_ROUND_UP(pat_len, 8);
if (nla_len(pat_tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_MASK]) !=
mask_len)
goto error;
if (pat_len > wowlan->pattern_max_len ||
pat_len < wowlan->pattern_min_len)
goto error;
new_triggers.patterns[i].mask =
kmalloc(mask_len + pat_len, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!new_triggers.patterns[i].mask) {
err = -ENOMEM;
goto error;
}
new_triggers.patterns[i].pattern =
new_triggers.patterns[i].mask + mask_len;
memcpy(new_triggers.patterns[i].mask,
nla_data(pat_tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_MASK]),
mask_len);
new_triggers.patterns[i].pattern_len = pat_len;
memcpy(new_triggers.patterns[i].pattern,
nla_data(pat_tb[NL80211_WOWLAN_PKTPAT_PATTERN]),
pat_len);
i++;
}
}
nl80211: allow enabling WoWLAN without triggers It may be desirable to use WoWLAN without triggers to keep the connection alive to the AP while suspended. Allow this use by enabling WoWLAN without triggers if no triggers were requested. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 14:25:02 +00:00
ntrig = kmemdup(&new_triggers, sizeof(new_triggers), GFP_KERNEL);
if (!ntrig) {
err = -ENOMEM;
goto error;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
}
nl80211: allow enabling WoWLAN without triggers It may be desirable to use WoWLAN without triggers to keep the connection alive to the AP while suspended. Allow this use by enabling WoWLAN without triggers if no triggers were requested. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 14:25:02 +00:00
cfg80211_rdev_free_wowlan(rdev);
rdev->wowlan = ntrig;
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
nl80211: allow enabling WoWLAN without triggers It may be desirable to use WoWLAN without triggers to keep the connection alive to the AP while suspended. Allow this use by enabling WoWLAN without triggers if no triggers were requested. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 14:25:02 +00:00
set_wakeup:
cfg80211/mac80211: enable proper device_set_wakeup_enable handling In WoWLAN, we only get the triggers when we actually get to suspend. As a consequence, drivers currently don't know that the device should enable wakeup. However, the device_set_wakeup_enable() API is intended to be called when the wakeup is enabled, not later when needed. Add a new set_wakeup() call to cfg80211 and mac80211 to allow drivers to properly call device_set_wakeup_enable. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-04 13:05:25 +00:00
if (rdev->ops->set_wakeup && prev_enabled != !!rdev->wowlan)
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
rdev_set_wakeup(rdev, rdev->wowlan);
cfg80211/mac80211: enable proper device_set_wakeup_enable handling In WoWLAN, we only get the triggers when we actually get to suspend. As a consequence, drivers currently don't know that the device should enable wakeup. However, the device_set_wakeup_enable() API is intended to be called when the wakeup is enabled, not later when needed. Add a new set_wakeup() call to cfg80211 and mac80211 to allow drivers to properly call device_set_wakeup_enable. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-04 13:05:25 +00:00
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
return 0;
error:
for (i = 0; i < new_triggers.n_patterns; i++)
kfree(new_triggers.patterns[i].mask);
kfree(new_triggers.patterns);
return err;
}
cfg80211: don't allow WoWLAN support without CONFIG_PM When CONFIG_PM is disabled, no device can possibly support WoWLAN since it can't go to sleep to start with. Due to this, mac80211 had even rejected the hardware registration. By making all the code and data for WoWLAN depend on CONFIG_PM we can promote this runtime error to a compile-time error. Add #ifdef around all WoWLAN code to remove it in systems that don't need it as they never suspend. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 07:23:48 +00:00
#endif
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
static int nl80211_set_rekey_data(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct nlattr *tb[NUM_NL80211_REKEY_DATA];
struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data rekey_data;
int err;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REKEY_DATA])
return -EINVAL;
err = nla_parse(tb, MAX_NL80211_REKEY_DATA,
nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REKEY_DATA]),
nla_len(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_REKEY_DATA]),
nl80211_rekey_policy);
if (err)
return err;
if (nla_len(tb[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_REPLAY_CTR]) != NL80211_REPLAY_CTR_LEN)
return -ERANGE;
if (nla_len(tb[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_KEK]) != NL80211_KEK_LEN)
return -ERANGE;
if (nla_len(tb[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_KCK]) != NL80211_KCK_LEN)
return -ERANGE;
memcpy(rekey_data.kek, nla_data(tb[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_KEK]),
NL80211_KEK_LEN);
memcpy(rekey_data.kck, nla_data(tb[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_KCK]),
NL80211_KCK_LEN);
memcpy(rekey_data.replay_ctr,
nla_data(tb[NL80211_REKEY_DATA_REPLAY_CTR]),
NL80211_REPLAY_CTR_LEN);
wdev_lock(wdev);
if (!wdev->current_bss) {
err = -ENOTCONN;
goto out;
}
if (!rdev->ops->set_rekey_data) {
err = -EOPNOTSUPP;
goto out;
}
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_set_rekey_data(rdev, dev, &rekey_data);
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
out:
wdev_unlock(wdev);
return err;
}
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
static int nl80211_register_unexpected_frame(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EINVAL;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (wdev->ap_unexpected_nlportid)
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
return -EBUSY;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
wdev->ap_unexpected_nlportid = info->snd_portid;
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
return 0;
}
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
static int nl80211_probe_client(struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct net_device *dev = info->user_ptr[1];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
const u8 *addr;
u64 cookie;
int err;
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_AP &&
wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC])
return -EINVAL;
if (!rdev->ops->probe_client)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, info->snd_portid, info->snd_seq, 0,
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_PROBE_CLIENT);
if (IS_ERR(hdr)) {
err = PTR_ERR(hdr);
goto free_msg;
}
addr = nla_data(info->attrs[NL80211_ATTR_MAC]);
cfg80211: add wrappers for registered_device_ops This will allow adding central tracing like in mac80211. Signed-off-by: Hila Gonen <hila.gonen@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 14:19:42 +00:00
err = rdev_probe_client(rdev, dev, addr, &cookie);
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
if (err)
goto free_msg;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE, cookie))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
return genlmsg_reply(msg, info);
nla_put_failure:
err = -ENOBUFS;
free_msg:
nlmsg_free(msg);
return err;
}
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
static int nl80211_register_beacons(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
struct cfg80211_beacon_registration *reg, *nreg;
int rv;
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
if (!(rdev->wiphy.flags & WIPHY_FLAG_REPORTS_OBSS))
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
nreg = kzalloc(sizeof(*nreg), GFP_KERNEL);
if (!nreg)
return -ENOMEM;
/* First, check if already registered. */
spin_lock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
list_for_each_entry(reg, &rdev->beacon_registrations, list) {
if (reg->nlportid == info->snd_portid) {
rv = -EALREADY;
goto out_err;
}
}
/* Add it to the list */
nreg->nlportid = info->snd_portid;
list_add(&nreg->list, &rdev->beacon_registrations);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
return 0;
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
out_err:
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
kfree(nreg);
return rv;
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
}
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
static int nl80211_start_p2p_device(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
int err;
if (!rdev->ops->start_p2p_device)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_DEVICE)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (wdev->p2p_started)
return 0;
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
err = cfg80211_can_add_interface(rdev, wdev->iftype);
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
if (err)
return err;
cfg80211: add tracing for P2P Device start/stop These were missed due to the tracing work having started on a kernel that didn't have P2P Device yet, implement them now. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-23 13:16:50 +00:00
err = rdev_start_p2p_device(rdev, wdev);
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
if (err)
return err;
wdev->p2p_started = true;
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
rdev->opencount++;
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
return 0;
}
static int nl80211_stop_p2p_device(struct sk_buff *skb, struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = info->user_ptr[0];
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
if (wdev->iftype != NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_DEVICE)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!rdev->ops->stop_p2p_device)
return -EOPNOTSUPP;
if (!wdev->p2p_started)
return 0;
cfg80211: add tracing for P2P Device start/stop These were missed due to the tracing work having started on a kernel that didn't have P2P Device yet, implement them now. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-23 13:16:50 +00:00
rdev_stop_p2p_device(rdev, wdev);
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
wdev->p2p_started = false;
mutex_lock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
rdev->opencount--;
mutex_unlock(&rdev->devlist_mtx);
if (WARN_ON(rdev->scan_req && rdev->scan_req->wdev == wdev)) {
rdev->scan_req->aborted = true;
___cfg80211_scan_done(rdev, true);
}
return 0;
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
#define NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY 0x01
#define NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV 0x02
#define NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL 0x04
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
#define NL80211_FLAG_CHECK_NETDEV_UP 0x08
#define NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP (NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |\
NL80211_FLAG_CHECK_NETDEV_UP)
nl80211: add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV Some nl80211 callbacks will soon need the wdev instead of the netdev, so add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV to allow them to request that. Add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP as well which checks the netdev is UP if one exists. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:23:36 +00:00
#define NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV 0x10
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
/* If a netdev is associated, it must be UP, P2P must be started */
nl80211: add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV Some nl80211 callbacks will soon need the wdev instead of the netdev, so add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV to allow them to request that. Add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP as well which checks the netdev is UP if one exists. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:23:36 +00:00
#define NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP (NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV |\
NL80211_FLAG_CHECK_NETDEV_UP)
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
static int nl80211_pre_doit(struct genl_ops *ops, struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
struct net_device *dev;
bool rtnl = ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL;
if (rtnl)
rtnl_lock();
if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY) {
nl80211: fix netns separation There are currently a few ways to "escape" the network namespace and access a wiphy that belongs to another namespace. Add a netns argument to the relevant functions to fix this. One remaining issue with testmode will be fixed in a follow-up patch. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:14:22 +00:00
rdev = cfg80211_get_dev_from_info(genl_info_net(info), info);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (IS_ERR(rdev)) {
if (rtnl)
rtnl_unlock();
return PTR_ERR(rdev);
}
info->user_ptr[0] = rdev;
nl80211: add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV Some nl80211 callbacks will soon need the wdev instead of the netdev, so add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV to allow them to request that. Add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP as well which checks the netdev is UP if one exists. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:23:36 +00:00
} else if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV ||
ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV) {
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
mutex_lock(&cfg80211_mutex);
wdev = __cfg80211_wdev_from_attrs(genl_info_net(info),
info->attrs);
if (IS_ERR(wdev)) {
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (rtnl)
rtnl_unlock();
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
return PTR_ERR(wdev);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
dev = wdev->netdev;
rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wdev->wiphy);
nl80211: add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV Some nl80211 callbacks will soon need the wdev instead of the netdev, so add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV to allow them to request that. Add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP as well which checks the netdev is UP if one exists. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:23:36 +00:00
if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV) {
if (!dev) {
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
if (rtnl)
rtnl_unlock();
return -EINVAL;
}
info->user_ptr[1] = dev;
} else {
info->user_ptr[1] = wdev;
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
}
nl80211: add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV Some nl80211 callbacks will soon need the wdev instead of the netdev, so add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV to allow them to request that. Add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP as well which checks the netdev is UP if one exists. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:23:36 +00:00
if (dev) {
if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_CHECK_NETDEV_UP &&
!netif_running(dev)) {
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
if (rtnl)
rtnl_unlock();
return -ENETDOWN;
}
dev_hold(dev);
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
} else if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_CHECK_NETDEV_UP) {
if (!wdev->p2p_started) {
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
if (rtnl)
rtnl_unlock();
return -ENETDOWN;
}
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
}
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
cfg80211_lock_rdev(rdev);
mutex_unlock(&cfg80211_mutex);
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
info->user_ptr[0] = rdev;
}
return 0;
}
static void nl80211_post_doit(struct genl_ops *ops, struct sk_buff *skb,
struct genl_info *info)
{
if (info->user_ptr[0])
cfg80211_unlock_rdev(info->user_ptr[0]);
nl80211: add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV Some nl80211 callbacks will soon need the wdev instead of the netdev, so add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV to allow them to request that. Add NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP as well which checks the netdev is UP if one exists. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:23:36 +00:00
if (info->user_ptr[1]) {
if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV) {
struct wireless_dev *wdev = info->user_ptr[1];
if (wdev->netdev)
dev_put(wdev->netdev);
} else {
dev_put(info->user_ptr[1]);
}
}
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
if (ops->internal_flags & NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL)
rtnl_unlock();
}
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
static struct genl_ops nl80211_ops[] = {
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_WIPHY,
.doit = nl80211_get_wiphy,
.dumpit = nl80211_dump_wiphy,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
/* can be retrieved by unprivileged users */
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY,
.doit = nl80211_set_wiphy,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_INTERFACE,
.doit = nl80211_get_interface,
.dumpit = nl80211_dump_interface,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
/* can be retrieved by unprivileged users */
nl80211: retrieve interface data by wdev Since soon there will be virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev, use the wdev identifier for the API to retrieve interface data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 15:52:47 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_INTERFACE,
.doit = nl80211_set_interface,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_NEW_INTERFACE,
.doit = nl80211_new_interface,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DEL_INTERFACE,
.doit = nl80211_del_interface,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: use wireless_dev for interface management In order to be able to create P2P Device wdevs, move the virtual interface management over to wireless_dev structures. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:00:26 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_KEY,
.doit = nl80211_get_key,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_KEY,
.doit = nl80211_set_key,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_NEW_KEY,
.doit = nl80211_new_key,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: introduce key handling This introduces key handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Default and group keys can be added, changed and removed; sequence counters for each key can be retrieved. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:29 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DEL_KEY,
.doit = nl80211_del_key,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
},
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_BEACON,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
.doit = nl80211_set_beacon,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
},
{
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_START_AP,
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
.doit = nl80211_start_ap,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
},
{
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_STOP_AP,
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: restructure AP/GO mode API The AP/GO mode API isn't very clearly defined, it has "set beacon" and "new beacon" etc. Modify the API to the following: * start AP -- all settings * change beacon -- new beacon data * stop AP -- stop AP mode operation This also reflects in the nl80211 API, rename the commands there correspondingly (but keep the old names for compatibility.) Overall, this makes it much clearer what's going on in the API. Kalle developed the ath6kl changes, I created the rest of the patch. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-02-13 14:17:18 +00:00
.doit = nl80211_stop_ap,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: add beacon settings This adds the necessary API to cfg80211/nl80211 to allow changing beaconing settings. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:32 +00:00
},
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_STATION,
.doit = nl80211_get_station,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
.dumpit = nl80211_dump_station,
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_STATION,
.doit = nl80211_set_station,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION,
.doit = nl80211_new_station,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: station handling This patch adds station handling to cfg80211/nl80211. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-12-19 01:03:34 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION,
.doit = nl80211_del_station,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_MPATH,
.doit = nl80211_get_mpath,
.dumpit = nl80211_dump_mpath,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_MPATH,
.doit = nl80211_set_mpath,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_NEW_MPATH,
.doit = nl80211_new_mpath,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211/cfg80211: support for mesh, sta dumping Added support for mesh id and mesh path operation as well as station structure dumping. Signed-off-by: Luis Carlos Cobo <luisca@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-02-23 14:17:06 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DEL_MPATH,
.doit = nl80211_del_mpath,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
mac80211/cfg80211: Add BSS configuration options for AP mode This change adds a new cfg80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS, to allow AP mode BSS parameters to be changed from user space (e.g., hostapd). The drivers using mac80211 are expected to be modified with separate changes to use the new BSS info parameter for short slot time in the bss_info_changed() handler. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-08-07 17:07:01 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_BSS,
.doit = nl80211_set_bss,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
},
cfg80211: add get reg command This lets userspace request to get the currently set regulatory domain. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-30 17:26:42 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_REG,
.doit = nl80211_get_reg,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
/* can be retrieved by unprivileged users */
},
cfg80211: Add new wireless regulatory infrastructure This adds the new wireless regulatory infrastructure. The main motiviation behind this was to centralize regulatory code as each driver was implementing their own regulatory solution, and to replace the initial centralized code we have where: * only 3 regulatory domains are supported: US, JP and EU * regulatory domains can only be changed through module parameter * all rules were built statically in the kernel We now have support for regulatory domains for many countries and regulatory domains are now queried through a userspace agent through udev allowing distributions to update regulatory rules without updating the kernel. Each driver can regulatory_hint() a regulatory domain based on either their EEPROM mapped regulatory domain value to a respective ISO/IEC 3166-1 country code or pass an internally built regulatory domain. We also add support to let the user set the regulatory domain through userspace in case of faulty EEPROMs to further help compliance. Support for world roaming will be added soon for cards capable of this. For more information see: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/developers/Regulatory/CRDA For now we leave an option to enable the old module parameter, ieee80211_regdom, and to build the 3 old regdomains statically (US, JP and EU). This option is CONFIG_WIRELESS_OLD_REGULATORY. These old static definitions and the module parameter is being scheduled for removal for 2.6.29. Note that if you use this you won't make use of a world regulatory domain as its pointless. If you leave this option enabled and if CRDA is present and you use US or JP we will try to ask CRDA to update us a regulatory domain for us. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-09-10 06:19:48 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_REG,
.doit = nl80211_set_reg,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_REQ_SET_REG,
.doit = nl80211_req_set_reg,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
},
{
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_CONFIG,
.doit = nl80211_get_mesh_config,
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
/* can be retrieved by unprivileged users */
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
},
{
mac80211: Rename mesh_params to mesh_config to prepare for mesh_setup Mesh parameters can be to setup a mesh or to configure it. This patch renames the ambiguous name mesh_params to mesh_config in preparation for mesh_setup. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-17 01:37:48 +00:00
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_CONFIG,
.doit = nl80211_update_mesh_config,
Add nl80211 commands to get and set o11s mesh networking parameters The two new commands are NL80211_CMD_GET_MESH_PARAMS and NL80211_CMD_SET_MESH_PARAMS. There is a new attribute enum, NL80211_ATTR_MESH_PARAMS, which enumerates the various mesh configuration parameters. Moved struct mesh_config from mac80211/ieee80211_i.h to net/cfg80211.h. nl80211_get_mesh_params and nl80211_set_mesh_params unpack the netlink messages and ask the driver to get or set the configuration. This is done via two new function stubs, get_mesh_params and set_mesh_params, in struct cfg80211_ops. Signed-off-by: Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2008-10-21 19:03:48 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
nl80211: New command for adding extra IE(s) into management frames A new nl80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_MGMT_EXTRA_IE, can be used to add arbitrary IE data into the end of management frames. The interface allows extra IEs to be configured for each management frame subtype, but only some of them (ProbeReq, ProbeResp, Auth, (Re)AssocReq, Deauth, Disassoc) are currently accepted in mac80211 implementation. This makes it easier to implement IEEE 802.11 extensions like WPS and FT that add IE(s) into some management frames. In addition, this can be useful for testing and experimentation purposes. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-13 14:03:29 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: New command for adding extra IE(s) into management frames A new nl80211 command, NL80211_CMD_SET_MGMT_EXTRA_IE, can be used to add arbitrary IE data into the end of management frames. The interface allows extra IEs to be configured for each management frame subtype, but only some of them (ProbeReq, ProbeResp, Auth, (Re)AssocReq, Deauth, Disassoc) are currently accepted in mac80211 implementation. This makes it easier to implement IEEE 802.11 extensions like WPS and FT that add IE(s) into some management frames. In addition, this can be useful for testing and experimentation purposes. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-01-13 14:03:29 +00:00
},
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN,
.doit = nl80211_trigger_scan,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_SCAN,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.dumpit = nl80211_dump_scan,
},
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN,
.doit = nl80211_start_sched_scan,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN,
.doit = nl80211_stop_sched_scan,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE,
.doit = nl80211_authenticate,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE,
.doit = nl80211_associate,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DEAUTHENTICATE,
.doit = nl80211_deauthenticate,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DISASSOCIATE,
.doit = nl80211_disassociate,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: Add MLME primitives to support external SME This patch adds new nl80211 commands to allow user space to request authentication and association (and also deauthentication and disassociation). The commands are structured to allow separate authentication and association steps, i.e., the interface between kernel and user space is similar to the MLME SAP interface in IEEE 802.11 standard and an user space application takes the role of the SME. The patch introduces MLME-AUTHENTICATE.request, MLME-{,RE}ASSOCIATE.request, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.request, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.request primitives. The authentication and association commands request the actual operations in two steps (assuming the driver supports this; if not, separate authentication step is skipped; this could end up being a separate "connect" command). The initial implementation for mac80211 uses the current net/mac80211/mlme.c for actual sending and processing of management frames and the new nl80211 commands will just stop the current state machine from moving automatically from authentication to association. Future cleanup may move more of the MLME operations into cfg80211. The goal of this design is to provide more control of authentication and association process to user space without having to move the full MLME implementation. This should be enough to allow IEEE 802.11r FT protocol and 802.11s SAE authentication to be implemented. Obviously, this will also bring the extra benefit of not having to use WEXT for association requests with mac80211. An example implementation of a user space SME using the new nl80211 commands is available for wpa_supplicant. This patch is enough to get IEEE 802.11r FT protocol working with over-the-air mechanism (over-the-DS will need additional MLME primitives for handling the FT Action frames). Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:22 +00:00
},
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_JOIN_IBSS,
.doit = nl80211_join_ibss,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_LEAVE_IBSS,
.doit = nl80211_leave_ibss,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
},
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE,
.doit = nl80211_testmode_do,
nl80211: add testmode dump support This adds dump support to testmode. The testmode dump support in nl80211 requires using two of the six cb->args, the rest can be used by the driver to figure out where the dump position is at or to store other data across invocations. Signed-off-by: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-20 16:05:54 +00:00
.dumpit = nl80211_testmode_dump,
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
},
#endif
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_CONNECT,
.doit = nl80211_connect,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DISCONNECT,
.doit = nl80211_disconnect,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use generic check for netif_running Use a new flag that requires the netdev to be UP and use it to check instead of coding the check into all functions that require it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:14:05 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
},
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_WIPHY_NETNS,
.doit = nl80211_wiphy_netns,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
},
cfg80211: return channel noise via survey API This patch implements the NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY command and an get_survey() ops that a driver can implement. The goal of this command is to allow a drivers to report channel survey data (e.g. channel noise, channel occupation). For now, only the mechanism to report back channel noise has been implemented. In future, there will either be a survey-trigger command --- or the existing scan-trigger command will be enhanced. This will allow user-space to request survey for arbitrary channels. Note: any driver that cannot report channel noise should not report any value at all, e.g. made-up -92 dBm. Signed-off-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-11 11:25:40 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_SURVEY,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.dumpit = nl80211_dump_survey,
},
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_PMKSA,
.doit = nl80211_setdel_pmksa,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_DEL_PMKSA,
.doit = nl80211_setdel_pmksa,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_FLUSH_PMKSA,
.doit = nl80211_flush_pmksa,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: PMKSA caching support This is an interface to set, delete and flush PMKIDs through nl80211. Main users would be fullmac devices which firmwares are capable of generating the RSN IEs for the re-association requests, e.g. iwmc3200wifi. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-11-24 22:59:15 +00:00
},
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL,
.doit = nl80211_remain_on_channel,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_CANCEL_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL,
.doit = nl80211_cancel_remain_on_channel,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
},
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK,
.doit = nl80211_set_tx_bitrate_mask,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: New command for setting TX rate mask for rate control Add a new NL80211_CMD_SET_TX_BITRATE_MASK command and related attributes to provide support for setting TX rate mask for rate control. This uses the existing cfg80211 set_bitrate_mask operation that was previously used only with WEXT compat code (SIOCSIWRATE). The nl80211 command allows more generic configuration of allowed rates as a mask instead of fixed/max rate. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-29 10:59:45 +00:00
},
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
{
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_REGISTER_FRAME,
.doit = nl80211_register_mgmt,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
},
{
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_FRAME,
.doit = nl80211_tx_mgmt,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
.policy = nl80211_policy,
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP |
nl80211/cfg80211: extend mgmt-tx API for off-channel With p2p, it is sometimes necessary to transmit a frame (typically an action frame) on another channel than the current channel. Enable this through the CMD_FRAME API, and allow it to wait for a response. A new command allows that wait to be aborted. However, allow userspace to specify whether or not it wants to allow off-channel TX, it may actually want to use the same channel only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-25 09:02:29 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_FRAME_WAIT_CANCEL,
.doit = nl80211_tx_mgmt_cancel_wait,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP |
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
},
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_POWER_SAVE,
.doit = nl80211_set_power_save,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_POWER_SAVE,
.doit = nl80211_get_power_save,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
/* can be retrieved by unprivileged users */
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
nl80211: add power save commands The most needed command from nl80211, which Wireless Extensions had, is support for power save mode. Add a simple command to make it possible to enable and disable power save via nl80211. I was also planning about extending the interface, for example adding the timeout value, but after thinking more about this I decided not to do it. Basically there were three reasons: Firstly, the parameters for power save are very much hardware dependent. Trying to find a unified interface which would work with all hardware, and still make sense to users, will be very difficult. Secondly, IEEE 802.11 power save implementation in Linux is still in state of flux. We have a long way to still to go and there is no way to predict what kind of implementation we will have after few years. And because we need to support nl80211 interface a long time, practically forever, adding now parameters to nl80211 might create maintenance problems later on. Third issue are the users. Power save parameters are mostly used for debugging, so debugfs is better, more flexible, interface for this. For example, wpa_supplicant currently doesn't configure anything related to power save mode. It's better to strive that kernel can automatically optimise the power save parameters, like with help of pm qos network and other traffic parameters. Later on, when we have better understanding of power save, we can extend this command with more features, if there's a need for that. Signed-off-by: Kalle Valo <kalle.valo@nokia.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-17 15:58:10 +00:00
},
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_CQM,
.doit = nl80211_set_cqm,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
},
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_CHANNEL,
.doit = nl80211_set_channel,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use the new genetlink pre/post_doit hooks This makes nl80211 use the new genetlink pre_doit/post_doit hooks for locking and checking the interface/wiphy index. This significantly reduces the code size and the likelihood of locking errors. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-04 19:36:35 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211/mac80211: better channel handling Currently (all tested with hwsim) you can do stupid things like setting up an AP on a certain channel, then adding another virtual interface and making that associate on another channel -- this will make the beaconing to move channel but obviously without the necessary IEs data update. In order to improve this situation, first make the configuration APIs (cfg80211 and nl80211) aware of multi-channel operation -- we'll eventually need that in the future anyway. There's one userland API change and one API addition. The API change is that now SET_WIPHY must be called with virtual interface index rather than only wiphy index in order to take effect for that interface -- luckily all current users (hostapd) do that. For monitor interfaces, the old setting is preserved, but monitors are always slaved to other devices anyway so no guarantees. The second userland API change is the introduction of a per virtual interface SET_CHANNEL command, that hostapd should use going forward to make it easier to understand what's going on (it can automatically detect a kernel with this command). Other than mac80211, no existing cfg80211 drivers are affected by this change because they only allow a single virtual interface. mac80211, however, now needs to be aware that the channel settings are per interface now, and needs to disallow (for now) real multi-channel operation, which is another important part of this patch. One of the immediate benefits is that you can now start hostapd to operate on a hardware that already has a connection on another virtual interface, as long as you specify the same channel. Note that two things are left unhandled (this is an improvement -- not a complete fix): * different HT/no-HT modes currently you could start an HT AP and then connect to a non-HT network on the same channel which would configure the hardware for no HT; that can be fixed fairly easily * CSA An AP we're connected to on a virtual interface might indicate switching channels, and in that case we would follow it, regardless of how many other interfaces are operating; this requires more effort to fix but is pretty rare after all Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-05-05 13:25:02 +00:00
},
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_WDS_PEER,
.doit = nl80211_set_wds_peer,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: use new genl helpers for WDS Bill Jordan's patch to allow setting the WDS peer crossed with my patch removing all the boilerplate code in nl80211, and consequently he didn't make use of it yet. Fix that. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-07 11:10:30 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
cfg80211: patches to allow setting the WDS peer Added a nl interface to set the peer bssid of a WDS interface. Signed-off-by: Bill Jordan <bjordan@rajant.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-10-01 17:54:28 +00:00
},
cfg80211/mac80211: add mesh join/leave commands Instead of tying mesh activity to interface up, add join and leave commands for mesh. Since we must be backward compatible, let cfg80211 handle joining a mesh if a mesh ID was pre-configured when the device goes up. Note that this therefore must modify mac80211 as well since mac80211 needs to lose the logic to start the mesh on interface up. We now allow querying mesh parameters before the mesh is connected, which simply returns defaults. Setting them (internally renamed to "update") is only allowed while connected. Specify them with the new mesh join command instead where needed. In mac80211, beaconing must now also follow the mesh enabled/not enabled state, which is done by testing the mesh ID. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-03 08:20:44 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_JOIN_MESH,
.doit = nl80211_join_mesh,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_LEAVE_MESH,
.doit = nl80211_leave_mesh,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
cfg80211: don't allow WoWLAN support without CONFIG_PM When CONFIG_PM is disabled, no device can possibly support WoWLAN since it can't go to sleep to start with. Due to this, mac80211 had even rejected the hardware registration. By making all the code and data for WoWLAN depend on CONFIG_PM we can promote this runtime error to a compile-time error. Add #ifdef around all WoWLAN code to remove it in systems that don't need it as they never suspend. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 07:23:48 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_PM
nl80211/cfg80211: WoWLAN support This is based on (but now quite far from) the original work from Luis and Eliad. Add support for configuring WoWLAN triggers, and getting the configuration out again. Changes from the original patchset are too numerous to list, but one important change needs highlighting: the suspend() callback is passed NULL for the trigger configuration if userspace has not configured WoWLAN at all. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-04 13:37:28 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_GET_WOWLAN,
.doit = nl80211_get_wowlan,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
/* can be retrieved by unprivileged users */
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_WOWLAN,
.doit = nl80211_set_wowlan,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
cfg80211: don't allow WoWLAN support without CONFIG_PM When CONFIG_PM is disabled, no device can possibly support WoWLAN since it can't go to sleep to start with. Due to this, mac80211 had even rejected the hardware registration. By making all the code and data for WoWLAN depend on CONFIG_PM we can promote this runtime error to a compile-time error. Add #ifdef around all WoWLAN code to remove it in systems that don't need it as they never suspend. Cc: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Acked-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-27 07:23:48 +00:00
#endif
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_REKEY_OFFLOAD,
.doit = nl80211_set_rekey_data,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
nl80211: support sending TDLS commands/frames Add support for sending high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames via NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER and NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT, respectively. Add appropriate cfg80211 callbacks for lower level drivers. Add wiphy capability flags for TDLS support and advertise them via nl80211. Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com> Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-28 11:12:50 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_TDLS_MGMT,
.doit = nl80211_tdls_mgmt,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER,
.doit = nl80211_tdls_oper,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_UNEXPECTED_FRAME,
.doit = nl80211_register_unexpected_frame,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_PROBE_CLIENT,
.doit = nl80211_probe_client,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
nl80211: ensure interface is up in various APIs The nl80211 handling code should ensure as much as it can that the interface is in a valid state, it can certainly ensure the interface is running. Not doing so can cause calls through mac80211 into the driver that result in warnings and unspecified behaviour in the driver. Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Reported-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-02 08:51:55 +00:00
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV_UP |
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_REGISTER_BEACONS,
.doit = nl80211_register_beacons,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WIPHY |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
wireless: Add NoAck per tid support This patch contains the configuration changes in nl80211/cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> Signed-off-by: Mathias Kretschmer <mathias.kretschmer@fokus.fraunhofer.de> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-18 13:20:43 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_NOACK_MAP,
.doit = nl80211_set_noack_map,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
cfg80211: add P2P Device abstraction In order to support using a different MAC address for the P2P Device address we must first have a P2P Device abstraction that can be assigned a MAC address. This abstraction will also be useful to support offloading P2P operations to the device, e.g. periodic listen for discoverability. Currently, the driver is responsible for assigning a MAC address to the P2P Device, but this could be changed by allowing a MAC address to be given to the NEW_INTERFACE command. As it has no associated netdev, a P2P Device can only be identified by its wdev identifier but the previous patches allowed using the wdev identifier in various APIs, e.g. remain-on-channel. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 22:19:54 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_START_P2P_DEVICE,
.doit = nl80211_start_p2p_device,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_STOP_P2P_DEVICE,
.doit = nl80211_stop_p2p_device,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_WDEV_UP |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
nl/cfg80211: add the NL80211_CMD_SET_MCAST_RATE command This command triggers a new callback: set_mcast_rate(). It enables the user to change the rate used to send multicast frames for vif configured as IBSS or MESH_POINT Signed-off-by: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-02 12:27:48 +00:00
{
.cmd = NL80211_CMD_SET_MCAST_RATE,
.doit = nl80211_set_mcast_rate,
.policy = nl80211_policy,
.flags = GENL_ADMIN_PERM,
.internal_flags = NL80211_FLAG_NEED_NETDEV |
NL80211_FLAG_NEED_RTNL,
},
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
};
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
static struct genl_multicast_group nl80211_mlme_mcgrp = {
.name = "mlme",
};
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* multicast groups */
static struct genl_multicast_group nl80211_config_mcgrp = {
.name = "config",
};
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
static struct genl_multicast_group nl80211_scan_mcgrp = {
.name = "scan",
};
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
static struct genl_multicast_group nl80211_regulatory_mcgrp = {
.name = "regulatory",
};
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* notification functions */
void nl80211_notify_dev_rename(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
if (nl80211_send_wiphy(msg, 0, 0, 0, rdev) < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_config_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
}
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
static int nl80211_add_scan_req(struct sk_buff *msg,
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev)
{
struct cfg80211_scan_request *req = rdev->scan_req;
struct nlattr *nest;
int i;
cfg80211: fix locking Over time, a lot of locking issues have crept into the smarts of cfg80211, so e.g. scan completion can race against a new scan, IBSS join can race against leaving an IBSS, etc. Introduce a new per-interface lock that protects most of the per-interface data that we need to keep track of, and sprinkle assertions about that lock everywhere. Some things now need to be offloaded to work structs so that we don't require being able to sleep in functions the drivers call. The exception to that are the MLME callbacks (rx_auth etc.) that currently only mac80211 calls because it was easier to do that there instead of in cfg80211, and future drivers implementing those calls will, if they ever exist, probably need to use a similar scheme like mac80211 anyway... In order to be able to handle _deauth and _disassoc properly, introduce a cookie passed to it that will determine locking requirements. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:11 +00:00
ASSERT_RDEV_LOCK(rdev);
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
if (WARN_ON(!req))
return 0;
nest = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_SSIDS);
if (!nest)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
for (i = 0; i < req->n_ssids; i++) {
if (nla_put(msg, i, req->ssids[i].ssid_len, req->ssids[i].ssid))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nest);
nest = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FREQUENCIES);
if (!nest)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
for (i = 0; i < req->n_channels; i++) {
if (nla_put_u32(msg, i, req->channels[i]->center_freq))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, nest);
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (req->ie &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IE, req->ie_len, req->ie))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
{nl,cfg}80211: add a flags word to scan requests Add a flags word to direct and scheduled scan requests; it will be used for control of optional behaviours such as flushing the bss cache prior to doing a scan. Signed-off-by: Sam Leffler <sleffler@chromium.org> Tested-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-12 04:03:31 +00:00
if (req->flags)
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_SCAN_FLAGS, req->flags);
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
return 0;
nla_put_failure:
return -ENOBUFS;
}
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
static int nl80211_send_scan_msg(struct sk_buff *msg,
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
u32 portid, u32 seq, int flags,
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
u32 cmd)
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
{
void *hdr;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags, cmd);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (!hdr)
return -1;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
(wdev->netdev && nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX,
wdev->netdev->ifindex)) ||
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WDEV, wdev_id(wdev)))
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nl80211: bounce scan request back to userspace When a scan finishes only the program that asked for it knows what kind of scan it was; let's tell everybody else about the scan parameters as well so they can evaluate the result of the scan better. Also helps with debugging. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-24 14:43:15 +00:00
/* ignore errors and send incomplete event anyway */
nl80211_add_scan_req(msg, rdev);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
static int
nl80211_send_sched_scan_msg(struct sk_buff *msg,
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
u32 portid, u32 seq, int flags, u32 cmd)
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
{
void *hdr;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, portid, seq, flags, cmd);
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (!hdr)
return -1;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
return genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
return -EMSGSIZE;
}
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
void nl80211_send_scan_start(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev)
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_scan_msg(msg, rdev, wdev, 0, 0, 0,
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_TRIGGER_SCAN) < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_scan_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
}
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
void nl80211_send_scan_done(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev)
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_scan_msg(msg, rdev, wdev, 0, 0, 0,
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_NEW_SCAN_RESULTS) < 0) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_scan_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
}
void nl80211_send_scan_aborted(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev)
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
nl80211: move scan API to wdev The new P2P Device will have to be able to scan for P2P search, so move scanning to use struct wireless_dev instead of struct net_device. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-18 17:17:03 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_scan_msg(msg, rdev, wdev, 0, 0, 0,
cfg80211: issue netlink notification when scan starts To ease multiple apps working together smoothly, send a notification when a scan is started. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-06-16 17:56:42 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_SCAN_ABORTED) < 0) {
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_scan_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
void nl80211_send_sched_scan_results(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
if (!msg)
return;
if (nl80211_send_sched_scan_msg(msg, rdev, netdev, 0, 0, 0,
NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS) < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_scan_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
}
void nl80211_send_sched_scan(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, u32 cmd)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211/nl80211: add support for scheduled scans Implement new functionality for scheduled scan offload. With this feature we can scan automatically at certain intervals. The idea is that the hardware can perform scan automatically and filter on desired results without waking up the host unnecessarily. Add NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN and NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN commands to the nl80211 interface. When results are available they are reported by NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_RESULTS events. The userspace is informed when the scheduled scan has stopped with a NL80211_CMD_SCHED_SCAN_STOPPED event, which can be triggered either by the driver or by a call to NL80211_CMD_STOP_SCHED_SCAN. Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-05-11 14:09:35 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
if (nl80211_send_sched_scan_msg(msg, rdev, netdev, 0, 0, 0, cmd) < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_scan_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
}
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
/*
* This can happen on global regulatory changes or device specific settings
* based on custom world regulatory domains.
*/
void nl80211_send_reg_change_event(struct regulatory_request *request)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_REG_CHANGE);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
/* Userspace can always count this one always being set */
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_INITIATOR, request->initiator))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (request->alpha2[0] == '0' && request->alpha2[1] == '0') {
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_TYPE,
NL80211_REGDOM_TYPE_WORLD))
goto nla_put_failure;
} else if (request->alpha2[0] == '9' && request->alpha2[1] == '9') {
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_TYPE,
NL80211_REGDOM_TYPE_CUSTOM_WORLD))
goto nla_put_failure;
} else if ((request->alpha2[0] == '9' && request->alpha2[1] == '8') ||
request->intersect) {
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_TYPE,
NL80211_REGDOM_TYPE_INTERSECTION))
goto nla_put_failure;
} else {
if (nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_TYPE,
NL80211_REGDOM_TYPE_COUNTRY) ||
nla_put_string(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REG_ALPHA2,
request->alpha2))
goto nla_put_failure;
}
if (wiphy_idx_valid(request->wiphy_idx) &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, request->wiphy_idx))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
cfg80211: fix circular lock dependency (1) Luis reported this lockdep complaint, that he had also reported earlier but when trying to analyse I had been locking at the wrong code, and never saw the problem: (slightly abridged) ======================================================= [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] 2.6.31-rc4-wl #6 ------------------------------------------------------- wpa_supplicant/3799 is trying to acquire lock: (cfg80211_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffffa009246a>] cfg80211_get_dev_from_ifindex+0x1a/0x90 [cfg80211] but task is already holding lock: (rtnl_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff81400ff2>] rtnl_lock+0x12/0x20 which lock already depends on the new lock. the existing dependency chain (in reverse order) is: -> #1 (rtnl_mutex){+.+.+.}: [<ffffffff810857b6>] __lock_acquire+0xd76/0x12b0 [<ffffffff81085dd3>] lock_acquire+0xe3/0x120 [<ffffffff814ee7a4>] mutex_lock_nested+0x44/0x350 [<ffffffff81400ff2>] rtnl_lock+0x12/0x20 [<ffffffffa009f6a5>] nl80211_send_reg_change_event+0x1f5/0x2a0 [cfg80211] [<ffffffffa009529e>] set_regdom+0x28e/0x4c0 [cfg80211] -> #0 (cfg80211_mutex){+.+.+.}: [<ffffffff8108587b>] __lock_acquire+0xe3b/0x12b0 [<ffffffff81085dd3>] lock_acquire+0xe3/0x120 [<ffffffff814ee7a4>] mutex_lock_nested+0x44/0x350 [<ffffffffa009246a>] cfg80211_get_dev_from_ifindex+0x1a/0x90 [cfg80211] [<ffffffffa009813f>] get_rdev_dev_by_info_ifindex+0x6f/0xa0 [cfg80211] [<ffffffffa009b12b>] nl80211_set_interface+0x3b/0x260 [cfg80211] When looking at the correct code, the problem is quite obvious. I'm not entirely sure which code paths lead here, so until I can analyse it better let's just use RCU to avoid the problem. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-25 08:54:13 +00:00
rcu_read_lock();
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_allns(msg, 0, nl80211_regulatory_mcgrp.id,
cfg80211: fix circular lock dependency (1) Luis reported this lockdep complaint, that he had also reported earlier but when trying to analyse I had been locking at the wrong code, and never saw the problem: (slightly abridged) ======================================================= [ INFO: possible circular locking dependency detected ] 2.6.31-rc4-wl #6 ------------------------------------------------------- wpa_supplicant/3799 is trying to acquire lock: (cfg80211_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffffa009246a>] cfg80211_get_dev_from_ifindex+0x1a/0x90 [cfg80211] but task is already holding lock: (rtnl_mutex){+.+.+.}, at: [<ffffffff81400ff2>] rtnl_lock+0x12/0x20 which lock already depends on the new lock. the existing dependency chain (in reverse order) is: -> #1 (rtnl_mutex){+.+.+.}: [<ffffffff810857b6>] __lock_acquire+0xd76/0x12b0 [<ffffffff81085dd3>] lock_acquire+0xe3/0x120 [<ffffffff814ee7a4>] mutex_lock_nested+0x44/0x350 [<ffffffff81400ff2>] rtnl_lock+0x12/0x20 [<ffffffffa009f6a5>] nl80211_send_reg_change_event+0x1f5/0x2a0 [cfg80211] [<ffffffffa009529e>] set_regdom+0x28e/0x4c0 [cfg80211] -> #0 (cfg80211_mutex){+.+.+.}: [<ffffffff8108587b>] __lock_acquire+0xe3b/0x12b0 [<ffffffff81085dd3>] lock_acquire+0xe3/0x120 [<ffffffff814ee7a4>] mutex_lock_nested+0x44/0x350 [<ffffffffa009246a>] cfg80211_get_dev_from_ifindex+0x1a/0x90 [cfg80211] [<ffffffffa009813f>] get_rdev_dev_by_info_ifindex+0x6f/0xa0 [cfg80211] [<ffffffffa009b12b>] nl80211_set_interface+0x3b/0x260 [cfg80211] When looking at the correct code, the problem is quite obvious. I'm not entirely sure which code paths lead here, so until I can analyse it better let's just use RCU to avoid the problem. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-25 08:54:13 +00:00
GFP_ATOMIC);
rcu_read_unlock();
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
static void nl80211_send_mlme_event(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev,
const u8 *buf, size_t len,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
enum nl80211_commands cmd, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, cmd);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FRAME, len, buf))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
void nl80211_send_rx_auth(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *buf,
size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
{
nl80211_send_mlme_event(rdev, netdev, buf, len,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE, gfp);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
}
void nl80211_send_rx_assoc(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *buf,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
{
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
nl80211_send_mlme_event(rdev, netdev, buf, len,
NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE, gfp);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
}
nl80211: Generate deauth/disassoc event for locally generated frames Previously, nl80211 mlme events were generated only for received deauthentication and disassociation frames. We need to do the same for locally generated ones in order to let applications know that we disconnected (e.g., when AP does not reply to a probe). Rename the nl80211 and cfg80211 functions (s/rx_//) to make it clearer that they are used for both received and locally generated frames. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 18:53:56 +00:00
void nl80211_send_deauth(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *buf,
size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
{
nl80211_send_mlme_event(rdev, netdev, buf, len,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_DEAUTHENTICATE, gfp);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
}
nl80211: Generate deauth/disassoc event for locally generated frames Previously, nl80211 mlme events were generated only for received deauthentication and disassociation frames. We need to do the same for locally generated ones in order to let applications know that we disconnected (e.g., when AP does not reply to a probe). Rename the nl80211 and cfg80211 functions (s/rx_//) to make it clearer that they are used for both received and locally generated frames. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 18:53:56 +00:00
void nl80211_send_disassoc(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *buf,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
{
nl80211_send_mlme_event(rdev, netdev, buf, len,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
NL80211_CMD_DISASSOCIATE, gfp);
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
}
nl80211: Add notification for dropped Deauth/Disassoc Add a new notification to indicate that a received, unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation frame was dropped due to management frame protection being in use. This notification is needed to allow user space (e.g., wpa_supplicant) to implement SA Query procedure to recover from association state mismatch between an AP and STA. This is needed to avoid getting stuck in non-working state when MFP (IEEE 802.11w) is used and a protected Deauthentication or Disassociation frame is dropped for any reason. After that, the station would silently discard any unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation frame that could be indicating that the AP does not have association for the STA (when the Reason Code would be 6 or 7). IEEE Std 802.11w-2009, 11.13 describes this recovery mechanism. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-12-15 22:52:40 +00:00
void nl80211_send_unprot_deauth(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *buf,
size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
{
nl80211_send_mlme_event(rdev, netdev, buf, len,
NL80211_CMD_UNPROT_DEAUTHENTICATE, gfp);
}
void nl80211_send_unprot_disassoc(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *buf,
size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
{
nl80211_send_mlme_event(rdev, netdev, buf, len,
NL80211_CMD_UNPROT_DISASSOCIATE, gfp);
}
cfg80211: make nl80211_send_mlme_timeout() static Fixes sparse complaint: CHECK net/wireless/nl80211.c net/wireless/nl80211.c:3694:6: warning: symbol 'nl80211_send_mlme_timeout' was not declared. Should it be static? Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-05-02 04:34:48 +00:00
static void nl80211_send_mlme_timeout(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, int cmd,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, cmd);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_TIMED_OUT) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, addr))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
void nl80211_send_auth_timeout(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *addr,
gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
{
nl80211_send_mlme_timeout(rdev, netdev, NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
addr, gfp);
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
}
void nl80211_send_assoc_timeout(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *addr,
gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
{
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
nl80211_send_mlme_timeout(rdev, netdev, NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE,
addr, gfp);
nl80211: Add event for authentication/association timeout SME needs to be notified when the authentication or association attempt times out and MLME has stopped processing in order to allow the SME to decide what to do next. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-22 18:38:25 +00:00
}
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
void nl80211_send_connect_result(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *bssid,
const u8 *req_ie, size_t req_ie_len,
const u8 *resp_ie, size_t resp_ie_len,
u16 status, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_CONNECT);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
(bssid && nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, bssid)) ||
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_STATUS_CODE, status) ||
(req_ie &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REQ_IE, req_ie_len, req_ie)) ||
(resp_ie &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_RESP_IE, resp_ie_len, resp_ie)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
void nl80211_send_roamed(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *bssid,
const u8 *req_ie, size_t req_ie_len,
const u8 *resp_ie, size_t resp_ie_len, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_ROAM);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, bssid) ||
(req_ie &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REQ_IE, req_ie_len, req_ie)) ||
(resp_ie &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_RESP_IE, resp_ie_len, resp_ie)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
void nl80211_send_disconnected(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, u16 reason,
cfg80211: fix locking Over time, a lot of locking issues have crept into the smarts of cfg80211, so e.g. scan completion can race against a new scan, IBSS join can race against leaving an IBSS, etc. Introduce a new per-interface lock that protects most of the per-interface data that we need to keep track of, and sprinkle assertions about that lock everywhere. Some things now need to be offloaded to work structs so that we don't require being able to sleep in functions the drivers call. The exception to that are the MLME callbacks (rx_auth etc.) that currently only mac80211 calls because it was easier to do that there instead of in cfg80211, and future drivers implementing those calls will, if they ever exist, probably need to use a similar scheme like mac80211 anyway... In order to be able to handle _deauth and _disassoc properly, introduce a cookie passed to it that will determine locking requirements. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-07 01:56:11 +00:00
const u8 *ie, size_t ie_len, bool from_ap)
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_DISCONNECT);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
(from_ap && reason &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE, reason)) ||
(from_ap &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_DISCONNECTED_BY_AP)) ||
(ie && nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IE, ie_len, ie)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, GFP_KERNEL);
cfg80211: connect/disconnect API This patch introduces the cfg80211 connect/disconnect API. The goal here is to run the AUTH and ASSOC steps in one call. This is needed for some fullmac cards that run both steps directly from the target, after the host driver sends a connect command. Additionally, all the new crypto parameters for connect() are now also valid for associate() -- although associate requires the IEs to be used, the information can be useful for drivers and should be given. Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <samuel.ortiz@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:54 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
void nl80211_send_ibss_bssid(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *bssid,
gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_JOIN_IBSS);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, bssid))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
cfg80211/nl80211: add IBSS API This adds IBSS API along with (preliminary) wext handlers. The wext handlers can only do IBSS so you need to call them from your own wext handlers if the mode is IBSS. The nl80211 API requires * an SSID * a channel (frequency) for the case that a new IBSS has to be created It optionally supports * a flag to fix the channel * a fixed BSSID The cfg80211 code also takes care to leave the IBSS before the netdev is set down. If wireless extensions are used, it also caches values when the interface is down and instructs the driver to join when the interface is set up. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-19 19:24:32 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
nl80211: New notification to discover mesh peer candidates. Notify userspace when a beacon/presp is received from a suitable mesh peer candidate for whom no sta information exists. Userspace can then decide to create a sta info for the candidate. If userspace is not ready to authenticate the peer right away, it can create the sta info with the authenticated flag unset and set it later. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:34 +00:00
void nl80211_send_new_peer_candidate(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev,
const u8 *macaddr, const u8* ie, u8 ie_len,
gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_NEW_PEER_CANDIDATE);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, macaddr) ||
(ie_len && ie &&
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IE, ie_len , ie)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: New notification to discover mesh peer candidates. Notify userspace when a beacon/presp is received from a suitable mesh peer candidate for whom no sta information exists. Userspace can then decide to create a sta info for the candidate. If userspace is not ready to authenticate the peer right away, it can create the sta info with the authenticated flag unset and set it later. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:34 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: New notification to discover mesh peer candidates. Notify userspace when a beacon/presp is received from a suitable mesh peer candidate for whom no sta information exists. Userspace can then decide to create a sta info for the candidate. If userspace is not ready to authenticate the peer right away, it can create the sta info with the authenticated flag unset and set it later. Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-04-07 22:08:34 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
nl80211: Add Michael MIC failure event Define a new nl80211 event, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE, to be used to notify user space about locally detected Michael MIC failures. This matches with the MLME-MICHAELMICFAILURE.indication() primitive. Since we do not actually have TSC in the skb anymore when mac80211_ev_michael_mic_failure() is called, that function is changed to take in the TSC as an optional parameter instead of as a requirement to include the TSC after the hdr field (which we did not really follow). For now, TSC is not included in the events from mac80211, but it could be added at some point. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 19:59:49 +00:00
void nl80211_michael_mic_failure(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *addr,
enum nl80211_key_type key_type, int key_id,
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
const u8 *tsc, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: Add Michael MIC failure event Define a new nl80211 event, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE, to be used to notify user space about locally detected Michael MIC failures. This matches with the MLME-MICHAELMICFAILURE.indication() primitive. Since we do not actually have TSC in the skb anymore when mac80211_ev_michael_mic_failure() is called, that function is changed to take in the TSC as an optional parameter instead of as a requirement to include the TSC after the hdr field (which we did not really follow). For now, TSC is not included in the events from mac80211, but it could be added at some point. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 19:59:49 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
cfg80211: use proper allocation flags Instead of hardcoding GFP_ATOMIC everywhere, add a new function parameter that gets the flags from the caller. Obviously then I need to update all callers (all of them in mac80211), and it turns out that now it's ok to use GFP_KERNEL in almost all places. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:47 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
nl80211: Add Michael MIC failure event Define a new nl80211 event, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE, to be used to notify user space about locally detected Michael MIC failures. This matches with the MLME-MICHAELMICFAILURE.indication() primitive. Since we do not actually have TSC in the skb anymore when mac80211_ev_michael_mic_failure() is called, that function is changed to take in the TSC as an optional parameter instead of as a requirement to include the TSC after the hdr field (which we did not really follow). For now, TSC is not included in the events from mac80211, but it could be added at some point. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 19:59:49 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
(addr && nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, addr)) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_TYPE, key_type) ||
(key_id != -1 &&
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_IDX, key_id)) ||
(tsc && nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_KEY_SEQ, 6, tsc)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: Add Michael MIC failure event Define a new nl80211 event, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE, to be used to notify user space about locally detected Michael MIC failures. This matches with the MLME-MICHAELMICFAILURE.indication() primitive. Since we do not actually have TSC in the skb anymore when mac80211_ev_michael_mic_failure() is called, that function is changed to take in the TSC as an optional parameter instead of as a requirement to include the TSC after the hdr field (which we did not really follow). For now, TSC is not included in the events from mac80211, but it could be added at some point. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 19:59:49 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
nl80211: Add Michael MIC failure event Define a new nl80211 event, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE, to be used to notify user space about locally detected Michael MIC failures. This matches with the MLME-MICHAELMICFAILURE.indication() primitive. Since we do not actually have TSC in the skb anymore when mac80211_ev_michael_mic_failure() is called, that function is changed to take in the TSC as an optional parameter instead of as a requirement to include the TSC after the hdr field (which we did not really follow). For now, TSC is not included in the events from mac80211, but it could be added at some point. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 19:59:49 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
nl80211: Add Michael MIC failure event Define a new nl80211 event, NL80211_CMD_MICHAEL_MIC_FAILURE, to be used to notify user space about locally detected Michael MIC failures. This matches with the MLME-MICHAELMICFAILURE.indication() primitive. Since we do not actually have TSC in the skb anymore when mac80211_ev_michael_mic_failure() is called, that function is changed to take in the TSC as an optional parameter instead of as a requirement to include the TSC after the hdr field (which we did not really follow). For now, TSC is not included in the events from mac80211, but it could be added at some point. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-27 19:59:49 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: send regulatory beacon hint events to userspace This informs userspace when a change has occured on a world roaming wiphy's channel which has lifted some restrictions due to a regulatory beacon hint. Because this is now sent to userspace through the regulatory multicast group we remove the debug prints we used to use as they are no longer necessary. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:09 +00:00
void nl80211_send_beacon_hint_event(struct wiphy *wiphy,
struct ieee80211_channel *channel_before,
struct ieee80211_channel *channel_after)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
struct nlattr *nl_freq;
net: use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in nlmsg_new() allocations nlmsg_new() adds the size of the netlink header to the value that has been passed as parameter. If NLMSG_GOODSIZE is selected, we request an allocation of one memory page plus the size of the header. Instead, NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE should be used since it already substracts the size of the Netlink header. I have the impression that the similar naming in both constant is error prone when using it with nlmsg_new(). This is already documented in include/net/netlink.h Signed-off-by: Pablo Neira Ayuso <pablo@netfilter.org> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-19 22:27:55 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, GFP_ATOMIC);
cfg80211: send regulatory beacon hint events to userspace This informs userspace when a change has occured on a world roaming wiphy's channel which has lifted some restrictions due to a regulatory beacon hint. Because this is now sent to userspace through the regulatory multicast group we remove the debug prints we used to use as they are no longer necessary. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:09 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_REG_BEACON_HINT);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
/*
* Since we are applying the beacon hint to a wiphy we know its
* wiphy_idx is valid
*/
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, get_wiphy_idx(wiphy)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: send regulatory beacon hint events to userspace This informs userspace when a change has occured on a world roaming wiphy's channel which has lifted some restrictions due to a regulatory beacon hint. Because this is now sent to userspace through the regulatory multicast group we remove the debug prints we used to use as they are no longer necessary. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:09 +00:00
/* Before */
nl_freq = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_BEFORE);
if (!nl_freq)
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nl80211_msg_put_channel(msg, channel_before))
goto nla_put_failure;
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_freq);
/* After */
nl_freq = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FREQ_AFTER);
if (!nl_freq)
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nl80211_msg_put_channel(msg, channel_after))
goto nla_put_failure;
nla_nest_end(msg, nl_freq);
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: send regulatory beacon hint events to userspace This informs userspace when a change has occured on a world roaming wiphy's channel which has lifted some restrictions due to a regulatory beacon hint. Because this is now sent to userspace through the regulatory multicast group we remove the debug prints we used to use as they are no longer necessary. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:09 +00:00
cfg80211: make aware of net namespaces In order to make cfg80211/nl80211 aware of network namespaces, we have to do the following things: * del_virtual_intf method takes an interface index rather than a netdev pointer - simply change this * nl80211 uses init_net a lot, it changes to use the sender's network namespace * scan requests use the interface index, hold a netdev pointer and reference instead * we want a wiphy and its associated virtual interfaces to be in one netns together, so - we need to be able to change ns for a given interface, so export dev_change_net_namespace() - for each virtual interface set the NETIF_F_NETNS_LOCAL flag, and clear that flag only when the wiphy changes ns, to disallow breaking this invariant * when a network namespace goes away, we need to reparent the wiphy to init_net * cfg80211 users that support creating virtual interfaces must create them in the wiphy's namespace, currently this affects only mac80211 The end result is that you can now switch an entire wiphy into a different network namespace with the new command iw phy#<idx> set netns <pid> and all virtual interfaces will follow (or the operation fails). Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-13 22:33:35 +00:00
rcu_read_lock();
genlmsg_multicast_allns(msg, 0, nl80211_regulatory_mcgrp.id,
GFP_ATOMIC);
rcu_read_unlock();
cfg80211: send regulatory beacon hint events to userspace This informs userspace when a change has occured on a world roaming wiphy's channel which has lifted some restrictions due to a regulatory beacon hint. Because this is now sent to userspace through the regulatory multicast group we remove the debug prints we used to use as they are no longer necessary. Acked-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-04-02 18:08:09 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
static void nl80211_send_remain_on_chan_event(
int cmd, struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev, u64 cookie,
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
unsigned int duration, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, cmd);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
(wdev->netdev && nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX,
wdev->netdev->ifindex)) ||
nl80211: add wdev ID as u64 as it should In one of my previous patches I erroneously used nla_put_u32 for the wdev_id, fix that to use nla_put_u64. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-17 09:53:12 +00:00
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WDEV, wdev_id(wdev)) ||
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ, chan->center_freq) ||
cfg80211: remove remain-on-channel channel type As mwifiex (and mac80211 in the software case) are the only drivers actually implementing remain-on-channel with channel type, userspace can't be relying on it. This is the case, as it's used only for P2P operations right now. Rather than adding a flag to tell userspace whether or not it can actually rely on it, simplify all the code by removing the ability to use different channel types. Leave only the validation of the attribute, so that if we extend it again later (with the needed capability flag), it can't break userspace sending invalid data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 17:31:02 +00:00
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_CHANNEL_TYPE,
NL80211_CHAN_NO_HT) ||
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE, cookie))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (cmd == NL80211_CMD_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_DURATION, duration))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
void nl80211_send_remain_on_channel(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev, u64 cookie,
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
unsigned int duration, gfp_t gfp)
{
nl80211_send_remain_on_chan_event(NL80211_CMD_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
rdev, wdev, cookie, chan,
cfg80211: remove remain-on-channel channel type As mwifiex (and mac80211 in the software case) are the only drivers actually implementing remain-on-channel with channel type, userspace can't be relying on it. This is the case, as it's used only for P2P operations right now. Rather than adding a flag to tell userspace whether or not it can actually rely on it, simplify all the code by removing the ability to use different channel types. Leave only the validation of the attribute, so that if we extend it again later (with the needed capability flag), it can't break userspace sending invalid data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 17:31:02 +00:00
duration, gfp);
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
}
void nl80211_send_remain_on_channel_cancel(
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct wireless_dev *wdev,
cfg80211: remove remain-on-channel channel type As mwifiex (and mac80211 in the software case) are the only drivers actually implementing remain-on-channel with channel type, userspace can't be relying on it. This is the case, as it's used only for P2P operations right now. Rather than adding a flag to tell userspace whether or not it can actually rely on it, simplify all the code by removing the ability to use different channel types. Leave only the validation of the attribute, so that if we extend it again later (with the needed capability flag), it can't break userspace sending invalid data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 17:31:02 +00:00
u64 cookie, struct ieee80211_channel *chan, gfp_t gfp)
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
{
nl80211_send_remain_on_chan_event(NL80211_CMD_CANCEL_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL,
cfg80211: remove remain-on-channel channel type As mwifiex (and mac80211 in the software case) are the only drivers actually implementing remain-on-channel with channel type, userspace can't be relying on it. This is the case, as it's used only for P2P operations right now. Rather than adding a flag to tell userspace whether or not it can actually rely on it, simplify all the code by removing the ability to use different channel types. Leave only the validation of the attribute, so that if we extend it again later (with the needed capability flag), it can't break userspace sending invalid data. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 17:31:02 +00:00
rdev, wdev, cookie, chan, 0, gfp);
cfg80211: add remain-on-channel command Add new commands for requesting the driver to remain awake on a specified channel for the specified amount of time (and another command to cancel such an operation). This can be used to implement userspace-controlled off-channel operations, like Public Action frame exchange on another channel than the operation channel. The off-channel operation should behave similarly to scan, i.e. the local station (if associated) moves into power save mode to request the AP to buffer frames for it and then moves to the other channel to allow the off-channel operation to be completed. The duration parameter can be used to request enough time to receive a response from the target station. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:41 +00:00
}
mac80211/cfg80211: add station events When, for instance, a new IBSS peer is found, userspace wants to be notified. Add events for all new stations that mac80211 learns about. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:44 +00:00
void nl80211_send_sta_event(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *dev, const u8 *mac_addr,
struct station_info *sinfo, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
mac80211/cfg80211: add station events When, for instance, a new IBSS peer is found, userspace wants to be notified. Add events for all new stations that mac80211 learns about. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:44 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
cfg80211: allow CFG80211_SIGNAL_TYPE_UNSPEC in station_info The station_info struct had demanded dBm signal values, but the cfg80211 wireless extensions implementation was also accepting "unspecified" (i.e. RSSI) unit values while the nl80211 code was completely unaware of them. Resolve this by formally allowing the "unspecified" units while making nl80211 ignore them. Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
2012-03-15 17:25:41 +00:00
if (nl80211_send_station(msg, 0, 0, 0,
rdev, dev, mac_addr, sinfo) < 0) {
mac80211/cfg80211: add station events When, for instance, a new IBSS peer is found, userspace wants to be notified. Add events for all new stations that mac80211 learns about. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-12-23 12:15:44 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
}
cfg80211: Add nl80211 event for deletion of a station entry Indicate an NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event when a station entry in mac80211 is deleted to match with the NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION event that is used when the entry was added. This is needed, e.g., to allow user space to remove a peer from RSN IBSS Authenticator state machine to avoid re-authentication and re-keying delays when the peer is not reachable anymore. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-23 13:29:52 +00:00
void nl80211_send_sta_del_event(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *dev, const u8 *mac_addr,
gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: Add nl80211 event for deletion of a station entry Indicate an NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event when a station entry in mac80211 is deleted to match with the NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION event that is used when the entry was added. This is needed, e.g., to allow user space to remove a peer from RSN IBSS Authenticator state machine to avoid re-authentication and re-keying delays when the peer is not reachable anymore. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-23 13:29:52 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, mac_addr))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: Add nl80211 event for deletion of a station entry Indicate an NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event when a station entry in mac80211 is deleted to match with the NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION event that is used when the entry was added. This is needed, e.g., to allow user space to remove a peer from RSN IBSS Authenticator state machine to avoid re-authentication and re-keying delays when the peer is not reachable anymore. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-23 13:29:52 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: Add nl80211 event for deletion of a station entry Indicate an NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event when a station entry in mac80211 is deleted to match with the NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION event that is used when the entry was added. This is needed, e.g., to allow user space to remove a peer from RSN IBSS Authenticator state machine to avoid re-authentication and re-keying delays when the peer is not reachable anymore. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-03-23 13:29:52 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211/nl80211: Notify connection request failure in AP mode In AP mode, when a station requests connection to an AP and if the request is failed for particular reason, userspace is notified about the failure through NL80211_CMD_CONN_FAILED command. Reason for the failure is sent through the attribute NL80211_ATTR_CONN_FAILED_REASON. Signed-off-by: Pandiyarajan Pitchaimuthu <c_ppitch@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-09-18 11:20:49 +00:00
void nl80211_send_conn_failed_event(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *dev, const u8 *mac_addr,
enum nl80211_connect_failed_reason reason,
gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_GOODSIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_CONN_FAILED);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, mac_addr) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CONN_FAILED_REASON, reason))
goto nla_put_failure;
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: add event for unexpected 4addr frames The frames are used by AP/STA WDS mode, and hostapd needs to know when such a frame was received to set up the VLAN appropriately to allow using it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:19 +00:00
static bool __nl80211_unexpected_frame(struct net_device *dev, u8 cmd,
const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
{
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wdev->wiphy);
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
int err;
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
u32 nlportid = ACCESS_ONCE(wdev->ap_unexpected_nlportid);
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
if (!nlportid)
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
return false;
msg = nlmsg_new(100, gfp);
if (!msg)
return true;
cfg80211: add event for unexpected 4addr frames The frames are used by AP/STA WDS mode, and hostapd needs to know when such a frame was received to set up the VLAN appropriately to allow using it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:19 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, cmd);
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return true;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, addr))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
err = genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
if (err < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return true;
}
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
genlmsg_unicast(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, nlportid);
nl80211: allow subscribing to unexpected class3 frames To implement AP mode without monitor interfaces we need to be able to send a deauth to stations that send frames without being associated. Enable this by adding a new nl80211 event for such frames that an application can subscribe to. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:12 +00:00
return true;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
return true;
}
cfg80211: add event for unexpected 4addr frames The frames are used by AP/STA WDS mode, and hostapd needs to know when such a frame was received to set up the VLAN appropriately to allow using it. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:19 +00:00
bool nl80211_unexpected_frame(struct net_device *dev, const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
{
return __nl80211_unexpected_frame(dev, NL80211_CMD_UNEXPECTED_FRAME,
addr, gfp);
}
bool nl80211_unexpected_4addr_frame(struct net_device *dev,
const u8 *addr, gfp_t gfp)
{
return __nl80211_unexpected_frame(dev,
NL80211_CMD_UNEXPECTED_4ADDR_FRAME,
addr, gfp);
}
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
int nl80211_send_mgmt(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev, u32 nlportid,
cfg80211/mac80211: report signal strength for mgmt frames Add the signal strength (in dBm only for now) to frames that are received via nl80211's various frame APIs. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Acked-by: Kalle Valo <kvalo@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-03-05 21:18:41 +00:00
int freq, int sig_dbm,
const u8 *buf, size_t len, gfp_t gfp)
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
{
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev = wdev->netdev;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return -ENOMEM;
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_FRAME);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOMEM;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
(netdev && nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX,
netdev->ifindex)) ||
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ, freq) ||
(sig_dbm &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_RX_SIGNAL_DBM, sig_dbm)) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FRAME, len, buf))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
return genlmsg_unicast(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, nlportid);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
return -ENOBUFS;
}
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
void nl80211_send_mgmt_tx_status(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct wireless_dev *wdev, u64 cookie,
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
const u8 *buf, size_t len, bool ack,
gfp_t gfp)
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
{
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev = wdev->netdev;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return;
cfg80211/mac80211: extensible frame processing Allow userspace to register for more than just action frames by giving the frame subtype, and make it possible to use this in various modes as well. With some tweaks and some added functionality this will, in the future, also be usable in AP mode and be able to replace the cooked monitor interface currently used in that case. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-08-12 13:38:38 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_FRAME_TX_STATUS);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
cfg80211: use wdev in mgmt-tx/ROC APIs The management frame and remain-on-channel APIs will be needed in the P2P device abstraction, so move them over to the new wdev-based APIs. Userspace can still use both the interface index and wdev identifier for them so it's backward compatible, but for the P2P Device wdev it will be able to use the wdev identifier only. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 13:30:18 +00:00
(netdev && nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX,
netdev->ifindex)) ||
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FRAME, len, buf) ||
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE, cookie) ||
(ack && nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_ACK)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast(msg, 0, nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
void
nl80211_send_cqm_rssi_notify(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev,
enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
struct nlattr *pinfoattr;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_NOTIFY_CQM);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
pinfoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM);
if (!pinfoattr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM_RSSI_THRESHOLD_EVENT,
rssi_event))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, pinfoattr);
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: Add connection quality monitoring support to nl80211 Add support for basic configuration of a connection quality monitoring to the nl80211 interface, and basic support for notifying about triggered monitoring events. Via this interface a user-space connection manager may configure and receive pre-warning events of deteriorating WLAN connection quality, and start preparing for roaming in advance, before the connection is already lost. An example usage of such a trigger is starting scanning for nearby AP's in an attempt to find one with better connection quality, and associate to it before the connection characteristics of the existing connection become too bad or the association is even lost, leading in a prolonged delay in connectivity. The interface currently supports only RSSI, but it could be later extended to include other parameters, such as signal-to-noise ratio, if need for that arises. Signed-off-by: Juuso Oikarinen <juuso.oikarinen@nokia.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-03-23 07:02:33 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
void nl80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *bssid,
const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
struct nlattr *rekey_attr;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_SET_REKEY_OFFLOAD);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, bssid))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
rekey_attr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REKEY_DATA);
if (!rekey_attr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put(msg, NL80211_REKEY_DATA_REPLAY_CTR,
NL80211_REPLAY_CTR_LEN, replay_ctr))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, rekey_attr);
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211/nl80211: support GTK rekey offload In certain circumstances, like WoWLAN scenarios, devices may implement (partial) GTK rekeying on the device to avoid waking up the host for it. In order to successfully go through GTK rekeying, the KEK, KCK and the replay counter are required. Add API to let the supplicant hand the parameters to the driver which may store it for future GTK rekey operations. Note that, of course, if GTK rekeying is done by the device, the EAP frame must not be passed up to userspace, instead a rekey event needs to be sent to let userspace update its replay counter. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-07-05 14:35:40 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211/nl80211: Add PMKSA caching candidate event When the driver (or most likely firmware) decides which AP to use for roaming based on internal scan result processing, user space needs to be notified of PMKSA caching candidates to allow RSN pre-authentication to be used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 15:56:23 +00:00
void nl80211_pmksa_candidate_notify(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, int index,
const u8 *bssid, bool preauth, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
struct nlattr *attr;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211/nl80211: Add PMKSA caching candidate event When the driver (or most likely firmware) decides which AP to use for roaming based on internal scan result processing, user space needs to be notified of PMKSA caching candidates to allow RSN pre-authentication to be used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 15:56:23 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_PMKSA_CANDIDATE);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: Add PMKSA caching candidate event When the driver (or most likely firmware) decides which AP to use for roaming based on internal scan result processing, user space needs to be notified of PMKSA caching candidates to allow RSN pre-authentication to be used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 15:56:23 +00:00
attr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_PMKSA_CANDIDATE);
if (!attr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_PMKSA_CANDIDATE_INDEX, index) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_PMKSA_CANDIDATE_BSSID, ETH_ALEN, bssid) ||
(preauth &&
nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_PMKSA_CANDIDATE_PREAUTH)))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211/nl80211: Add PMKSA caching candidate event When the driver (or most likely firmware) decides which AP to use for roaming based on internal scan result processing, user space needs to be notified of PMKSA caching candidates to allow RSN pre-authentication to be used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 15:56:23 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, attr);
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211/nl80211: Add PMKSA caching candidate event When the driver (or most likely firmware) decides which AP to use for roaming based on internal scan result processing, user space needs to be notified of PMKSA caching candidates to allow RSN pre-authentication to be used. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-09-16 15:56:23 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: add channel switch notify event The firmware may decide to switch channels while already beaconing, e.g. in response to a cfg80211 connect request on a different vif. Add this event to notify userspace when an AP or GO interface has successfully migrated to a new channel, so it can update its configuration accordingly. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-06 20:35:47 +00:00
void nl80211_ch_switch_notify(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
struct net_device *netdev,
struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, gfp_t gfp)
cfg80211: add channel switch notify event The firmware may decide to switch channels while already beaconing, e.g. in response to a cfg80211 connect request on a different vif. Add this event to notify userspace when an AP or GO interface has successfully migrated to a new channel, so it can update its configuration accordingly. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-06 20:35:47 +00:00
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: add channel switch notify event The firmware may decide to switch channels while already beaconing, e.g. in response to a cfg80211 connect request on a different vif. Add this event to notify userspace when an AP or GO interface has successfully migrated to a new channel, so it can update its configuration accordingly. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-06 20:35:47 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_CH_SWITCH_NOTIFY);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
cfg80211: pass a channel definition struct Instead of passing a channel pointer and channel type to all functions and driver methods, pass a new channel definition struct. Right now, this struct contains just the control channel and channel type, but for VHT this will change. Also, add a small inline cfg80211_get_chandef_type() so that drivers don't need to use the _type field of the new structure all the time, which will change. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-08 20:25:48 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nl80211_send_chandef(msg, chandef))
Merge branch 'master' into for-davem Conflicts: drivers/net/wireless/iwlwifi/iwl-testmode.c net/wireless/nl80211.c
2012-04-12 18:25:14 +00:00
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: add channel switch notify event The firmware may decide to switch channels while already beaconing, e.g. in response to a cfg80211 connect request on a different vif. Add this event to notify userspace when an AP or GO interface has successfully migrated to a new channel, so it can update its configuration accordingly. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2012-04-06 20:35:47 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: support TX error rate CQM Let the user configure serveral TX error conection quality monitoring parameters: % error rate, survey interval, and # of attempted packets. On exceeding the TX failure rate over the given interval, the driver will send a CQM notify event with the actual TX failure rate and packets attempted. Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-07-12 23:17:33 +00:00
void
nl80211_send_cqm_txe_notify(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *peer,
u32 num_packets, u32 rate, u32 intvl, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
struct nlattr *pinfoattr;
void *hdr;
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_GOODSIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_NOTIFY_CQM);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, peer))
goto nla_put_failure;
pinfoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM);
if (!pinfoattr)
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_PKTS, num_packets))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_RATE, rate))
goto nla_put_failure;
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM_TXE_INTVL, intvl))
goto nla_put_failure;
nla_nest_end(msg, pinfoattr);
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
cfg80211: allow using CQM event to notify packet loss This adds the ability for drivers to use CQM events to notify about packet loss for specific stations (which could be the AP for the managed mode case). Since the threshold might be determined by the driver (it isn't passed in right now) it will be passed out of the driver to userspace in the event. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-24 07:10:05 +00:00
void
nl80211_send_cqm_pktloss_notify(struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev,
struct net_device *netdev, const u8 *peer,
u32 num_packets, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct sk_buff *msg;
struct nlattr *pinfoattr;
void *hdr;
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: allow using CQM event to notify packet loss This adds the ability for drivers to use CQM events to notify about packet loss for specific stations (which could be the AP for the managed mode case). Since the threshold might be determined by the driver (it isn't passed in right now) it will be passed out of the driver to userspace in the event. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-24 07:10:05 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_NOTIFY_CQM);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, netdev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, peer))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow using CQM event to notify packet loss This adds the ability for drivers to use CQM events to notify about packet loss for specific stations (which could be the AP for the managed mode case). Since the threshold might be determined by the driver (it isn't passed in right now) it will be passed out of the driver to userspace in the event. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-24 07:10:05 +00:00
pinfoattr = nla_nest_start(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM);
if (!pinfoattr)
goto nla_put_failure;
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_CQM_PKT_LOSS_EVENT, num_packets))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow using CQM event to notify packet loss This adds the ability for drivers to use CQM events to notify about packet loss for specific stations (which could be the AP for the managed mode case). Since the threshold might be determined by the driver (it isn't passed in right now) it will be passed out of the driver to userspace in the event. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-24 07:10:05 +00:00
nla_nest_end(msg, pinfoattr);
nl80211: clean up genlmsg_end uses genlmsg_end() cannot fail, it just returns the length of the message. Thus, error handling for it is useless. While removing it, I also noticed a useless variable and removed this it as well. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-10-22 17:05:51 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: allow using CQM event to notify packet loss This adds the ability for drivers to use CQM events to notify about packet loss for specific stations (which could be the AP for the managed mode case). Since the threshold might be determined by the driver (it isn't passed in right now) it will be passed out of the driver to userspace in the event. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-11-24 07:10:05 +00:00
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
void cfg80211_probe_status(struct net_device *dev, const u8 *addr,
u64 cookie, bool acked, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wdev->wiphy);
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
int err;
cfg80211: add cfg80211 exported function tracing Also add tracing to the API functions that drivers (and mac80211) can call in cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-08-27 09:49:39 +00:00
trace_cfg80211_probe_status(dev, addr, cookie, acked);
net: Use NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE in combination with nlmsg_new() Using NLMSG_GOODSIZE results in multiple pages being used as nlmsg_new() will automatically add the size of the netlink header to the payload thus exceeding the page limit. NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE takes this into account. Signed-off-by: Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> Cc: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Cc: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov <dbaryshkov@gmail.com> Cc: Sergey Lapin <slapin@ossfans.org> Cc: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Cc: Lauro Ramos Venancio <lauro.venancio@openbossa.org> Cc: Aloisio Almeida Jr <aloisio.almeida@openbossa.org> Cc: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com> Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jpirko@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-06-28 03:57:45 +00:00
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
cfg80211: add cfg80211 exported function tracing Also add tracing to the API functions that drivers (and mac80211) can call in cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-08-27 09:49:39 +00:00
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_PROBE_CLIENT);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
wireless: Stop using NLA_PUT*(). These macros contain a hidden goto, and are thus extremely error prone and make code hard to audit. Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-03-29 08:41:26 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, addr) ||
nla_put_u64(msg, NL80211_ATTR_COOKIE, cookie) ||
(acked && nla_put_flag(msg, NL80211_ATTR_ACK)))
goto nla_put_failure;
nl80211: add API to probe a client When the AP SME in hostapd is used it wants to probe the clients when they have been idle for some time. Add explicit API to support this. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:15 +00:00
err = genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
if (err < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_probe_status);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
void cfg80211_report_obss_beacon(struct wiphy *wiphy,
const u8 *frame, size_t len,
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
int freq, int sig_dbm)
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
{
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wiphy);
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
struct cfg80211_beacon_registration *reg;
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
cfg80211: add cfg80211 exported function tracing Also add tracing to the API functions that drivers (and mac80211) can call in cfg80211. Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Emmanuel Grumbach <emmanuel.grumbach@intel.com> Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-08-27 09:49:39 +00:00
trace_cfg80211_report_obss_beacon(wiphy, frame, len, freq, sig_dbm);
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
spin_lock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
list_for_each_entry(reg, &rdev->beacon_registrations, list) {
msg = nlmsg_new(len + 100, GFP_ATOMIC);
if (!msg) {
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
return;
}
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_FRAME);
if (!hdr)
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
(freq &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ, freq)) ||
(sig_dbm &&
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_RX_SIGNAL_DBM, sig_dbm)) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_FRAME, len, frame))
goto nla_put_failure;
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
genlmsg_unicast(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, reg->nlportid);
}
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
return;
nla_put_failure:
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
if (hdr)
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_report_obss_beacon);
cfg80211: Add TDLS event to allow drivers to request operations The NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER command was previously used only for userspace request for the kernel code to perform TDLS operations. However, there are also cases where the driver may need to request operations from userspace, e.g., when using security on the AP path. Add a new cfg80211 function for generating a TDLS operation event for drivers to request a new link to be set up (NL80211_TDLS_SETUP) or an existing link to be torn down (NL80211_TDLS_TEARDOWN). Drivers can optionally use these events, e.g., based on noticing data traffic being sent to a peer station that is seen with good signal strength. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-11-16 20:49:57 +00:00
void cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(struct net_device *dev, const u8 *peer,
enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp)
{
struct wireless_dev *wdev = dev->ieee80211_ptr;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev = wiphy_to_dev(wdev->wiphy);
struct sk_buff *msg;
void *hdr;
int err;
trace_cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(wdev->wiphy, dev, peer, oper,
reason_code);
msg = nlmsg_new(NLMSG_DEFAULT_SIZE, gfp);
if (!msg)
return;
hdr = nl80211hdr_put(msg, 0, 0, 0, NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER);
if (!hdr) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
if (nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY, rdev->wiphy_idx) ||
nla_put_u32(msg, NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX, dev->ifindex) ||
nla_put_u8(msg, NL80211_ATTR_TDLS_OPERATION, oper) ||
nla_put(msg, NL80211_ATTR_MAC, ETH_ALEN, peer) ||
(reason_code > 0 &&
nla_put_u16(msg, NL80211_ATTR_REASON_CODE, reason_code)))
goto nla_put_failure;
err = genlmsg_end(msg, hdr);
if (err < 0) {
nlmsg_free(msg);
return;
}
genlmsg_multicast_netns(wiphy_net(&rdev->wiphy), msg, 0,
nl80211_mlme_mcgrp.id, gfp);
return;
nla_put_failure:
genlmsg_cancel(msg, hdr);
nlmsg_free(msg);
}
EXPORT_SYMBOL(cfg80211_tdls_oper_request);
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
static int nl80211_netlink_notify(struct notifier_block * nb,
unsigned long state,
void *_notify)
{
struct netlink_notify *notify = _notify;
struct cfg80211_registered_device *rdev;
struct wireless_dev *wdev;
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
struct cfg80211_beacon_registration *reg, *tmp;
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
if (state != NETLINK_URELEASE)
return NOTIFY_DONE;
rcu_read_lock();
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
list_for_each_entry_rcu(rdev, &cfg80211_rdev_list, list) {
nl80211: prepare for non-netdev wireless devs In order to support a P2P device abstraction and Bluetooth high-speed AMPs, we need to have a way to identify virtual interfaces that don't have a netdev associated. Do this by adding a NL80211_ATTR_WDEV attribute to identify a wdev which may or may not also be a netdev. To simplify things, use a 64-bit value with the high 32 bits being the wiphy index for this new wdev identifier in the nl80211 API. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-06-15 12:33:17 +00:00
list_for_each_entry_rcu(wdev, &rdev->wdev_list, list)
netlink: Rename pid to portid to avoid confusion It is a frequent mistake to confuse the netlink port identifier with a process identifier. Try to reduce this confusion by renaming fields that hold port identifiers portid instead of pid. I have carefully avoided changing the structures exported to userspace to avoid changing the userspace API. I have successfully built an allyesconfig kernel with this change. Signed-off-by: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com> Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2012-09-07 20:12:54 +00:00
cfg80211_mlme_unregister_socket(wdev, notify->portid);
cfg80211: allow registering more than one beacon listener The commit: commit 5e760230e42cf759bd923457ca2753aacf2e656e Author: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Date: Fri Nov 4 11:18:17 2011 +0100 cfg80211: allow registering to beacons allowed only a single process to register for beacon events per wiphy. This breaks cases where a user may want two or more VIFs on a wiphy and run a seperate hostapd process on each vif. This patch allows multiple beacon listeners, fixing the regression. Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
2012-10-26 21:49:25 +00:00
spin_lock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
list_for_each_entry_safe(reg, tmp, &rdev->beacon_registrations,
list) {
if (reg->nlportid == notify->portid) {
list_del(&reg->list);
kfree(reg);
break;
}
}
spin_unlock_bh(&rdev->beacon_registrations_lock);
cfg80211: allow registering to beacons Add the ability to register to received beacon frames to allow implementing OLBC logic in userspace. The registration is per wiphy since there's no point in receiving the same frame multiple times. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2011-11-04 10:18:17 +00:00
}
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
rcu_read_unlock();
return NOTIFY_DONE;
}
static struct notifier_block nl80211_netlink_notifier = {
.notifier_call = nl80211_netlink_notify,
};
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
/* initialisation/exit functions */
int nl80211_init(void)
{
wireless: Use genl_register_family_with_ops() Use genl_register_family_with_ops() instead of a copy. Signed-off-by: Michał Mirosław <mirq-linux@rere.qmqm.pl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-21 10:34:06 +00:00
int err;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
wireless: Use genl_register_family_with_ops() Use genl_register_family_with_ops() instead of a copy. Signed-off-by: Michał Mirosław <mirq-linux@rere.qmqm.pl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-05-21 10:34:06 +00:00
err = genl_register_family_with_ops(&nl80211_fam,
nl80211_ops, ARRAY_SIZE(nl80211_ops));
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
if (err)
return err;
err = genl_register_mc_group(&nl80211_fam, &nl80211_config_mcgrp);
if (err)
goto err_out;
cfg80211/nl80211: scanning (and mac80211 update to use it) This patch adds basic scan capability to cfg80211/nl80211 and changes mac80211 to use it. The BSS list that cfg80211 maintains is made driver-accessible with a private area in each BSS struct, but mac80211 doesn't yet use it. That's another large project. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-02-10 20:25:55 +00:00
err = genl_register_mc_group(&nl80211_fam, &nl80211_scan_mcgrp);
if (err)
goto err_out;
cfg80211: add regulatory netlink multicast group This allows us to send to userspace "regulatory" events. For now we just send an event when we change regulatory domains. We also notify userspace when devices are using their own custom world roaming regulatory domains. Signed-off-by: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-10 02:07:42 +00:00
err = genl_register_mc_group(&nl80211_fam, &nl80211_regulatory_mcgrp);
if (err)
goto err_out;
nl80211: Event notifications for MLME events Add new nl80211 event notifications (and a new multicast group, "mlme") for informing user space about received and processed Authentication, (Re)Association Response, Deauthentication, and Disassociation frames in station and IBSS modes (i.e., MLME SAP interface primitives MLME-AUTHENTICATE.confirm, MLME-ASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-REASSOCIATE.confirm, MLME-DEAUTHENTICATE.indicate, and MLME-DISASSOCIATE.indication). The event data is encapsulated as the 802.11 management frame since we already have the frame in that format and it includes all the needed information. This is the initial step in providing MLME SAP interface for authentication and association with nl80211. In other words, kernel code will act as the MLME and a user space application can control it as the SME. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-03-19 11:39:21 +00:00
err = genl_register_mc_group(&nl80211_fam, &nl80211_mlme_mcgrp);
if (err)
goto err_out;
cfg80211: introduce nl80211 testmode command This introduces a new NL80211_CMD_TESTMODE for testing and calibration use with nl80211. There's no multiplexing like like iwpriv had, and the command is not available by default, it needs to be explicitly enabled in Kconfig and shouldn't be enabled in most kernels. The command requires a wiphy index or interface index to identify the device to operate on, and the new TESTDATA attribute. There also is API for sending replies to the command, and testmode multicast messages (on a testmode multicast group). I've also updated mac80211 to be able to pass through the command to the driver, since it itself doesn't implement the testmode command. Additionally, to give people an idea of how to use the command, I've added a little code to hwsim that makes use of the new command to set the powersave mode, this is currently done via debugfs and should remain there, and the testmode command only serves as an example of how to use this best -- with nested netlink attributes in the TESTDATA attribute. A hwsim testmode tool can be found at http://git.sipsolutions.net/hwsim.git/. This tool is BSD licensed so people can easily use it as a basis for their own internal fabrication and validation tools. Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2009-07-01 19:26:51 +00:00
#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
err = genl_register_mc_group(&nl80211_fam, &nl80211_testmode_mcgrp);
if (err)
goto err_out;
#endif
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
err = netlink_register_notifier(&nl80211_netlink_notifier);
if (err)
goto err_out;
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
return 0;
err_out:
genl_unregister_family(&nl80211_fam);
return err;
}
void nl80211_exit(void)
{
cfg80211/mac80211: allow registering for and sending action frames This implements a new command to register for action frames that userspace wants to handle instead of the in-kernel rejection. It is then responsible for rejecting ones that it decided not to handle. There is no unregistration, but the socket can be closed for that. Frames that are not registered for will not be forwarded to userspace and will be rejected by the kernel, the cfg80211 API helps implementing that. Additionally, this patch adds a new command that allows doing action frame transmission from userspace. It can be used either to exchange action frames on the current operational channel (e.g., with the AP with which we are currently associated) or to exchange off-channel Public Action frames with the remain-on-channel command. Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com>
2010-02-15 10:53:10 +00:00
netlink_unregister_notifier(&nl80211_netlink_notifier);
[NL80211]: add netlink interface to cfg80211 Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> Signed-off-by: John W. Linville <linville@tuxdriver.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2007-09-20 17:09:35 +00:00
genl_unregister_family(&nl80211_fam);
}